Personal Embroidery Design Software System

Instruction Manual
Before using this software, first read the Reference Guide for details on
installing the software.
In addition, be sure to read this Instruction Manual before using the software.

We recommend that you keep this document nearby for future reference.

Congratulations on choosing our product!

Thank you very much for purchasing our product. To obtain the best
performance from this device and to ensure safe and correct operation, please
read this Instruction Manual carefully, and then keep it in a safe place.

Please read before using this product

For designing beautiful embroidery designs

This system al ows you to create a wide variety of embroidery designs and
supports a wider range of sewing attribute settings (thread density, sewing pitch,
etc.). However, the final result will depend on your particular sewing machine
model. We recommend that you make a trial sewing sample with your sewing
data before sewing on the final material.
Notice

Alway use an USB drive to save works as it without dongle or you will get errors messages.

Do not save works on computer.Save on usb drive and transfer to Brother Machine.

Neither this Instruction Manual nor the Reference Guide explains how to use
your computer under Windows®. Please refer to the Windows® manuals.

Copyright acknowledgment

Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Other product

names mentioned in the Instruction Manual and Reference Guide may be
trademarks of registered trademarks of their respective companies and are
hereby acknowledged.

Caution
The software product is protected by copyright laws. This software can be
used or copied only in accordance with the copyright laws. SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS

This product is intended for household use.

For additional product information and updates, visit our website at:

http://www.brother.com/ or http://support.brother.com/

Table of Contents

Table of Contents ............................2

Creating Embroidery Patterns

Containing Text ...........................100

How To Use Manuals.......................4

Tutorial 2: Using Templates...........................101

Template Feature ..........................................104

Support/Service ...............................5

Tutorial 3: Entering text .................................105

Advanced Operations for Entering Text ........106

Technical Support .............................................5

Tutorial 4: Monograms...................................120

Online Registration............................................5

Advanced Operations for Entering

Monograms....................................................123

Program ............................................................6

Tutorial 5: Creating Name Drop.....................124

Name Drop Feature (Replacing Text) ...........127

Creating Embroidery Patterns

Comparison of Types of Data

Using Images ...............................130

Created With PE-DESIGN 10...........8

Stitch Wizard: Automatically Converting an

Image to an Embroidery Design ....................131

Starting Up/Exiting Applications....9

Tutorial 6-1: Auto Punch................................132

Auto Punch Features.....................................134

Starting Up the Application................................9

Tutorial 6-2: Cross Stitch ...............................135

Exiting the Application.......................................9

Cross Stitch Features ....................................137

About the Startup Wizard ................................10

Tutorial 6-3: Photo Stitch 1............................139

Understanding Windows ..............11

Photo Stitch 1 Features .................................142

Tutorial 6-4: Photo Stitch 2............................144

Layout & Editing Window ................................11

Photo Stitch 2 Features .................................146

Example of Importing Embroidery Data ..........13

Advanced Stitch Wizard Operations..............147

Importing Image Data ....................................150

Basic Software Settings................14

Changing the Image Settings ........................152

Tutorial 7: Print and Stitch .............................154

Specifying the Design Page Settings ..............14

Using Fabric Selector......................................17

Operations for Specific

Specifying Basic Display Settings ...................18

Applications .................................160

Basic Layout & Editing

Tutorial 8-1: Creating Appliqués ....................161

Operations......................................22

Tutorial 8-2: Creating Embroidered

Patches..........................................................166
Tutorial 1: Drawing shapes to create an

Tutorial 8-3: Creating a Cutwork Pattern

embroidery design...........................................23

Filled with Net Stitching .................................169

Editing Embroidery Designs ............................31

On Using the Cutwork Functions...................173

Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types for

Tutorial 9-1: Creating Split Embroidery

Lines and Regions ..........................................46

Designs..........................................................177

Drawing Shapes..............................................60

Tutorial 9-2: Creating Design for

Reshaping Embroidery Patterns .....................66

Multi-Position Hoops......................................183

Editing a Stitch Pattern....................................71

Tutorial 9-3: Embroidering With the Jumbo

Checking Embroidery Patterns .......................77

Frame ............................................................188

Opening/Importing Embroidery Designs .........90

Specifying/Saving Custom Sewing

Attributes .......................................................192
Saving and Printing .........................................95

Using Manual Punch Tool .............................197

Table of Contents

Transferring Data ........................ 200

Editing the Points of a Font Character

Pattern .......................................................... 288

Transferring Embroidery Designs to

Checking the Created Font Patterns ............ 289

Machines .......................................................201

Saving Font Character Patterns ................... 291

Using the Link Function to Embroider From

Changing the Settings .................................. 292

the Computer.................................................204

Design Center.............................. 210

Supplement ................................. 294

For Basic Operations .................................... 295

Basic Design Center Operations ...................211

On Settings ................................................... 297

Design Center Window..................................221

Changing Various Settings ........................... 298

Original Image Stage.....................................222

For Making an Effective Use of This

Line Image Stage ..........................................224

Application .................................................... 303

Figure Handle Stage......................................226

Sew Setting Stage .........................................231

Menus/Tools and Reference ...... 306

Design Database ......................... 240

Layout & Editing............................................ 307

Design Center............................................... 312

Design Database Window .............................241

Design Database .......................................... 315

Starting Up Design Database ........................242

Programmable Stitch Creator ....................... 317

Organizing Embroidery Designs....................243

Font Creator.................................................. 318

Opening Embroidery Designs........................245

Sewing Attributes.......................................... 320

Transferring Embroidery Designs to

Font List ........................................................ 340

Machines .......................................................246
Troubleshooting ............................................ 344

Searching for an Embroidery Design.............251

New Features of PE-DESIGN 10.................. 346

Converting Embroidery Design Files to

Different Formats...........................................252

Index............................................. 348

Checking Embroidery Designs ......................253

Outputting a Catalog of Embroidery

Designs..........................................................255

Programmable Stitch Creator .... 258

Basic Programmable Stitch Creator

Operations .....................................................259

Creating Fill/Stamp Stitch Pattern .................260

Editing a Pattern in Fill/Stamp Mode .............264

Creating Motif Stitch Pattern..........................266

Editing a Pattern in Motif Mode .....................269

Programmable Stitch Creator Window ..........270

Opening a Template ......................................271

Preview Window ............................................272

Saving Patterns .............................................272

Changing the Settings ...................................273

Font Creator ................................ 274

Basic Font Creator Operations ......................275

Font Creator Window.....................................282

Opening a File ...............................................284

Selecting a Character and Preparing the

Template........................................................285

Creating a Font Character Pattern ................287

How To Use Manuals

The following manuals are included with this software.

Reference Guide

Read this guide before using the software. This guide contains instructions and
precautions necessary to begin using the software. The second half is filled with
tutorials that use key features to create embroidery patterns as well as project
examples.

Instruction Manual

This manual contains instruction on how to use the PE-DESIGN software.

First, read "PE-DESIGN Software ", "Starting Up/Exiting Application",

"Comparison of Types of Data Created With PE-DESIGN 10", "Example of
Importing Embroidery Data" and "Understanding Windows" to gain a general
understanding of the basic software applications.

Next, read "Basic Layout & Editing Operations". This chapter provides
procedures for creating embroidery patterns as examples for performing basic
Layout & Editing operations and transferring patterns to the embroidery
machine. Follow the procedures to create actual embroidery patterns.

The chapters dedicated to each application provide descriptions of the useful

functions and the various settings. Each descriptive title allows you to easily find
the information that you need. In the chapters containing tutorials, follow the
procedures to practice the various operations. Afterward, read the detailed
descriptions.

Additional information is provided in the following chapters. Read the

appropriate chapter when necessary.

Support/Service: Provides warranty information for this product in addition to

the procedure for updating the software.

Supplement: Provides function introductions, details on the settings available in

the [Options] dialog box and troubleshooting procedures in addition to tips and
precautions to maximize the use of this software.

Menus/Tools and Reference: Provides lists of sew types, sewing attributes and
fonts in addition to the various commands.

The procedures in this manual are written for use in Windows® 8.1. If this
software is used on an operating system other than Windows® 8.1, the
procedures and appearance of the windows may differ slightly.

■ Opening the Instruction Manual (PDF format)

This manual is provided in a PDF format on the included "PE-DESIGN Software

". The Instruction Manual is also installed during software installation.

Click the down arrow in the bottom-left corner of the [Start] screen to show the
[All Apps] view, and then Click

[Instruction Manual] under the title [PE-DESIGN 10] in the screen. (For
Windows® 7 or Windows Vista®

users: Click [All Programs], then [PE-DESIGN 10], then [Instruction

Manual].) Otherwise, with any application other than Design Database, click
, then [Instruction Manual].

With Design Database, click [Help], then [Instruction Manual].

• Adobe® Reader® is required for viewing and printing the PDF version of the
Instruction Manual.

• If Adobe® Reader® is not on your computer, it must be installed. It can be

downloaded from the Adobe Systems Incorporated Web site
(http://www.adobe.com/).

Support/Service

Technical Support

Contact Technical Support if you have a problem. Please check the company
web site

(http://www.brother.com/) to find the Technical Support in your area. To view

the FAQ and information for software updates, visit the Brother Solutions Center
at (http://support.brother.com/).

• Have the information ready before contacting Technical Support.

 Make sure your computer's operating system is current with all updates.

 Have the make and model of your computer and Windows® Operating
System. (Refer to the Reference Guide for system requirements.)

 Information on error messages that appear. This information will help

expedite your questions more quickly.
5
PE-DESIGN Software
•

• We recommend that you back up this software in order to prepare for

unexpected problems.

7
Comparison of Types of Data Created

With PE-DESIGN 10

Three types of data are used in PE-DESIGN 10.

Stitch pattern: Built-in embroidery data (created through a conversion in PE-

DESIGN 10) Text pattern: Data created with the [Text] tools

Shape pattern (Outline pattern): Data created with the [Shapes] tools. A
uniform/multiple sewing direction(s) are applied to the entire region.

Each data can be converted to another type as shown below. The arrows indicate
the directions in which data can be converted. The methods of editing the data
differ depending on the data type.

Shape pattern

Change the shape by

You can specify region and line sew types as well as

editing needle drop points.

sewing attributes, edit paths (by moving/deleting

points, reshaping through handle movements or by

splitting/connecting lines at points), change the

sewing direction, input/edit stamps, apply

embossing/engraving effects, remove/merge

overlapping regions, set hole sewing, split outlines

and create offset lines and floral patterns.

For example, when a stitch pattern is converted to

shapes, the sew types and sewing attributes can be

changed, and the shapes can easily be edited and

Stitch pattern

resized. When text pattern is converted to shapes,

the sewing direction and character shapes can be

edited and offset lines can be created.

Change the shape

by editing paths.

Text pattern

Shape pattern

Edit the text or

change the font.

Functions that are not available with one data type

Stitch pattern

may be performed if the data is converted to a

You can edit (reshaping by moving/deleting points

different type. Convert data to the type that allows

or splitting/connecting lines at points) points (needle

you to perform the operations necessary for creating

drop points) and split stitches; however, you cannot

the desired embroidery data.

specify region and line sew types or sewing

attributes.

Text pattern

You can edit text by entering/deleting characters,

specify text attributes (such as the font or the

transformation shape) and specify sewing

attributes.

8
Starting Up/Exiting Applications

Starting Up the Application

Click the down arrow in the bottom-left corner of the [Start] screen to show the
[All Apps] view, and then Click

[PE-DESIGN 10 (Layout & Editing)] under the title [PE-DESIGN 10] in the
screen.

When the application starts up, the Startup Wizard appears.

cc

"About the Startup Wizard" on page 10

For Windows® 7 or Windows Vista® users: Click

, then [All Programs], then [PE-DESIGN 10], and then

click [PE-DESIGN 10 (Layout & Editing)].

Exiting the Application

Click ,

then

[Exit].

9
Starting Up/Exiting Applications

About the Startup Wizard

When [Layout & Editing] starts up, the following

h Open Embroidery Design

wizard appears.

Click this button to open embroidery data

(.pes).

cc

"Opening a Layout & Editing file" on

page 90
i Start Design Database to Manage

Embroidery Files

Click this button to start up Design

Database.

cc

"Design Database" on page 240

Click this button to open the Instruction

Manual (in PDF format).

ef

k Always show Wizard at Startup

a Use Template Designs

Select this check box to start up the

Click this button to start the [Template

wizard each time Layout & Editing is

Wizard].
started up.

cc

"Tutorial 2: Using Templates" on

page 101

l Close this Wizard

Click this button to close the Startup

b Create Embroidery Patterns Using

Wizard without performing an operation.

Images

Click this button to start the wizard for

creating an embroidery pattern from an

image.

To open the wizard while you are using the

cc

"Stitch Wizard: Automatically Converting

[Layout & Editing], click

at the top of the

an Image to an Embroidery Design" on

window (in the [Quick Access Toolbar]), or click

page 131 and "Importing Image Data" on

page 150

and then select [Wizard] from the command

menu.

c Set Hoop Size and Fabric

Click this button to specify the size of the

Design Page (embroidery hoop size).

The fabric to be embroidered can be

selected, and the sewing attributes

appropriate for that fabric can be

specified.

cc

"Specifying the Design Page Settings" on

page 14 and "Recalling a group of

settings from the list" on page 192

,e,

Click these buttons to import the pattern

shown on the button from the [Import]

pane.

g Most Recently Used Files

Select a thumbnail of the most recently

used file from the list, and then click

[Open] to recall the file.

10
Understanding Windows

Layout & Editing Window

10

11

12

13

14

15

1 Application button

Example: When the Shapes (Rectangle) tool is

Click to display a menu containing commands

selected
for file operations, such as [New], [Save],

[Print] and [Design Settings].

2 Ribbon

Click a tab at the top to display the

corresponding commands.

Refer to the name below each group when

selecting the desired command. Clicking a

3 Quick Access Toolbar

This contains the most frequently used

command with the

mark displays a menu

commands. Since this toolbar is always

containing a choice of commands.

displayed, regardless of the Ribbon tab that is

Some other tabs may appear depending on the

selected, adding your most often used

tool or embroidery pattern that is selected.

commands makes them easily accessible.

These tabs contain various commands for

cc

"Customizing Quick Access Toolbar" on

performing operations with the selected tool or

page 300

embroidery pattern.

4 Option button

Click this button to start up other applications

and specify application settings, such as user

thread charts.

11

Understanding Windows

5 Help button

Click this button to display the Instruction

Manual and view information about the software.

• Panes 6, 7 and 8 can be displayed or hidden

6 Sewing Order pane

from the [Show/Hide] group in the [View] tab. In

This pane shows the sewing order. Click the

addition, these panes can be displayed as

buttons at the top of the pane to change the

separate dialog boxes (Floating) or attached to

sewing order or thread color.

the main window (Docking).

• Position the pointer over a command to display

7 Import/Color/Sewing Attributes/Text

a ScreenTip, which provides a description of the

Attributes panes

command and indicates its shortcut key.

This pane combines tabs for importing

embroidery patterns as wel as for specifying

thread colors, sewing attributes and text

attributes. Click a tab to display the available

parameters.

8 Stitch Simulator pane

The Stitch Simulator shows how the pattern will

be sewn by the machine and how the stitching

will appear.
9 Design Page

The actual part of the work area that can be

saved and sewn.

10 Work area

11 Status Bar

This displays the size of the embroidery data,

the number of stitches or a description of the

selected command.

12 View mode buttons

Click a button to change the View mode.

13 Show grid button

Click to switch between displaying and hiding

the grid.

14 Design Property button

Click to display a dialog box containing sewing

information for the embroidery data.

15 Zoom slider

This displays the current magnification ratio.

Click to specify a value for the magnification

ratio.

Drag the slider to change the magnification ratio.

12
Understanding Windows

Example of Importing Embroidery Data

Using the Import pane

Using Import commands

Embroidery data can be imported by using the

1 Click the [Home] tab.

[Import] pane.

2 Click [Import Patterns] in the [Import] group,

and then click [from Design Library], [from

File], [from Card] or [Decorative Pattern]

from the [Import] menu.

c
d

 The [Import] pane appears on the right

side of the screen.

a From

Select a pattern location.

b Category

The [Import] pane can also be displayed by

Select a pattern category.

selecting the [Import Pane] check box in the

The categories in the pattern location

[View] tab.

selected in the [From] selector are listed.

c The patterns in the category selected in

the [Category] selector appear in the list.

Pointing to a pattern and holding down the

left mouse button displays a dotted box in

the Design Page. This allows you to

check the size of the pattern.

When the [Color] pane, [Sewing Attributes]

d Import
pane or [Text Attributes] pane is displayed, click

Click this button to import the selected

the [Import] tab to display the [Import] pane.

pattern.

• The pattern can also be imported by double-

clicking it in the list or by dragging it to the

Design Page.

• Multiple files cannot be selected to be imported

at the same time.

cc

"From a folder" on page 91 and "From an

original card" on page 92

13
Basic Software Settings

Specifying the Design Page Settings

The color and size of the Design Page can be changed. You can select a Design
Page size according to the size of hoop that you will be using with your
embroidery machine. You can also specify a custom size for the Design Page for
embroidery patterns that will be split and embroidered in multiple sections.

1 Click ,

then

[Design Settings].

d Custom Size
Specify a custom size for split embroidery

patterns.

Select this option, and then type or select

the desired width and height for the

Design Page.

cc

"Tutorial 9-1: Creating Split Embroidery

Designs" on page 177

e Page

Select the desired color for the Design

Page.

f Background

Select the desired color for the work area.

g Default

Specify the settings for the Design Page, and

To return to the default settings, click this

then click [OK].

button.

cba

h
h Edit User Hoop

Click this button to display the [User

Hoop Settings] dialog box, where a user

hoop size can be added. The added user

hoop size appears at the bottom of the list.

cc

"Specifying a user hoop size" on page 15

a Machine Type

Select your machine type. The settings

available in the [Page Size] selector differ

depending on the selected machine type.

b Hoop Size

Select the desired hoop size from the

selector.

c Rotate 90 Degrees

Select this check box to arrange the

pattern in a Design Page rotated 90°.

14

Basic Software Settings

Specifying a user hoop

• The Design Page sizes 130 × 300 mm, 100 ×

size

172 mm indicated by the "*", are used to

embroider multi-position designs using a special

embroidery hoop attached to the embroidery

machine at three installation positions.

a Width, Height

Type in the size of the hoop to be added.

cc

"Tutorial 9-2: Creating Design for Multi-

b Comment

Position Hoops" on page 183

If text was entered in this box, that text

appears beside the size.

• Do not select a hoop size larger than the

embroidery hoop that can be used with your

c Add Hoop

machine.

Click this button to add the hoop size.

• When Cap Frame, Cylinder Frame or Round

d User Hoop List

Frame has been selected, the Design Page

The added hoop size appears in the list.

cannot be rotated 90°.

Select a hoop size in this list to change the

display order or to delete it.

e Up, Down

Click these buttons to move the selected

hoop size up or down in the display order.

f Delete Hoop

Click this button to delete the selected

hoop size.

• A User Hoop cannot rotate 90°.

• A User Hoop cannot be added to the Section

Size (for Hoop Size) selector under Custom

Size.
• Do not create a Custom Hoop larger than the

embroidery hoop that can be used with your

machine.

• Embroidery data created in a user hoop size

cannot be saved in a format for a previous

version.

15
Basic Software Settings

Specifying the sewing area

Optimize hoop change

The pattern drawn in the Design Page is sewn

This setting can be selected if a multi-position hoop

differently depending on the sewing area setting.

(100 × 172 mm or 130 × 300 mm) has been selected

as the Design Page size.

Click [Output] tab.

2 Select the desired sewing area ([Design

Page area] or [Use existing design area]).

Select the check box to optimize the sewing order/

order of hoop position changes so that the number

of times that the hoop position is changed is

reduced to the minimum.

This reduces the risk of misalignment in the

embroidery pattern or uneven stitching from

Design Page area

changing the hoop position too often.

The patterns will be sewn so that the needle

position when you start sewing is aligned with

Jump Stitch Trimming

the center of your Design Page. The

dimension of the pattern matches the size of

These settings are applied only when embroidering

the Design Page, therefore reducing the ability

with our multi-needle embroidery machines. Before

to move a pattern around the layout screen of

these settings can be specified, select

under

your embroidering machine.

[Machine Type] in the [Design Settings] dialog

box.

Design Page (on

Sewing area =

your screen)

Design Page area

Use existing design area

The patterns will be sewn so that the needle

position when you start sewing is aligned with

Specify the minimum jump stitch length for thread

the center of the actual patterns. The actual

trimming.

pattern size is maintained, therefore allowing

greater mobility when using the layout

functions of your embroidering machine.

These settings are not applied with any other

embroidery machine. For details, refer to the

Operation Manual provided with your machine.

cc

"Jump Stitch Trimming" on page 87,

"Specifying trimming settings in Layout &

Editing" on page 297 and "Adding jump

Design Page (on

Sewing area = Use

stitch trimming to new patterns" on

your screen)

existing design area

page 302

16
Basic Software Settings

Using Fabric Selector

A group of sewing attribute settings appropriate for the major types of fabric can
be recalled from the [Fabric Selector] dialog box. Select the fabric to be
embroidered to view a description of the fabric and advice on embroidering.

1 Click ,

then

[Fabric Selector].

• The sewing attributes of imported shapes and

text are not changed.

• Perform a trial sewing before embroidering your

project.

cc

"For Basic Operations" on page 295

Original settings can be saved to be later used in

the [Fabric Selector]. Click

in the [Sewing

Attributes] tab, click [Save As], and then click

2 Select the group of settings to be recalled.

[OK] without changing the name for the settings.

The group of settings that you have saved will

appear with “*” beside its name.

cc

"Saving the settings in a list" on page 192

a Select the type of fabric to be

embroidered to specify the recommended

settings for that fabric.

When a fabric type is selected, a

description appears.

3 Click [OK].

When shapes and text are entered, the

sewing attributes will be set to those

recommended for the selected fabric.

cc

"Specifying sewing attributes" on page 54

17
Basic Software Settings

Specifying Basic Display Settings

Changing the grid settings

Changing the ruler settings

A grid of dotted lines or solid lines can be displayed

The ruler can be displayed or hidden.

or hidden, and the spacing for the grid can be

adjusted.

1 Click the [View] tab.

1 Click [View] tab.

2 To display the ruler, select the [Ruler] check

box in the [Ruler] group.

2 Specify the grid settings.

To hide the ruler, clear the [Ruler] check box.

a Show Grid

Select this check box to display the grid.

Click

to switch the measurement units

b with Axes
between millimeters and inches.

Select this check box to display the grid as

solid lines.

c Interval

Specify the grid spacing.

d Snap to Grid

Select this check box to align patterns

with the grid. The snap feature works

whether or not the grid is displayed.

The

button can also be used to switch the

grid between being displayed or hidden.

18
Basic Software Settings

Changing the guideline

settings

When a pattern is saved, the guidelines are saved

with it. However, the guidelines are deleted if the

Guidelines can also be used when the ruler is

pattern is saved in a format for a version earlier

displayed.

than version 10.

1 Click the [View] tab.

2 Select the [Ruler] check box, and then select

Adjusting on-screen

the [Guideline] check box in the [Ruler]

measurements (Screen

group.

Calibration)

Measurements can be adjusted so that objects will

be displayed at the same size as the actual

embroidery at a zoom ratio of 100%. Once this

adjustment is made, it wil not need to be done again

later.

3 Click a ruler in the Design Page.

1 Click ,

then

[Options].

appears, and a guideline is drawn.

1 Guideline

• To move a guideline, drag

.
2 Click [Screen Calibration]. Hold a ruler

• To delete a guideline, click

against the screen to measure the length of

a. Next, enter the value at b, and then click

[OK].

• A guideline is added each time the ruler is

clicked. In addition, up to 100 guidelines each

can be added to the horizontal and vertical

rulers.

• While a guideline is being dragged, its position is

shown in the status bar.

• When the [Ruler] check box or the [Guideline]

check box is cleared, the guidelines are hidden.

• If both the [Show Grid] and [Snap to Grid]

check boxes are selected, the guidelines will be

added/moved along the lines of the grid.

cc
"Changing the grid settings" on page 18

Be sure to enter the length in millimeters. A

value in inches is invalid.

19
Basic Software Settings

System unit

1 Click ,

then

[Options].

2 Click [System Unit], and then select the

desired measurement units ([mm] or [inch]).

20

Basic Software Settings

21

Basic Layout & Editing Operations

This section describes the basic operations

performed in Layout & Editing, such as drawing

shapes, editing the embroidery design, specifying

sewing attributes, saving the file and printing it.

Tutorial 1: Drawing shapes to create an embroidery design

Tutorial 1: Drawing shapes to create an

embroidery design

This section will describe how to combine various shapes to create an

embroidery design.

We wil use an Outline tool to draw the stem. Then, we will create the leaves,
flower and flower pot by importing shape patterns.

The sample file for this tutorial is located at Documents (My documents)\PE-
DESIGN 10\Tutorial\Tutorial_1.

Step 1
Drawing, importing and moving shapes

Step 2

Duplicating, flipping and moving shapes

Step 3

Specifying hole sewing

Step 4

Applying a pattern to stitching

Step 5

Editing points and modifying shapes

2 To import a shape, select [Outline Shapes]

Step 1 Drawing, importing and

from the [From] selector of the [Import] pane,

moving shapes

then [Basic Shapes] from the [Category]

Shapes can be created either by drawing them with

selector. Select the shape, and then click

the Shapes tools or by importing sample shape

[Import].

patterns.

1 To draw a shape, select a Shapes tool, and

then drag the pointer in the Design Page to

draw the shape.

Specify the sew types for the shape on the

[Shapes] tab, and the thread colors on the

[Shapes] tab or the [Color] pane.

1 Shapes tools

23
Tutorial 1: Drawing shapes to create an embroidery design

(D) Click [LIME GREEN].

If the desired color is not displayed, move

the scroll bar until it appears.

To view the thread colors in a list so that the

desired color can more easily be found, click [To

list mode].

cc
"Setting the sew type" on page 49

asic

1 Line color button

(E) Click the [Line sew type] selector, and

2 Line sew type selector

ayo

then select [Zigzag Stitch].

3 Region color button

4 Region sew type selector

t&E

5 Selected thread color and color name

6 Thread color palette

ditin

1 Draw the stem.

(A) Click the [Home] tab.

Op

(B) Click [Shapes] in the [Tools] group, and

rat

then click

ions

(F) Click the start point 1, and then double-

click the end point 2.

(C) Click the [Color] tab to display the color

palette.

The color, sewing attributes and size can also be

changed after the shape is drawn.

24
Tutorial 1: Drawing shapes to create an embroidery design

2 Create the leaf on the right.

This time, we will import a shape pattern. We

wil also specify the color and sew type for the

The thread colors being used are listed under

region.

[Colors Used].

(A) Click the [Import] tab.

(H) Drag the handle to adjust the leaf to the

(B) Select [Outline Shapes] from the [From]

desired size.

selector and [Basic Shapes] from the

[Category] selector.

(C) Select [BS_shapes27.pes], and then

click [Import].

(I) Place the pointer over the leaf so that the

shape of the pointer changes to

, and

then drag the leaf to the desired position.

Step 2 Duplicating, flipping and

(D) Click the [Shapes] tab.

moving shapes

(E) Click

for line sewing, and then click

Now, we wil duplicate the leaf on the right side, flip

it horizontally, and then move it to the left side of the

under [Colors Used] to select [LIME

stem.

GREEN].

1 To duplicate the leaf on the right.

(F) Click the [Line sew type] selector, and

then select [Zigzag Stitch].

(A) Select the leaf.

(B) While holding down the <Ctrl> key, drag

the leaf to move it.

(G) As with the line color, click

for region

(C) Release the mouse button.

sewing, and then click

under [Colors

Used] to select [LIME GREEN].

25
Tutorial 1: Drawing shapes to create an embroidery design

2 To flip the duplicated leaf horizontally.

• Multiple embroidery patterns can be selected in

any of the following ways.

 Click the first pattern, and then, while holding

down the <Ctrl> key, click the next pattern.

 Drag the pointer to draw a selection frame

around the patterns to be selected.

• Flipped copies can also be created by clicking

[Arrange Copy] in the [Clipboard] group of the

[Home] tab, then clicking [Vertical Mirror

Copy].

(A) Right-click on the duplicated leaf.

cc

"Using the Mirror Copy tool" on page 35.

 A drop down menu wil appear.

(B) Click [Flip], then [Horizontal].

Step 3 Specifying hole sewing

3 Drag the duplicated leaf to the left side of the

stem.

Now, we wil create the flower and a circle at the

center. Then, we will apply a setting so that the

overlapping areas are not sewn twice.

asic

1 Create the flower petals.

Layo

(A) Click the [Import] tab.

u

(B) Select [BS_shapes26.pes], and then

t&E

click [Import].

diting Op

To move an object horizontally, hold down the

rat

<Shift> key while dragging the object.

ions

4 Align the leaves on the left and right sides.

(C) Click the [Shapes] tab.

(A) While holding down the <Ctrl> key, click

the leaf on the right side, then the leaf on

the left side to select the two leaves.

Then, right-click the selected leaves.

(B) Right-click the leaves, and then click

[Align], then [Top].

26
Tutorial 1: Drawing shapes to create an embroidery design

(D) Select [RED] in the color palette as the

(D) Select [YELLOW] in the color palette as

line color and [Zigzag Stitch] as the sew

the line color and [Zigzag Stitch] as the

type a.

sew type a.

(E) Select [Radial Stitch] as the sew type

(E) Select [YELLOW] in the color palette as

b.

the region color and [Concentric Circle

Stitch] as the sew type

(F) Drag the handle (

b.

c) to adjust the flower

petals to the desired size.

(F) Drag the circle to the center of the flower

petals.

(G) Drag the flower petals to adjust their

position.

(G) While holding down the <Shift> key, drag

the handle (c) to adjust the circle to the

Create the circle at the center.

desired size.

(A) Click the [Import] tab.

(B) Select [BS_shapes01.pes], and then

click [Import].

If the <Shift> key is held down while a handle is

dragged, the pattern is enlarged or reduced from

the center of the pattern.

3 Select the patterns where hole sewing is to be

applied.

(A) While holding down the <Ctrl> key, click

the yel ow circle a and the flower petals

b.

(C) Click the [Shapes] tab.

27
Tutorial 1: Drawing shapes to create an embroidery design

4 Specify hole sewing.

(B) Select [BS_shapes13.pes], and then

click [Import].

(A) Click the [Home] tab.

(B) Click [Modify Overlap] in the [Edit]

group, and then click [Set hole sewing].

Basic

Hole sewing cannot be applied if one of the

patterns is not completely enclosed within the

other pattern.

ayo

(C) Click the [Shapes] tab.

cc

"Hole sewing" on page 39.

(D) Select [CLAY BROWN] in the color

ut & E

palette as the line color and [Zigzag

Stitch] as the sew type a.

Step 4 Applying a pattern to

ditin

stitching

g Op

Detailed line and region attribute settings can be

a
specified from the [Sewing Attributes] pane. Now,

we will specify settings for region sewing for the

atio

flowerpot.

(E) Select [DEEP GOLD] in the color palette

1 Specify the color and sew type for the line and

as the region color and [Prog. Fill Stitch]

region of the flowerpot.

as the sew type b.

(A) Click the [Import] tab.

28
Tutorial 1: Drawing shapes to create an embroidery design

2 Specify the sewing attributes.

(F) Select [net4], and then click [OK].

(A) Click the [Sewing Attributes] tab.

If the [Sewing Attributes] pane is not

displayed, click the [View] tab, then

[Attributes], then [Sewing Attributes].

(A)

(C)
(D)

(G) Type "7.6" to specify the pattern size.

(E)

(B)

1 The selected pattern is displayed.

The effects of the specified settings

can be previewed. This preview can

be displayed/hidden by clicking the

• If the dialog box is displayed in Expert mode,

Show Hint/Hide Hint button.

click [To Beginner mode] to display the dialog

box in Beginner mode.

Click this button to return the attribute

• More detailed settings can be specified in Expert

to its default setting.

mode.

cc

"Specifying sewing attributes" on page 54

(B) There are two display modes for the

[Sewing Attributes] pane. For this

example, we will specify settings in

Beginner mode.

(C) In the [Density] box, type "5.0".

(D) In the [Direction] section, drag the red

arrow to 90°. Otherwise, type "90".

(E) Click

in the [Programmable fill]

section.

29
Tutorial 1: Drawing shapes to create an embroidery design

(D) Right-click the top point to be deleted, and

Step 5 Editing points and

then click [Delete].

modifying shapes

Now, we will delete one corner from the pentagon to

(D)

create a flowerpot.

1 Drag the handle to adjust the flowerpot to the

desired size.

Drag the flowerpot to adjust its position.

(C)

 The point is deleted to form a trapezoid.

Basic

2 Delete a point.

ayo

(A) Click the [Home] tab.

ut & E

(B) Click [Select] in the [Select] group, and

then click

diting

(A)

Op

er

(B)

ation

If you want save or export

s
cc

For details on saving embroidery

patterns, refer to "Saving" on page 95.

(C) Click the shape for the flowerpot.

For details on transferring designs to an

embroidery machine, refer to

 The points in the shape appear.

"Transferring Embroidery Designs to

Machines" on page 201.

30
Editing Embroidery Designs

Editing Embroidery Designs

■ Selecting all embroidery patterns

Selecting patterns

1 Click the [Home] tab.

1 Click the [Home] tab.

2 Click [Select] in the [Select] group, and then

2 Click in the [Select] group.

click [Select All].

3 Click the pattern.

• All patterns can also be selected by pressing the

shortcut keys <Ctrl> + <A> .

• Locked embroidery patterns cannot be selected.

cc

"Locking embroidery patterns" on page 86

1 Rotation handle

2 Handles

Moving patterns

• If

is not displayed in the [Select] group,

■ Moving manually

click the arrow at the bottom of the button, and

Drag the selected pattern(s) to the desired location.

then click

• The status bar shows the dimensions (width and

height) of the pattern.

• To move the pattern horizontally or vertically,

hold down the <Shift> key while dragging it.

4 To select an additional pattern, hold down the

• Pressing the arrow keys moves the selected

<Ctrl> key and click the other pattern.

pattern.

• Holding down the <Ctrl> key and dragging the

pattern creates a duplicate of the pattern at the

destination.

• You can also select patterns by dragging the

pointer across the pattern.

• Press the <Tab> key to select the next pattern in

the order that they were created.

• If multiple patterns are selected, a pattern can

be deselected by holding down the <Ctrl> key

while clicking the pattern.

31
Editing Embroidery Designs

■ Moving embroidery patterns to

the center

1 Select the pattern(s), and then click the

[Home] tab.

2 Click [Arrange] in the [Edit] group, and then

click [Layout], then [Move to Center].

1 Top

2 Middle

asic
■ Aligning embroidery patterns

3 Bottom

4 Left

1 Select the patterns, and then click the [Home]

5 Center

ayo

tab.

6 Right

ut & E

2 Click [Arrange] in the [Edit] group, click

Scaling patterns

[Layout], and then click the desired command

dit

under [Horizontal] or [Vertical].

in

■ Scaling manually

g Op

1 Select the pattern(s).

erat

1
ions

1 Handles

2 Drag the handle to adjust the selected

 The selected patterns are aligned as

pattern(s) to the desired size.

shown below.

We recommend not scaling patterns imported from

original cards.

32
Editing Embroidery Designs

b To change the width and height

proportionally, select the [Maintain

aspect ratio] check box.

• If the <Shift> key is held down while a handle is

dragged, the pattern is enlarged or reduced from

c To resize the selected pattern while

the center of the pattern.

maintaining the original density and fill

pattern, select the [Keep density and fill

• As you drag the handle, the current size is

displayed on the status bar.

pattern] check box.

• When scaling stitch patterns, the number of

stitches remains the same, resulting in a loss of

quality. To maintain the density and fill pattern of

The [Keep density and fill pattern] check box is

the embroidery pattern, hold down the <Ctrl>

available only if stitch pattern is selected.

key while scaling. Even stitch patterns with a

non-uniform stitch density and needle drop point

cc

"Enlarging/Reducing Stitch Patterns" on

pattern can be scaled while maintaining the

page 295

density and fill pattern.

cc

"Enlarging/Reducing Stitch Patterns" on

page 295.

Rotating patterns

■ Rotating manually

■ Scaling numerically

1 Select the pattern(s).

1 Select the pattern(s), and then click the

2 Drag the rotation handle.

[Home] tab.

2 Click [Arrange] in the [Edit] group, and then

click [Size].

a The shape of pointer changes to

3 Specify the size, and then click [OK].

b Rotate

1 Rotation handle
b

To rotate the pattern in 15° increments, hold down

the <Shift> key while dragging the handle.

a Select the whether the width and height

will be set as a percentage (%) or a

dimension (millimeters or inches). Set the

width and height.

33
Editing Embroidery Designs

■ Rotating numerically

Flipping patterns

1 Select the pattern(s), and then click the

horizontally or vertically

[Home] tab.

2 Click [Arrange] in the [Edit] group, and then

1 Select the pattern(s), and then click the

click [Rotate], then [Rotate].

[Home] tab.

2 Click [Arrange] in the [Edit] group, and then

click [Flip], then [Flip Vertically] or [Flip

Horizontally].

b
Click [Rotate Right] or [Rotate Left] to rotate the

pattern 90° clockwise or counterclockwise.

Basic

3 Type or select the rotation angle. Click [OK].

Layo

ut & E

diting Op

erat

ions

An angle can also be selected by dragging

in

the [Rotate] dialog box.

Some patterns imported from original cards cannot

be flipped.

34
Editing Embroidery Designs

3 Move the pointer, and then click when the

Arrange Copies

patterns are arranged as desired.

It may not be possible to create mirror copies of

some embroidery data read from original cards.

■ Using the Mirror Copy tool

■ Using the Circle Copy tool

1 Select the pattern(s), and then click the

[Home] tab.
2 Click [Arrange Copy] in the [Clipboard]

group, and then click [Vertical Mirror Copy],

[Horizontal Mirror Copy] or [Four-Way

1 Select the pattern(s), and then click the

Mirror Copy].

[Home] tab.

2 Click [Arrange Copy] in the [Clipboard]

group, and then click [Circle Copy].

35
Editing Embroidery Designs

3 Specify the pattern arrangement and spacing.

5 Move the pointer to select the desired angle.

a Select the desired arrangement.

b Specify the spacing between patterns.

The higher the value, the wider the

patterns are spaced from each other.

Basic

4 Drag the pointer to draw a circle or an oval.

Layo

ut & E

diting

Rotating the line changes the orientation of

Op

the patterns.

eratio

ns

• To rotate the line in 15° increments, hold down

the <Shift> key while moving the pointer.

• To draw a circle, hold down the <Shift> key

The angle of the line appears in the status bar.

while dragging the pointer.

• While changing the orientation by moving the

• To redraw the ellipse, right-click the Design

pointer, the pattern arrangement and spacing

Page to return to before the ellipse was drawn.

can still be changed in the [Circle Copy] dialog

box.

6 Click to finish the copies.

36
Editing Embroidery Designs

■ Using the Matrix Copy tool

4 Click in the Design Page, and then move the

pointer.

A rectangle and the patterns that can be

arranged within it appear as dotted lines.

1 Select the pattern(s), and then click the

[Home] tab.

2 Click [Arrange Copy] in the [Clipboard]

group, and then click [Matrix Copy].

• To redraw the rectangle, right-click the Design

Page to return to before the rectangle was

drawn.

• While resizing the rectangle by moving the

pointer, the pattern spacing can still be changed

in the [Matrix Copy] dialog box.

5 Click to finish the copies.

3 Specify the spacing between patterns. The

higher the value, the wider the patterns are

spaced from each other.

37
Editing Embroidery Designs

■ Optimizing the sewing order

Adding a decorative

Before using an [Arrange Copy] tool, optimizing the

sewing order adjusts the sewing order of the

pattern

patterns created with the [Arrange Copy] tool in

order to reduce the number of thread color changes.

A decorative pattern can be added to selected

embroidery pattern.

[Optimize Sewing Order]

[Optimize Sewing Order]

not selected

selected

1 Select the pattern(s).

2 Display the [Import] pane, and select

[Decorative Pattern] from the [From]

selector.

3 Select a category from the [Category]

selector, select the desired decorative pattern

from the list, and then click [Decorative

Import].

Basic

The sewing order is the

Patterns will be sewn so

ayo

order in which patterns

that those with the same

are created.

thread colors will be

ut

connected.

&E

1 Select the pattern(s), and then click the

dit
[Home] tab.

ing

2 Click [Arrange Copy] in the [Clipboard]

Op

group, and then click [Optimize Sewing

er

Order] so that the check mark appears.

ations

a Maintain aspect ratio

When the check box is selected

The original height-to-width proportion of

the added decorative pattern is

maintained.

3 Perform the Arrange Copy operation.

38
Editing Embroidery Designs

When the check box is cleared

■ Ungrouping patterns
The height-to-width proportion of the

decorative pattern changes with the

1 Select grouped patterns, and then click the

height-to-width proportion of the selected

[Home] tab.

embroidery pattern.

2 Click [Group] in the [Edit] group, and then

click [Ungroup].

If no pattern is selected, the button wil appear as

the [Import] button. Clicking this button will import

the decorative pattern at its standard size.

■ Editing grouped patterns

individually

Grouping/Ungrouping

Even after patterns are grouped, they can be edited

individually.

embroidery patterns

1 To select a single pattern within a group, hold

■ Grouping patterns

down the <Alt> key while clicking the pattern.

1 Select several patterns, and then click the

2 Edit the pattern.

[Home] tab.

2 Click [Group] in the [Edit] group, and then

Hole sewing

click [Group].

By specifying hole sewing, the stitching in

overlapping regions will not be sewn twice. Hole

sewing can be set only when one region completely

encloses another.

Embroidery patterns created with the Shapes tools

can be selected to set hole sewing.

Hole sewing not set

Hole sewing set

1 Sewn twice

2 Sewn once

39
Editing Embroidery Designs

1 Select a pair of patterns, for example, a star

■ Canceling hole sewing

included in a pentagon.

1 Select a pattern that has been set for hole

While holding down the <Ctrl> key, click the

sewing.

star, then the pentagon.

2 Click the [Home] tab.

3 Click [Modify Overlap] in the [Edit] group,

and then click [Cancel hole sewing].

1 Valid

2 Invalid

asic

Changing shapes of

overlapped patterns

ayo

Hole sewing cannot be specified with the following

shape patterns.

Embroidery patterns created with the Shapes tools

ut

can be selected to remove overlapping regions or to

• Patterns with an intersecting outline.

&E

be merged.

• Patterns with multiple sewing direction lines.

ditin

■ Removing overlapping

2 Click the [Home] tab.

Overlapped patterns can be set so that the

Op

overlapping region is removed.

Click [Modify Overlap] in the [Edit] group,

erat

and then click [Set hole sewing].

ions

1 While holding down the <Ctrl> key, click two

or more overlapped patterns to select them.

2 Click the [Home] tab.

To see better what the hole sewing setting does,

preview the patterns before and after setting hole

sewing.

cc

"Stitch View" on page 78

40
Editing Embroidery Designs

3 Click [Modify Overlap] in the [Edit] group,

■ Merging

and then click [Remove Overlap].

Overlapped pattern can be merged together.

 The color and sew type of the last pattern

drawn (topmost pattern) is applied to the

merged pattern.

• When partially overlapped

1 While holding down the <Ctrl> key, click two

or more overlapped patterns to select them.

2 Click the [Home] tab.

3 Click [Modify Overlap] in the [Edit] group,

and then click [Merge].

• When enclosed

 If this cannot be applied to the selected

patterns, an error message appears.

• When partially overlapped

First pattern in the sewing order

After removing or merging an overlapping region

Second pattern in the sewing order

of patterns with sewing directions specified, the

sewing direction returns to the uniform default

Third pattern in the sewing order

direction.

cc

"Specifying the sewing direction" on page 51

41
Editing Embroidery Designs

Splitting Shape pattern

b

To remove the last point that was entered, right-

click the mouse button.

5 Double-click in the Design Page to specify the

section to be split off.

• Only closed patterns with no

intersecting lines can be split. The

pattern shown at the right cannot be

split.

1 Select a shape pattern, and then click the

• The inside pattern with hole sewing applied

[Shapes] tab.

cannot be split.

• If the enclosing line that was drawn intersects

cc

For detail on the shape pattern, refer to

itself, the section cannot be split off, and a

page 8

message appears.

B
• After splitting a pattern with fit text to outline

asic

2 Click [Split Outline] in the [Tools] group to

select the [Split Outline] tool.

applied, fit text to outline will be canceled.

• If the entered patterns are not in the desired

ayo

sewing order, change it in the [Sewing Order]

pane.

ut & E

cc

"Sewing order optimization" on page 83, and

"Changing colors" on page 85

dit

cc

"Checking and Editing the Sewing Order" on

in

 If the design contains overlapping patterns,

page 82

g
the selected pattern will appear in front of

Op

the others. All patterns other than the

er

selected pattern will appear in gray.

at

Creating a floral pattern

ion

Line stitching in a floral pattern can be created

based on the selected shape.

3 Click in the Design Page at the point where

you want to start drawing the enclosing lines.

Continue clicking in the Design Page to

Draw a shape, and then select it.

specify each corner of the enclosure around

the area to be cut off.

Be sure to select a closed line.

cc

"Changing the attributes of line ends" on

page 64

2 Click the [Shapes] tab.

42
Editing Embroidery Designs

3 Click [Create Floral Pattern] in the [Edit]

2 Click the desired pattern, and then click [OK].

group.

■ Detailed mode

■ Basic mode

More detailed settings can be specified in Detail

mode.

Drag the [Density] slider to adjust the pattern.

1 Click [To detailed mode] in the [Floral

Pattern] dialog box.

2 Drag the [Density] slider and the [Pattern]

slider to adjust the pattern.

Density 3, Pattern 251

Density 10, Pattern 251

Density 6, Pattern 251

Density 6, Pattern 0

43
Editing Embroidery Designs

3 After the pattern has been adjusted as

3 Click [Create Offset Lines] in the [Edit]

desired, click [OK].

group.

4 Specify the desired settings for the offset line

pattern, and then click [OK].

The running stitch is specified for the floral line

asic

pattern.

Layo

Creating an offset line

ut & E

pattern

dit

Line stitching in a concentric pattern can be created

in

based on the selected shape.

g Op
erations

1 Draw a shape, and then select it.

Be sure to select one closed line.

cc

"Changing the attributes of line ends" on

page 64

2 Click the [Shapes] tab.

44
Editing Embroidery Designs

Offset Direction

Outward

Inward

Spacing

1 mm

5 mm

Offset Line Count

1 line

5 lines

Rounded Corners

Check box selected.

Check box cleared.

45
Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types for Lines and Regions

Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types

for Lines and Regions

■ Color pane

Setting the thread color

Palette mode

The [Sew] group in the [Shapes] tab allows you to

set the thread color of shapes.

a
1

1 Line color

2 Region color

Basic

■ Color

ayo

Click the [Color] button, and then select the desired

color from the list of thread colors.

ut & E

iting Op

List mode

eratio

a
a

a Thread brand name or name of user

thread chart and its thread color list:

Displays the brand name and its thread

color chart for the currently selected

pattern.

b Colors Used

Displays all thread colors being used in

the embroidery design.

c Show Color Palette

Click to display the [Color] pane.

46
Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types for Lines and Regions

a Select the type of stitching ([Line] or

2 Click the [Color] tab, select the [Gradation]

[Region]) to display the corresponding

check box, and then click [Pattern].

colors being used.

Line

Line color

Region

Region color

b Select the check box to apply gradation/

blending. Click the [Pattern] button to

specify a gradation/blending pattern.

(Only available when a shape pattern is

selected)

cc

"Creating a gradation/blending" on

page 47

c From the [Thread Chart] selector, select

3 Specify the desired settings in the [Gradation

a thread brand or your user thread chart.

Pattern Setting] dialog box, and then click

d From the list of thread colors, select the

[OK].

desired color.

df

e Click to switch the mode.

f Displays all thread colors being used in

the embroidery design. When an

embroidery pattern is selected, a frame

appears around the colors used in that

pattern. The same thread colors can be

specified by selecting them here.

■ Creating a gradation/blending

The density of one or two colors can be adjusted at

a To change the thread color, click

various locations to create a custom gradation

Select a color in the [Thread Color]

pattern.

dialog box that appeared, and then click

[OK].

b To select a preset gradation pattern, click

the desired pattern under [Select

pattern].

c Move the sliders to adjust the density of

the gradation pattern.

The overall density of the gradation can

be adjusted with the [Max] and [Min]

Select an embroidery pattern with region

sliders.

sewing specified.

Drag the [Max] slider to adjust the

maximum value and the [Min] slider for

the minimum value. The values between

the maximum and minimum are

automatically adjusted.

d To blend two colors, select the [Blend]

check box, and then click

. Select a

color in the [Thread Color] dialog box

that appeared, and then click [OK].

e The preview area shows the setting

changes that you make.

f Specify the density.

47
Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types for Lines and Regions

g Specify a direction, or drag the red arrow

■ Special colors

to adjust it.

• Gradation/blending can be specified if satin

c
stitches, fill stitches or programmable fill stitches

have been selected for the region sewing and

[Manual] has been selected as the sewing

direction.

• If the [Blend] check box is cleared, the

gradation settings are applied to the remaining

a NOT DEFINED

color.

If you want to be able to manually select

• Gradation/blending can also be specified under

the color for a monochrome pattern, you

[Density] when the [Sewing Attributes] pane

can select [NOT DEFINED].

is displayed in Expert mode.

Colors for creating appliqués:

You can create appliqués using the

following three special colors.

b APPLIQUE MATERIAL

marks the outline of the region to cut from

asic

the appliqué material.

c APPLIQUE POSITION

ayo

marks the position on the backing

material where the appliqué must be

ut

sewn.

&E

d APPLIQUE

sews the appliqué on the backing

itin

material.

g Op

erat

By using the Applique Wizard, appliqués can

io

easily be created.
ns

cc

"Tutorial 8-1: Creating Appliqués" on

page 161

48
Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types for Lines and Regions

■ Region sew types

Setting the sew type

The [Sew] group in the [Shapes] tab allows you to

Page

set the sew type.

cc

331

cc

333

cc
333

cc

336

cc

337

cc

338

cc

338

cc

338

cc

338

1 Line sew type selector

2 Region sew type selector

cc

338

cc

339

cc
339

■ Line sew types

The sew type for regions in shapes, and text can be

Page

selected in the [Region sew type] selector.

cc

325

Click the [Region sew type] selector, and then

cc

select the desired sew type.

325

cc

325

 The available region sew types differ

cc

depending on whether a shape pattern or

326

text pattern is selected.

cc

327
cc

a Not Sewn (Region)

327

Select this setting to turn off region

cc

328

sewing (region will not be sewn).

cc

329

cc

"Specifying sewing attributes" on

cc

329

page 54 and "Region sewing attributes"

on page 331

The sew type for lines in shapes and text can be

selected in the [Line sew type] selector.

Click the [Line sew type] selector, and then select

the desired sew type.

a Not Sewn (Line)

Select this setting to turn off line sewing

(line will not be sewn).

b Cutting

Select this setting to specify the line as a

cutting line in a cutwork pattern.

cc

"Specifying sewing attributes" on

page 54, "Practical use of Satin Stitch

and Cutting Line" on page 168 and "Line

sewing attributes" on page 325

49
Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types for Lines and Regions

The codes that appear indicate the following.

Moving entry/exit points,

L: Line sewing

R: Region sewing

1: Entry point

2: Exit point

the center point and stitch

This is the entry (or exit) point for the

pattern reference point

next (or previous) pattern that is

connected to the exit (or entry) point of

■ Moving the entry/exit points

the currently selected pattern.

This point is connected to the entry/exit

Click the [Home] tab.

point with the same code in the

currently selected pattern. In this

Click [Select] in the [Select] group, and then

example, R1 in the currently selected

click

to select the Select Entry/Exit Point

pattern and R1 in the previous pattern

tool.

are connected.

4 Drag the arrow for the point to the desired

location on the outline.

Basic

Layo

3 Click the object.

ut & E
A dotted line appears between the entry (or

exit) point being moved and the cross

dit

indicating the exit (or entry) point of the

ing

previous (or next) pattern.

Op

rat

• If the outline or the inside region are set to not be

io

This is the entry point for the outline

sewn, the corresponding point does not appear.

ns

stitching. The previous pattern is

• The entry and exit points can be checked in the

connected to this point.

[Sewing Order] pane. Select the Select Entry/

This is the exit point for the outline

Exit Point tool, and then click a frame in the

stitching. Stitching continues from this

[Sewing Order] pane. The entry and exit points

point to the next pattern.

of the selected pattern appear.

This is the entry point for the inside

region stitching. The previous pattern

is connected to this point.

This is the exit point for the inside

region stitching. Stitching continues

from this point to the next pattern.

In this case, finish the operation by clicking a

blank area in the [Sewing Order] pane.

50
Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types for Lines and Regions

4 Drag the handle to the desired location.

Only entry and exit points for patterns created with

Center Point (Radial

Stitch pattern reference

the Shapes tool can be edited. Stitch patterns or

Stitch)
point (Motif Fill Stitch)

patterns created with the Text tools cannot be

edited.

■ Moving the center point and stitch

pattern reference point

1 Handle

The center point and reference point for arranging

the stitch pattern can be repositioned for a more

decorative effect.

Specifying the sewing

direction

When the Outline tools, Rectangle/Circle/Arc tools

• Regions with the concentric circle stitch or radial

or Shapes tools are used, shapes with a single

stitch specified have a center point.

sewing direction will be created. When the Manual

• Regions with the prog. fill stitch, motif stitch,

Punch tools are used, shapes with multiple sewing

cross stitch, net fill stitch or zigzag net fill stitch

directions are created.

specified have a stitch pattern reference point.

The sewing direction is indicated by a sewing

direction line (red arrow). These lines can be edited

Click the [Home] tab.

by moving the end points, or new sewing direction

lines can be added.

Click [Select] in the [Select] group, and then

click .

These settings can be adjusted for regions with the

satin stitch, fill stitch, prog. fill stitch, piping stitch or

motif stitch specified.

3 Click a region with the concentric circle stitch,

radial stitch, prog. fill stitch, motif stitch, cross

stitch, net fill stitch or zigzag net fill stitch

This feature can be used when [Direction] in the

specified.

[Sewing Attributes] pane is set to [Manual]

(default setting).

Center Point (Radial

Stitch pattern reference

Stitch)

point (Motif Fill Stitch)

1
1 Handle

51
Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types for Lines and Regions

■ Specifying multiple sewing

directions

b
1 Click the [Home] tab.

• Specify the sewing direction lines as described

below.

2 Click [Select] in the [Select] group, and then

 Position both end points outside of the pattern.

 Only the lines can be positioned over the

click

to select the Select Point tool.

pattern.

 When specifying multiple sewing direction

lines, they must not intersect within the

pattern.

Sewing direction lines specified in any way other

than described above wil not be added.

3 Click a shape pattern.

If hole sewing has been applied, sewing direction

lines cannot be added.

 The sewing direction lines appear.

Basic

4 Click the [Shapes] tab.

L

5 Click [Add Direction Line] in the [Sewing

■ Changing the sewing angle

ayo

Direction Line] group.

1 Select the Select Point tool.

ut & E

2 Click a shape pattern, and then click an empty

square or empty triangle on the sewing

direction line to select the point.

iting

3 Drag the point to the new location.

Op

6 Click the point for one end of the sewing

rat

direction line being added, and then click the

io

point for the other end.

ns
2

Selected point

52
Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types for Lines and Regions

■ Deleting sewing direction lines

1 Select the Select Point tool.

The sewing angle can also be set to a specific

direction (one sewing direction line) with the

2 Click a shape pattern, and then click an empty

settings under [Direction] in the [Sewing

square or empty triangle on the sewing

Attributes] pane.

direction line to select the point.

cc

"Specifying sewing attributes" on page 54

3 Click the [Shapes] tab.

4 Click [Delete Direction Line] in the [Sewing

■ Reversing the sewing direction

Direction Line] group, and then click [Delete

Selected Line] or [Delete Lines Not

1 Select the Select Point tool.

Selected].

2 Click a shape pattern.

3 Click the [Shapes] tab.

4 Click [Reverse Direction Line] in the

[Sewing Direction Line] group.

Delete Selected Line

Click this command to delete the selected

sewing direction line. Otherwise, press the

<Delete> key to delete the sewing direction.

Delete Lines Not Selected

Click this command to delete all sewing

direction lines except the currently selected

one. The sewing direction will become

uniform.

If there are multiple sewing direction lines, all

lines will be reversed.

53
Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types for Lines and Regions

Sample patterns with sewing directions

changed

Specifying sewing

When the sewing direction is changed, the pattern

attributes
stitching changes as shown below.

1 Select an embroidery pattern, a Shapes tool

Sewing direction

Satin Stitch

or a Text tool.

2 Click the [Sewing Attributes] tab.

(default)

Beginner mode

Expert mode

Fill Stitch

Programmable Fil Stitch

(Prog. Fill Stitch)

Basic

Layo

ut & E

ditin

d
c

g Op

a Click to return to the default setting.

erat

Piping Stitch

Motif Stitch

b Click to switch the attributes between

io

those for Beginner mode and those for

ns

Expert mode.

c Click to load/save the sewing settings.

d Click to switch between displaying and

hiding the hint view.

e Hint view

With each change in the settings, a

preview of the stitching can be checked

here. By moving the pointer over each

setting, a preview of the setting can be

displayed.

The sewing direction is also changed when the

pattern size and shape are changed.

The sewing attributes displayed in the dialog box

depend on the selected sew type.

54
Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types for Lines and Regions

3 Change the sewing attributes displayed under

[Line sew] or [Region sew].

 The settings are applied to the embroidery

pattern each time the settings are changed.

cc

For details on the different sewing

attributes and settings, refer to "Line

sewing attributes" on page 325 and

"Region sewing attributes" on page 331.

Frequently used sewing attributes can be saved.

cc

For details, refer to "Saving the settings in a

list" on page 192

Copying sewing attributes

The thread colors, sew types and sewing attributes

can be copied from one pattern and pasted onto

another to apply the same settings to the pattern.

• When copying attributes from a shape, text,

monogram or small text pattern and pasting

them to a pattern of a different type, only the

colors wil be pasted. The sew types and sewing

1
attributes cannot be pasted.

Original

Target

1 Original

1 Select the shape pattern or text pattern whose

settings are to be copied, and then press the

shortcut keys <Ctrl> + <C> to copy.

2 Select the shape pattern or text pattern where

the settings are to be pasted, and then click

Original

Target

the [Home] tab.

cc

For details on the shape pattern and text

pattern, refer to page 8.

3 Click [Paste] in the [Clipboard] group, and

then click [Paste Attributes].

• When copying a text pattern with different

sewing attributes applied to each character, the

sewing attributes of the first character wil be

copied.
a

This function cannot be used with stitch patterns.

55
Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types for Lines and Regions

■ Copying only specific attributes

4 Select the check boxes of the attributes to be

Specific attributes, such as the line thread color, can

pasted, and then click [Paste].

be copied and pasted onto another pattern.

1 Select the shape pattern or text pattern whose

settings are to be copied, and then press the

shortcut keys <Ctrl> + <C> to copy.

2 Select the shape pattern or text pattern where

the settings are to be pasted, and then click

the [Home] tab.

3 Click [Paste] in the [Clipboard] group, and

then click [Paste Selected Attributes].

Basic

Layo

ut & E
diting Op

erations

56
Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types for Lines and Regions

4 Click [Emboss/Engrave] in the [Edit] group,

Embossing/Engraving

and then click the desired command under

Multiple shape patterns can be selected to create an

[Convert from Outline].

engraved/embossed effect.

1 Top

2 Bottom

1 Draw a shape.

Example: When the [Engraved Line] command

is selected

Engraved Line

The bottom shape is

engraved with the outline

of the shape on top.

In this example, the fill stitch is selected for

region sewing.
Engraved Region

An engraving is made in

Draw a shape overlapping the shape drawn in

the bottom shape from the

step 1.

shape on top.

For best result, select

[Satin Stitch] for region

sewing of the bottom

shape.

Embossed Region

An embossing is made in

the bottom shape from the

shape on top.

For best result, select [Fill

Stitch] for region sewing

of the bottom shape.

3 Select the two shapes, and then click the

[Home] tab.
This effect can be edited with the Edit Stamp tool.

57
Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types for Lines and Regions

3 Click [Emboss/Engrave] in the [Edit] group,

and then click [Input Stamp Tool].

• These commands can only be used with shape

pattern.

• The bottom shape pattern must have one of the

following sew types specified for region sewing.

 Satin stitch

 Fill stitch

 Programmable fill stitch

• In order to use the [Engraved Line] command,

[Line sew type] for the shape pattern must be

set to any setting other than [Not Sewn (Line)].

In order to use the [Engraved Region] or

4 Select a stamp pattern (.pas file with stamp

[Embossed Region] commands, [Region sew

settings applied).

type] for the shape pattern must be set to any

setting other than [Not Sewn (Region)].

Applying and editing

Basic
stamps

You can create engraved/embossed effects by

ayo

stamping stamp patterns into a shape. This appears

as stitching sewn in different directions.

ut & E

a Select a stamp pattern.

dit

b Specify the size of the stamp pattern.

ing

c Specify the direction of the stamp pattern.

Op

■ Applying a stamp

d To select a different folder, click

erat

1 Draw a shape.

ion

Engraving and embossing stamp settings appear

s

as red- and blue-filled areas.

5 Click the shape pattern drawn in step 1 to

select it.

 "Marching lines" appear around the

selected shape pattern.

6 Click the desired locations within the shape

pattern.

2 Click the [Home] tab.

You can preview the effect of the created

stamp in Realistic View.

58
Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types for Lines and Regions

5 Edit the stamp.

• Stamps can be applied to regions of shape

pattern that have the satin stitch, fill stitch and

programmable fill stitch specified.

• Using Programmable Stitch Creator, you can

edit stamp pattern that have been provided or

you can create your own.

cc

"Programmable Stitch Creator" on page 258

■ Editing a stamp

• To change the stamp pattern, select a

different pattern, and then click [Apply].

1 Click the [Home] tab.

2 Click [Emboss/Engrave] in the [Edit] group,

and then click [Edit Stamp Tool].

• If the size of a shape pattern is changed, the size

of the stamp does not change. Be sure to check

the stamp after editing a shape pattern.

• If a shape pattern containing a stamp is edited,

3 Click the shape pattern with the stamp.

be sure to check the stamp after editing is

finished.

 "Marching lines" appear around the

selected shape pattern.

4 Click the stamp.

1

1 Rotation handle

2 Scale handles

• Only one stamp can be selected at a time.

• To enlarge the stamp, drag a scale handle.

• To rotate the stamp, drag the rotation handle.

• To delete the stamp, press the <Delete> key.

59
Drawing Shapes

Drawing Shapes

■
/

Drawing rectangle, circle

Drag the pointer in the Design Page.

or arc shape

Rectangle

Circle

Oval

Arc

asic

Layo

ut & E

Fan shape

Arc & string

diting

1 Click the [Home] tab.

Op

2 Click [Shapes] in the [Tools] group, and then

rat
click a tool icon under [Rectangle]/[Circle]/

io

[Arc] to select the desired [Rectangle]/

ns

[Circle]/[Arc] tool.

To draw a circle or square, hold down the <Shift>

key while dragging the pointer.

: Rectangle

: Circle or Oval

: Rectangle with rounded corners

60
Drawing Shapes

2 Move the pointer to the start point of the arc,

and then click.

Rectangles with rounded corners

 The radial line disappears.

To change the radius of the corners, click the

[Edge radius] selector in the [Outline] tab. Then,

3 Move the pointer until the arc/arc & string/fan

type the desired radius, or select the desired

has the desired shape, and then click.

value.

Specify the radius of the corners before drawing

the rectangle. The setting cannot be changed after

the rectangle has been drawn.

Dragging the pointer while holding down the

<Shift> key moves it in 15° increments. The

current angle is shown in the status bar.

Arc

Click at start point.

Example 1

Example 2

Edge radius: 0.0 mm

Edge radius: 20.0 mm

Move to end point.

Click at end point.

: Arc & String

: Arc
: Fan

Arc & String

1 Proceed as you would to draw a circle or an

oval.

Click at start point.

Move to end point.

Click at end point.

 A radial line appears on the oval when the

mouse button is released.

61
Drawing Shapes

Fan

Drawing various shape

1 Click the [Home] tab.

Click at start point.

2 Click [Shapes] in the [Tools] group, and then

click a tool icon under [Shapes] to select the

desired Shapes tool.

Move to end point.

Click at end point.

Basic

ayo

• You can change the color and sew type either

before or after drawing the shape.

ut & E

cc

"Setting the sew type" on page 49

3 Drag the pointer in the Design Page.

• You can also use the settings in the [Sewing

it

Attributes] pane to define other attributes of the

ing

shape before or after drawing the shape.

Op

cc

"Specifying sewing attributes" on page 54

• To draw the shape while maintaining the original

height-to-width proportion, hold down the

rat

<Shift> key while dragging the pointer.

io

• Various sample shape patterns are available in

ns

the [Import] pane when [Outline Shapes] is

selected in the [From] selector and [Basic

Shapes] is selected in the [Category] selector.

cc

"Using the Import pane" on page 13

62
Drawing Shapes

3 Click in the Design Page or drag the pointer to

Drawing outlines (straight

draw the line.

lines and curves)

The shortcut keys are available only after an

End point

Outline tool has been selected.

Start point

Open line

Closed line

■ Straight lines/curves

1 Click in the Design Page to specify the start

End point

point.

Start point

Open curve

Closed curve

Click the [Home] tab.

Click in the Design Page to specify the next

point.

2 Click [Shapes] in the [Tools] group, and then

click a tool icon under [Outline] to select the

desired Outline tool.

 The dotted lines change to solid lines.

b

• To remove the last point that was entered, right-

click the mouse button, or press the

: Click points to draw a closed line

<BackSpace> key.

constructed of straight lines.

• The Curve tool is used in the same way.

(Shortcut key: <Z> )

3 Continue clicking to specify every point, and

: Click points to draw a closed curve.

then double-click the last point, or press the

(Shortcut key: <X> )

<Enter> key.

: Drag the pointer to draw a closed

freehand curve.

: Click points to draw an open line

constructed of straight lines.

(Shortcut key: <Z> )

: Click points to draw an open curve.

(Shortcut key: <X> )

: Drag the pointer to draw an open

freehand curve.

63
Drawing Shapes

Changing the attributes of

• You can freely switch between the different line

line ends

types either by clicking a different button or by

pressing the shortcut key.

• When drawing a straight line, hold down the

<Shift> key while moving the pointer to draw

vertically or horizontally.
• Even after the pattern is drawn, you can change

the attributes of line ends.

After selecting a shape pattern, right-click it, and

cc

"Changing the attributes of line ends" on

then click [Open] or [Close] to change the line

page 64.

ending.

• Even after the pattern is drawn, you can

transform straight lines into curves and vice

versa.

cc

"Transforming straight lines into curves or

curves into straight lines" on page 70.

Basic

■ Freehand lines

Layo

1 Drag the pointer to draw the line.

ut & E

2 Release the mouse button to finish drawing.

ditin
b

In addition, closed shape patterns can be split at

Op

points to create open lines, or the end points of

open shape patterns can be connected to create

rat

closed lines.

io

cc

"Connecting points/splitting outlines (shape

patterns)" on page 67

64

Drawing Shapes
Embroidery attributes of

shapes

The [Shapes] tab allows you to set the embroidery

attributes (thread color and sew type).

Example: When a rectangle is selected.

a Line color/Region color

Click this button to set the thread color for

lines and regions.

For special colors:

cc

"Special colors" on page 48

b Line sew type selector

All lines in a shape can be set to the same

sew type.

Use these selectors to set the sew type for

lines.

cc

"Line sewing attributes" on page 325

c Region sew type selector

All regions in a shape can be set to the

same sew type.

Use these selectors to set the sew type for

regions.

cc

"Region sewing attributes" on page 331

cc

"Specifying Thread Colors and Sew

Types for Lines and Regions" on page 46

• To turn off line sewing, select [Not Sewn (Line)]

from the [Line sew type] selector.

• To turn off region sewing, select [Not Sewn

(Region)] from the [Region sew type] selector.

65
Reshaping Embroidery Patterns

Reshaping Embroidery Patterns

Patterns can be reshaped by moving, adding or deleting points. While creating

shape patterns, a clicked location becomes a point.

Selecting points

Moving points

1 Click the [Home] tab.

1 Select the point.

2 Click [Select] in the [Select] group, and then

2 Drag the point to the new location.

click

to select the [Select Point] tool.

Selected point

Basic

Drag

3 Click the pattern.

ayo

4 To select a single point, click an empty square.

ut & E

diting Op

eratio

ns

Multiple points can be selected in any of the

• To move the point of a broken line, a curve, or

following ways.

stitch data horizontally or vertically, hold down

• Drag the pointer.

the <Shift> key while dragging it.

 All points within the box are selected.

• A selected point can also be moved with the

• Hold down the <Ctrl> key while clicking the

arrow keys.

points.

• Points in patterns set for hole sewing can also

 To deselect a point, click the selected

be moved. However, the point cannot be moved

point.

to cross an outline. In order to move the point in

this way, cancel hole sewing first.

• Hold down the <Shift> key while pressing an

arrow key to select multiple points.

• If you start dragging by clicking elsewhere on the

outline of the pattern, a new point will be inserted

• Hold down the <Ctrl> key while pressing an

or the selected point(s) will be deselected.

arrow key to change the point that is selected.

66
Reshaping Embroidery Patterns

Inserting points

Connecting points/

splitting outlines (shape

Click the [Home] tab.

patterns)
Click [Select] in the [Select] group, and then

click

to select the Select Point tool.

■ Splitting outlines of open shape

patterns

The outline of an open shape pattern can be split at

a point.

1 Select a point in an open shape pattern.

2 Click the [Shapes] tab.

3 Click [Split at Point] in the [Edit Point] group

to split the line.

Click the pattern.

4 Click the outline to add a point.

Click

Deleting points

1 Select the point.

2 Click the [Shapes] tab.

3 Click [Delete Point] in the [Edit Point] group.

Otherwise, press the <Delete> key to remove

the point.
Delete

Selected point

67
Reshaping Embroidery Patterns

■ Splitting outlines of closed shape

patterns

The closed path of a shape pattern can be split. The

• When the outline of a closed shape pattern is

closed path consists of the points that are

split to create an open shape pattern, region

connected to create the shape pattern.

sewing attributes can no longer be specified.

1 Select a point in a closed shape pattern.

• The [Open] command is also available to

change a closed shape pattern to an open

Click the [Shapes] tab.

shape pattern.

Basic

3 Click [Split at Point] in the [Edit Point] group

cc

"Changing the attributes of line ends" on

to split the line.

page 64

Layo

ut & E

diting Op

eration

• If a shape pattern is split in a shape with hole

sewing applied, hole sewing will be canceled.

• If a shape pattern is split in a shape with fit text

to outline applied, fit text to outline will be

canceled.

68
Reshaping Embroidery Patterns

■ Connecting two open shape

■ Connecting the two end points of

patterns

a shape pattern

The end points of two shape patterns can be

The two end points of an open shape pattern can be

connected to create a single shape pattern.

connected to create a closed shape pattern.

1 Select an end point (entry point or exit point).

1 Select an end point (entry point or exit point).

2 Press the <Alt> key.

2 Press the <Alt> key.

 The points that can be connected appear

 The other end point appears as ×.

as ×.
3 While holding down the <Alt> key, drag the

selected point to the other end point.

The other end point of the shape pattern whose

point is selected as well as the end points (entry

points and exit points) of other shape patterns

appear as ×.

3 While holding down the <Alt> key, drag the

selected point to the other point that you want

to connect to it.

4 When the two points are overlapping and the

red square appears, release the mouse

 The shape of the pointer changes to

button.

and a red square appears when the two

points are overlapping.

When a shape pattern is closed, its region sewing

attributes may appear.

Release the mouse button to connect the two

points.

The [Close] command is also available to change

an open shape pattern to a closed shape pattern.

cc

"Changing the attributes of line ends" on

page 64

69
Reshaping Embroidery Patterns

Transforming straight

Changing the curve type

lines into curves or curves

1 Select a point on a curve.

into straight lines

2 Click the [Shapes] tab.

1 Select the point.

3 Click [Edit Point] in the [Edit Point] group,

2 Click the [Shapes] tab.

and then click [To Smooth], [To Symmetry]

or [To Cusp].

3 Click [Edit Point] in the [Edit Point] group,

and then click [To Straight] or [To Curve].

To Smooth

asic

To Curve

ayo

ut & E

dit

To Straight

in

To Symmetry

g Op

erations

To Cusp

4 Drag the solid black handle to adjust the

shape of the line.

The shape can be changed by dragging the solid

black handle on either side of the point.

70
Editing a Stitch Pattern

Editing a Stitch Pattern

Converting shape pattern

or text pattern to a stitch

• [Convert to Stitches] can also be used with text

pattern

pattern to convert it to stitch patterns.

• In stitch patterns, stitches appears as solid lines

Shape pattern or text pattern can be converted into

), and jump stitches appear as dotted

a stitch pattern, allowing you to make detailed

lines (
).

changes by modifying the position of individual

• If any part of grouped patterns, patterns set for

stitches.

hole sewing, and text arranged on shapes is

selected, all patterns in the entire group are

1 Select the shape pattern, and then click the

converted to stitch patterns.

[Shapes] tab.

• Patterns that do not have stitches are deleted

when the pattern is converted to a stitch pattern.

2 Click [Convert to Stitches] in the [Edit]

group.

Selecting stitch patterns

by thread color

Hold down the <Alt> key and click the thread color

for the stitch patterns that you wish to select.

• The thread color can be changed when patterns

are selected using this method.

cc
"Setting the thread color" on page 46

• If stitch patterns are grouped, patterns cannot be

selected by color using this method.

71

Editing a Stitch Pattern

Selecting stitch points of

stitch pattern

• When selecting stitch points, be sure to click the

stitch point (do not click a blank area of the

1 Click the [Home] tab.

Design Page), otherwise all of the selected

points will be deselected.

2 Click [Select] in the [Select] group, and then

• If you click on a jump stitch, the points at both

click

to select the Select Point tool.

ends are selected.

• Multiple stitch points can be selected in the

same way that embroidery pattern points are

selected.

cc

"Selecting points" on page 66

Stitch points cannot be edited if the pattern is not a

stitch pattern. The pattern can be viewed in Solid

Click the stitch pattern.

View.

Basic

4 To select a single stitch point, click an empty

square.

Layo
■ Moving stitch points

Drag the selected stitch points to the new location.

t&E

it

Stitch points are moved in the same way that

in

embroidery pattern points are moved.

1 Selected point

Op

cc

"Moving points" on page 66

2 Unselected point

eratio

n
• Press the <Tab> key.

■ Inserting stitch points

 All stitch points in the next color are

Click a line between two stitch points to add a new

selected.

point at that position.

• Press the <Shift> and <Tab> keys.

 All stitch points in the previous color are

■ Deleting stitch points

selected.

Press the <Delete> key to delete the selected stitch

• Press the <Ctrl> and <Home> keys.

point.

 The entry point of the first thread color is

selected.

• Press the <Ctrl> and <End> keys.

• If the end point of a jump stitch is deleted, that

 The exit point of the last thread color is

jump stitch segment is deleted and the stitches

selected.

before and after the jump stitch are connected.

• Select at least one point in a given color, and

• To insert a stitch point and change the previous

then press the <Home> key.

line into a jump stitch, hold down the <Ctrl> and

 The entry point of the color is selected.

<Shift> keys while clicking on the line.

• Select at least one point in a given color, and

then press the <End> key.

 The exit point of the color is selected.

72
Editing a Stitch Pattern

Connecting points/

splitting stitches (stitch

If an entry point or an exit point is selected, the

patterns)

[Split at Point] is not available.

A single color pattern can be divided into two by

splitting stitches at a point, and two color patterns

can be combined into one by connecting points. If a

■ Connecting two stitch patterns to

stitch pattern is divided into multiple parts, each part

create a single one

can be edited separately, such as changed to

1 Select an end point (entry point or exit point) of

different colors.

a stitch pattern.

■ Splitting one stitch pattern into

two at the selected point

Select a point in a stitch pattern.

Select the entry point of the stitch pattern by

2 Click the [Stitches] tab.

pressing keys <Ctrl> + <Home> . Select the exit

point by pressing keys <Ctrl> + <End> . For

3 Click [Split at Point] in the [Edit] group to split

details, refer to "Selecting stitch points of stitch

the stitch pattern.

pattern" on page 72.

2 Press the <Alt> key.

 The points that can be connected appear

as ×.

 The stitch pattern is split at the point.

If the entry point of a stitch pattern is selected, the

exit points of the other stitch patterns appear as ×.

If the exit point of a stitch pattern is selected, the

entry points of the other stitch patterns appear as

×.

73
Editing a Stitch Pattern
3 While holding down the <Alt> key, drag the

2 Click [Split Stitches] in the [Tools] group to

selected point to the other point that you want

select the [Split Stitches] tool.

to connect to it.

 The shape of the pointer changes to

and a red square appears when the two

points are overlapping.

 All other patterns will appear in gray.

Selected pattern will appear in front of other

patterns.

4 Release the mouse button to connect the two

points.

Basic

3 Click in the Design Page at the point where

you want to start drawing the enclosing lines.

ayo

4 Continue clicking in the Design Page to

t&E

specify each corner of the enclosure around

the area to be cut off.

diting Op

rat

After the points are connected, the pattern will

ion

have the thread color of the pattern that was first in

the sewing order before the points were

connected.

Splitting off parts of a

To remove the last point that was entered, right-

click the mouse button.

stitch pattern

5 Double-click in the Design Page to specify the

section to be split off.

b
The cutoff piece moves to the end of the sewing

order.

cc

"Checking and Editing the Sewing Order" on

Select a stitch pattern, and then click the

page 82

[Stitches] tab.

74
Editing a Stitch Pattern

Convert to Blocks

Dividing stitch pattern by

The pattern is converted while maintaining the

color

multiple sewing direction lines.

Use this when you want to enlarge or reduce an

Before dividing

embroidery pattern that uses satin or fill stitches.

Convert to Outline

The pattern is converted following the shape of the

outline.

After dividing

• After being converted, the outline patterns can

be edited.

cc

"Setting the sew type" on page 49

Select the stitch pattern(s), and then click the

"Specifying the sewing direction" on

[Stitches] tab.

page 51

"Specifying sewing attributes" on

Click [Divide by Color] in the [Edit] group.

page 54

"Reshaping Embroidery Patterns" on

page 66

• For details on the shape pattern and stitch

pattern refer to page 8.

■ Converting stitch pattern to

 Dotted lines appear around each part of the

blocks

stitch pattern.

Stitch patterns can be converted into blocks (group

of shape patterns with multiple sewing direction

Converting stitch patterns

lines). In blocks (shapes) pattern, the sew types and

Stitch patterns can be converted into two types of

sewing attributes can be changed, and the pattern

shape patterns.

can easily be edited.

Stitch

1 Select the stitch pattern(s), and then click the

[Stitches] tab.

2 Click [Convert to Blocks] in the [Edit] group.

Blocks

Shapes

*Blocks: A group of shape patterns with multiple

sewing direction lines

After being converted, various editing operations

can be performed.
75
Editing a Stitch Pattern

3 Move the slider to select the desired

1 Select the stitch pattern(s).

sensitivity. Click [OK].

2 Click the [Stitches] tab.

3 Click [Convert to Outline] in the [Edit] group,

and then click [Convert Whole to Outline] or

[Convert Parts to Outlines].

The [Normal] setting should provide satisfactory

results in most cases, but depending on the

complexity of the pattern, you may need to select

a setting more towards [Coarse] or [Fine].

 The outline patterns are created, and the

original stitch patterns are deleted.

 The stitch pattern is converted to grouped

shape patterns. Being converted to shape

patterns, the outlines of the stitch pattern

• Line sewing in the created outline patterns is set

can be edited.

to [Not Sewn (Line)], and region sewing is set

asic
to [Fill Stitch].

cc

For details see the following instructions;

"Setting the sew type" on page 49

• If the [Convert Whole to Outline] command is

ayo

"Specifying sewing attributes" on

selected, the thread color will be set to the first

page 54

thread color in the sewing order for the original

ut

"Reshaping Embroidery Patterns" on

stitch pattern.

&E

page 66

• If multiple outline patterns are created from a

"Specifying the sewing direction" on

single stitch pattern, the outline patterns are

it
page 51

grouped.

ing

• If there is an opening (area with no stitching, but

Op

surrounded by stitching) in the original stitch

pattern, hole sewing may be applied.

The [Convert to Blocks] command cannot be

at

used with some stitch pattern imported from

io

original cards.

ns

■ Converting stitch pattern to

outline pattern

Outline patterns can be created from each color in a

stitch pattern or from an outline around the entire

pattern.
1

1 Convert Whole to Outline

2 Convert Parts to Outlines

76
Checking Embroidery Patterns

Checking Embroidery Patterns

Zooming

Using the Pan tool

1 Click the [Home] tab.

The part of the work area that is displayed can easily

be changed by using the Pan tool.

2 Click

or

in the [Tools] group.

1 Click the [Home] tab.

2 Click

in the [Tools] group.

: Click the Design Page to zoom in.

(Right-click the Design Page to zoom

out.)
3 Drag the work area to view the desired part.

: Click the Design Page to zoom out.

(Right-click the Design Page to zoom

• You can also pan the work area when any other

in.)

tool is selected by holding down the <Space>

key while dragging the pointer.

Otherwise, click beside

, and then

• To scroll horizontally, hold down the <Alt> key

click [Zoom all], [Selected object zoom] or

while rotating the mouse wheel.

[Actual size zoom].

Zoom all

The entire Design Page is displayed to fit

within the window. The same operation can be

performed by clicking

in the [Tools]

group.

Selected object zoom

The Design Page is zoomed to display only

the selected objects.

Actual size zoom

The Design Page is displayed at its actual

size.

• Zooming is also possible by dragging the

[Zoom] slider in the status bar or clicking the

Zoom ratio.

• You can also zoom in or out when any other tool

is selected by holding down the <Ctrl> key while

rotating the mouse wheel.

cc

"Layout & Editing Window" on page 11

77
Checking Embroidery Patterns

Using the Measure tool

Changing the display of

the embroidery design

Click the [Home] tab.

1 Click the [View] tab.

Click

in the [Tools] group.

2 Click [Solid], [Stitch] or [Realistic] in the

[View Mode] group.

3 Click the two points, one on each end of the

distance that you want to measure.

 The length appears in the status bar.

■ Solid View

asic
Layo

ut & E

diting Op

■ Stitch View

1 Length

rat

2 Width

io

3 Height

ns

4 Angle

When the rulers are displayed, click

to

switch the measurement units between mil imeters

and inches.

You can display a stitch view of it in order to see how

the stitching is connected.

78
Checking Embroidery Patterns

■ Realistic View

If

is selected under [Machine Type] in the

[Design Settings] dialog box, click the [View] tab,

and then select the [View Thread Trimming]

check box to view the thread trimming locations in

the Design Page.

You can display a realistic view of it in order to see

how the design will appear once it is sewn.

OFF

ON

Changing realistic view settings

1. Click the [View] tab.

2. Click [Realistic View Settings] in the [View

Mode] group.

3. If necessary, specify settings for [Thread

Width], [Contrast] and [Brightness], and

then click [Apply] ([OK]).

79
Checking Embroidery Patterns

Checking the stitching with the Stitch Simulator

1 Click the buttons to view a simulation of the stitching.

a Starts the stitching simulation. During

i Shows the currently displayed pattern

stitching simulation, this button changes

section/total number of hoop sections in

to

, which can be clicked to

the pattern.
(Appears only for split embroidery

temporarily stop the simulation.

patterns.)

b Stops the simulation and returns to the

: Returns to the beginning of

previous display.

stitching in the current or previous hoop

c The slider shows the current location in

asic

section.

the simulation. In addition, the slider can

: Advances to the beginning of the

be moved to change the position in the

ayo

simulation.

design in the next hoop section.

ut

: Returns to the beginning of stitching

&E
a

and stops the simulation.

If the Stitch Simulator is not displayed at the

bottom of the window, click [Stitch Simulator] on

it

: Advances to the end of stitching and

in

the [View] tab.

stops the simulation.

Op

d Drag the slider to adjust the simulation

er

stitching speed.

at

io

e Select this check box to automatically

• The zoom tools and pan tool can be used while

n
scroll the simulation of the pattern when it

a simulation is being viewed. If any other

is too large to be fully displayed.

command is selected, the simulation stops.

f Click to hide the bottom section of the

• If a value is entered at g, h or i, the

Stitch Simulator. Click

to display it

simulation is reversed/advanced to the indicated

location.

again.

g Shows the number of the current stitch/

total number of stitches.

: Reverses the

• If a pattern was selected when the stitching

simulation by the indicated number of

simulation was started, only the selected pattern

stitches.

is drawn in the simulation.

: Advances the

• The [Auto Scroll] check box is not available in

simulation by the indicated number of

Realistic View.

stitches.

h Shows the number of the color being

drawn/total number of colors used.

: Returns to the beginning of

stitching for the current or previous thread

color.

: Advances to the beginning of

stitching for the next color.

80
Checking Embroidery Patterns

■ Zooming

Viewing design in the

The Reference Window can be switched to display

Reference Window

either the entire Design Page or only the embroidery

pattern.

1 Click the [View] tab.

2 Select the [Reference Window] check box in

the [Show/Hide] group.

ON

The display are a frame (red rectangle) indicates the

part of the pattern displayed in the Design Page.

OFF

81
Checking Embroidery Patterns

■ Moving/Resizing/Redrawing the

display area frame

Checking and Editing the

The part of the design displayed in the Design Page

Sewing Order

can be selected from the Reference Window.

c
d

a Select how patterns are displayed in the

[Sewing Order] pane.

b Select the desired command to change

the sewing order.

c Optimize Sewing Order

Click to rearrange the sewing order so

that the parts of the entered objects with

asic

the same thread color will be sewn

together.

Layo

d Thread Color

Set the color of the selected object.

ut & E

e Show/hides in the work area the stitched

objects.

ditin

f Lock

Click to lock the selected object so it

Op

cannot be edited.

g Jump Stitch Trimming

rat

The Jump Stitch Trimming function can

io

be turned on or off.

ns

h Select Patterns

Instead of moving the display area frame, the frame

Selects the patterns in the Design Page.

can be redrawn to display the desired part of the

pattern in the Design Page.

1 Click the [View] tab.

2 Click [Sewing Order] in the [Show/Hide]

group.

Clicking the button switches between

displaying and hiding the Sewing Order.

With the frame, you can select the area in the

Reference Window to be displayed enlarged.

82
Checking Embroidery Patterns
3 Click in the [Sewing Order] pane, and

■ Sewing order optimization

then click [Zoom] and [Show by color order].

The sewing order and entry and exit points can be

automatically adjusted to reduce the number of

thread color changes and jump stitches.

Click

to optimize the

sewing order.

For the pattern at the right

(the numbers indicate the

Zoom

sewing order), the sewing

Click to enlarge each pattern to fill its

order will be adjusted as

frame.

shown below.

3
Show by color order

Click to display in one frame all

patterns of the same color that will be

sewn together.

OFF

ON

The sewing order is adjusted so that patterns of the

same color are grouped in the most optimized

sequence.

In addition, patterns of the same color are optimized

so that the exit point of the previous pattern and the

entry point of the next pattern are the closest points.

When multiple same color

patterns are combined into

one frame,

appears to the

However, overlapping

left of that frame.

patterns will be arranged in

the most appropriate

Click

to display the

sewing order.

combined same color patterns

in separate frames.

appears under the first

frame, and each frame is

displayed with a subnumber

following the first, to indicate

its sewing order within the

patterns of the same color.

Click

to recombine all of

the same color patterns back

into one frame.

83
Checking Embroidery Patterns

■ Selecting a pattern

1 Click a frame containing the pattern in the

• The patterns in locked frames and hidden

[Sewing Order] pane.

frames will also be optimized.

• The sewing order of multi-position patterns will

not be optimized.
cc

"Optimizing the sewing order" on page 38

■ Editing the sewing order

The sewing order can be

changed by selecting the frame

containing the pattern, then

dragging the frame to the new

location. A red line appears,

indicating the position where the

frame is being moved.

1 Blue line

2 Marching line

The frame can also be moved by

asic

clicking

in

the

[Sewing
b

Order] pane, then clicking the

ayo

To select multiple patterns, hold down the <Shift>

desired command in the menu

or <Ctrl> key while clicking the frames for the

that appeared.

desired patterns. In addition, multiple frames can

&E

be selected by dragging the pointer over them.

diting

2 Click in the [Sewing Order] pane to

Op

select the pattern in the Design Page

corresponding to the frame selected in the

rat

[Sewing Order] pane. The pattern can also

io

be selected by double-clicking its frame in the

ns

Sew First

[Sewing Order] pane.

Click to move the selected pattern to the beginning

of the sewing order.

Sew Previous

Click to move the selected pattern ahead one

position in the sewing order.

Sew Next

Click to move the selected pattern back one position

in the sewing order.

Sew Last

Click to move the selected pattern to the end of the

sewing order.

Check the stitching after changing the sewing

order to be sure that overlapping patterns wil not

be sewn in the wrong order.

84
Checking Embroidery Patterns

■ Changing colors

■ Displaying/hiding frames not

sewn

Select one or more frames in the [Sewing

Frames containing patterns that will not be sewn

Order] pane, and then click

at the top of

can be displayed or hidden.

the [Sewing Order] pane.

Click ,

then

[Hide Objects Not Stitched].

 The Color pane appears in front of the other

panes.

2 Click the desired color in the [Color] pane.

OFF

ON

cc

"Color pane" on page 46

As a default, frames containing patterns that will not

■ Changing sewing attributes

be sewn will be hidden.

When frames containing patterns that will not be

In the [Sewing Order] pane, select one or

sewn are displayed, that frame can be selected and

more frames containing a pattern other than a

its pattern can be edited.

stitch pattern.

 The sew type selector for the selected

frame appears.

2 Click the [Sewing Attributes] tab.

If the [Sewing Attributes] pane is not

displayed, click the [View] tab, then

[Attributes], and then click [Sewing

Attributes].

3 Change the sewing attributes and sew type.

cc

"Line sew types" , "Region sew types" on

page 49 and "Specifying sewing

attributes" on page 54

85
Checking Embroidery Patterns

■ Displaying embroidery patterns

■ Locking embroidery patterns

Each embroidery patterns can be displayed or

Embroidery patterns can be locked to prevent them

hidden in the Design Page. Overlapping embroidery

from being moved or deleted. Locked embroidery

patterns can easily be edited if the pattern not being

patterns cannot be selected or edited in the Design

edited is hidden.

Page.

Select a frame, and then click

Select a frame, and then click

• Frames with

contain multiple patterns of the

same color. If these frames are selected to be

ON

OFF

locked, all patterns in the frame are locked.

appears if the lock setting is not the same for

all patterns in a frame with

beside it.

• Locking either the line or region of an

embroidery pattern made up of an outline and

inside region locks the entire embroidery

pattern.

• Locking any part of a combined pattern, such as

asic

grouped patterns, text arranged on a curve or

patterns with hole sewing specified, locks the

Layo

entire embroidery pattern.

ut & E

• Frames with

contain multiple patterns of the

dit

same color. If these frames are selected to be

in

displayed, all patterns in the frame are

displayed.

Op
e

appears if the display setting is not the

rat

same for all patterns in a frame with

beside

ion

it.

• Displaying either the line or region of an

embroidery pattern made up of an outline and

inside region displays the entire embroidery

pattern.

86
Checking Embroidery Patterns

Jump Stitch Trimming

b

The Jump Stitch Trimming function can be turned on

appears if the thread trimming setting is not

or off.

the same for all patterns in a frame with

beside it.

• The thread is cut before the thread color is

These settings are applied only when

changed, even if [Jump Stitch Trimming] has

embroidering with our multi-needle embroidery

been turned off for the frame.

machines. Before these settings can be specified,

• Click the [View] tab, and then select the [View

select

under

[Machine Type] in the

Thread Trimming] check box in the [View

Mode] group. To view the thread trimming

[Design Settings] dialog box.

locations in the Design Page.

cc

"Specifying the Design Page Settings" on

page 14

The Jump Stitch Trimming button (

) is available

in the [Sewing Order] pane.

Select a frame, and then click

ON

OFF

About Minimum jump stitch length for thread

trimming

• The jump stitch length can be specified on the

[Output] tab into the [Design Settings] dialog

box. (To displayed it, click

, then [Design

Settings]).

• If the jump stitch length is less than the length

specified for [Minimum jump stitch length for

thread trimming], the thread will not be cut,

even if [Jump Stitch Trimming] has been set.

• Whether or not [Minimum jump stitch length

for thread trimming] is available differs

depending on the selected machine model. For

details, refer to the Operation Manual for the

machine.

87
Checking Embroidery Patterns
b

The default setting can be specified for whether or

not thread trimming is applied to objects that are

created.

Click [Option] above the Ribbon, and then click

[Options] to display the [Options] dialog box.

Next, click [Jump Stitch Trimming], and then

select or clear the [Add jump stitch trimming to

the entered patterns.] check box.

You can enter comments and information about the

pattern to a saved .pes file.

cc

"Adding jump stitch trimming to new patterns"

The information shown in the color list can be

on page 302

switched.

asic

• Color Changes

L
The thread color information for each color

cc

"Jump Stitch Trimming" on page 16,

ayo

change is displayed. This allows you to check

"Machine thread trimming according to

the total number of thread color changes.

settings specified in Layout & Editing" on

ut

page 297 and "Adding jump stitch

&E

trimming to new patterns" on page 302

ditin

Checking embroidery

g Op

design information

• Total Colors

rat

Click ,

then
[Design Property].

The thread color information for the necessary

io

threads is displayed. This allows you to check

the total number of thread colors.

88
Checking Embroidery Patterns

• You can select and check the properties of

individual patterns within the embroidery design

by selecting the pattern before opening this

dialog box. In this case, clearing the [Show

about selected Object(s)] check box switches

the dialog box to display properties for all

patterns in the Design Page.

• If the Design Page was set to [Custom Size] or

[Hoop Size] was set to a multi-position hoop

(100 × 172 mm or 130 × 300 mm) or the jumbo

frame (360 × 360 mm), a [Design Property]

dialog box appears with the sewing information

for each hoop of the pattern in the Design Page.

• Files can be searched for in Design Database

according to the entered information.

89
Opening/Importing Embroidery Designs

Opening/Importing Embroidery Designs

Creating a new embroidery

design

• To view the data in the selected folder as

thumbnails in the [Browse] dialog box, click

Click ,

then

[New].

[Browse].

Basic

The size of the Design Page can be changed.

To see a more detailed design, select a file, and

then click [Preview].

cc

ayo

"Specifying the Design Page Settings" on

page 14
ut & E

Opening a Layout &

itin

Editing file

g Op

1 Click ,

then

[Open].

rations

• To open the displayed file, click [Open].

• If no files are listed, there are no .pes files in the

selected folder. Select a folder containing a .pes

file.

2 Select the drive, the folder and the file, and

• If the selected file is in a format other than the

then click [Open], or double-click the file's

.pes format, the message "Unexpected file

icon.

format" appears in the [Preview] window.

b

A file can be opened in any of the following ways.

• Drag the embroidery design from file Windows

Explorer into the Layout & Editing window.

• Double-click the embroidery design file in

Windows Explorer.

• Double-click the embroidery design file in

Design Database.

90
Opening/Importing Embroidery Designs

■ From a folder

Importing embroidery

1 Click the [Home] tab.

designs

2 Click [Import Patterns] in the [Import] group,

Embroidery designs can be imported from the

and then click [from File].

[Import] pane. For more details on the [Import]

pane, refer to "Example of Importing Embroidery

Data" on page 13.

■ From Design Library

1 Click the [Home] tab.

2 Click [Import Patterns] in the [Import] group,

and then click [from Design Library].

3 Click .

3 From the [Category] selector, select a

category to display the corresponding

embroidery data.

1 Indicates the path to the currently selected

folder.

4 Select the file icon for the design to be

imported, and then click [Import].

91
Opening/Importing Embroidery Designs

4 Select a folder, and then click [OK].

■ From an original card

1 Insert an original card into the USB card writer

module.

cc

Refer to "Transferring to a machine by

using an original card" on page 202

2 Click the [Home] tab.

3 Click [Import Patterns] in the [Import] group,

and then click [from Card].

5 Click [File Type] in the [Import] pane. Select

the file name extensions of the corresponding

embroidery data to be displayed, and then

click [OK].

asic

 After the card has been read, the

ayo

embroidery designs on the card are

displayed.

t&E

diting

6 Select the file icon, and then click [Import].

Op

er

atio
When importing designs from other vendors, be

sure to choose a design that will fit in the Design

Page.

Since .dst files do not contain thread color

information, the colors of an imported .dst file may

not appear as expected. You can change the

thread colors by using functions in the [Sewing

Order] pane or by holding down the <Alt> key and

selecting a stitch pattern.

cc

"Selecting stitch patterns by thread color" on

4 Select the file icon, and then click [Import].

page 71

• When importing .dst files, the number of jump

stitches for thread trimming can be specified.

Due to copyright issues, some original cards

cc
"Specifying the number of jumps in

cannot be used with this function.

embroidery design of the DST format" on

page 301

92
Opening/Importing Embroidery Designs

Importing vector images

(WMF/EMF/SVG)

• Image, text, width of the line, gradient, opacity,

and any other styles or attributes of graphics will

Vector image data in the ".wmf" (Windows Metafile),

not be imported. With files in the ".emf" and

".emf" (Enhanced Metafile) and ".svg" (Scalable

".svg" formats, the data is converted while

Vector Graphics) file formats can be converted to

retaining curves.

shape patterns.

• The data on all layers of an SVG file, regardless

of whether it is displayed or hidden, will be

1 Click the [Home] tab.

converted into the embroidery pattern.

2 Click [Import Patterns] in the [Import] group,

and then click [Import from Vector Image].

■ Creating an embroidery pattern

using vector images drawn with

other image-editing applications

Being converted to the ".svg" file format, vector

image files created with other commercially

available applications (e.g., ".ai" (Adobe Illustrator

Artwork) and ".cdr" (CorelDraw file)) can be

imported.

First convert the vector image files into either of

WMF, EMF or SVG file format with your

applications, and then import them to PE-DESIGN

Select the drive, folder and file, and then click

by following the steps described in "Importing vector

[Open].

images (WMF/EMF/SVG)".

Raster image files (e.g., ".bmp" and ".jpg") can be

used as background images in PE-DESIGN, or

they can be converted to embroidery patterns

using the Image To Stitch Wizard.

cc

For details, refer to page 131.

 The imported image appears in the Design

Page.

93

Opening/Importing Embroidery Designs

Importing embroidery

design from Design Center

1 Start up Design Center and open the file.

cc
"Original Image Stage" on page 212 and

"Opening a file" on page 223

2 Click the [Home] tab.

3 Click [Import Patterns] in the [Import] group,

and then click [from Design Center].

Basic

Layo

4 Specify the desired settings beside [Import],

t&E

[Magnification] and [Orientation], and then

click [Import].

diting Op

erations

Import

As Stitches:

Imports, as stitch patterns, embroidery data

created in Design Center.

As Outlines:

Imports, as outline patterns, embroidery data

created in Design Center. This data can be

edited in the same way as outline patterns

created in Layout & Editing.

The maximum magnification ratio that can be

specified is the ratio that enlarges the design to the

size of the Design Page.

94
Saving and Printing

Saving and Printing

Saving

If you select a file type of a previous software

Overwriting

version, saved .pes files can be opened with that

version of the software; however, all saved

Click ,

then
[Save].

designs will be converted to stitch pattern.

3 Click [Save] to save the data.

 The new file name appears in the title bar of

the Layout & Editing window.

■ Outputting design in a different

format

The data shown in the Design Page can be exported

as a file of a different format (.dst, .hus, .exp, .pcs,

.vip, .sew, .jef, .csd, .xxx, and .shv).

If no file name has been specified or if the file

1 Click ,

then

[Export].

cannot be found, the [Save As] dialog box

appears.

■ Saving with a new name

1 Click ,

then
[Save As].

2 Select the drive and the folder, and then type

2 Select the drive and the folder, and then type

in the file name.

in the file name.

95
Saving and Printing

3 Select a format (.dst, .exp, .pcs, .hus, .vip,

a Specify the paper size.

.shv, .jef, .sew, .csd, or .xxx) that the file will be

b Specify the paper orientation.

exported as.

c To print the embroidery pattern, select

[Embroidery print mode].

d Print type

The [Number of jumps for trim] setting can be

specified for outputting to the .dst format. Before

Actual Size:

outputting, click the [Option] button, then

Select this option to print the design at

[Options], then [DST Settings] to specify the

actual size and the sewing information

settings.

(dimensions of the embroidery pattern,

cc

sewing color order, stitch count and

"Specifying the number of jumps in

hoop position) on separate pages.

embroidery design of the DST format" on

page 301

Reduced Size:
Select this option to print a reduced

image together with all of the above-

mentioned information on a single

page.

• Some patterns imported from original cards

e Print option

cannot be exported.

• Divided embroidery patterns and embroidery

Print image:

asic

patterns for the jumbo frame or multi-position

Select this check box to print the image

hoop wil be exported as a single file, and wil not

imported into the Design Page in

be split into sections.

ayo

addition to the embroidery pattern.

However, any part of the image

u

extending out of the print area for the

t&E

Printing

embroidery will not be printed.

Print sewing area box & center axes:

itin

■ Specifying print settings

(This setting is only available when

[Actual Size] is selected.)

Before printing, you may need to change the print

Op

settings for the embroidery design files.

: Select this option to print black

er

lines to indicate the sewing area

atio

1 Click ,

then
[Print], then [Print Setup].

(refer to "Specifying the sewing

area" on page 16) and the center

axes for the data.

: Select this option to print an

embroidery positioning mark in

the center of the axes.

(This setting cannot be selected if

[Jumbo Frame] has been selected as

the Design Page size.)

Print template grid:

Select this check box to print green

lines to represent the grid printed on

the embroidery sheet included with the

hoop. (This setting cannot be selected

if User Hoop, [Cap Frame], [Cylinder

Frame], [Jumbo Frame], [Clamp

Frame] or [Round Frame] has been

selected as the Design Page size.)

96

Saving and Printing

Print hoop section boundaries onto the

g When printing an imported image onto

first page:

iron-on paper or printable fabric, or when

Select this check box to print the

printing the sheet for positioning the

sections of a design where the Design

embroidery in the printed image, select

Page has been set to a custom size or

[Image print mode], and then select an

to [Jumbo Frame]. The pattern

option under [Material].

sections are printed in red.

h Material

Divide embroidery image into 2 pages:

Print the image on printable fabric or an

Select this check box to print at actual

iron-on transfer sheet:

size and on A4- or Letter-size paper a

Select this option to print the

design that is larger than the paper size

background image on iron-on paper or

by dividing it in two and printing each

fabric that can be printed on. Only the

half on different pages.

image is printed.

(This setting is only available when

[Actual Size] is selected in the [Print

Print a flipped image:

Setup] dialog box and when the

Select this check box to print the image

Design Page is set to the larger hoop

flipped on a vertical axis. When printing

sizes. This setting is not available if a

on iron-on paper, the image is normally

[User Hoop] size is selected.)

printed flipped (mirror image). (For

details, refer to the instructions for the

With this split printing feature,

iron-on paper that you are using.)

or

/
is printed in the lower-right

Select this option if your printer does

corner of the paper to indicate which

not have a function for printing a flipped

half is printed.

(mirror) image. (For details, refer to the

Color Changes:

instructions for your printer.)

Select this check box to print the thread

Print a sheet of paper for aligning the

color change information for the

printed image and the embroidery:

pattern.

Select this option to print a sheet for

When this check box is cleared, the

aligning the positions of the image and

information for the necessary threads

embroidery. Positioning marks and

is printed. This allows you to check the

guide lines indicating the embroidering

total number of thread colors.

area are printed on the image.

f Stitch image

i Change Position

Normal:

The position where the image is printed

Select this option to print the design as

on the paper can be changed. (Any part of

lines and dots.

the image extending out of the print area

Realistic:

of the paper is not printed.) Click [Change

Select this option to print a realistic

Position] to display the [Image Print

image of the design. To change the

Position Setting] dialog box, and then

settings of the realistic image, click

drag the image to the desired printing

[Attributes].

position in the paper.

cc

"Changing realistic view settings" on

2 Click [OK].

page 79

cc

"Changing the display of the embroidery

design" on page 78.

If the [Divide embroidery image into 2 pages]

check box is cleared and you print on paper of a

larger size, the design does not print in two halves.

With embroidery patterns for the jumbo frame

Likewise, if you print on paper of a smaller size, the

The pattern in Side 2 of an embroidery pattern for

design might be cut off.

the jumbo frame is printed with the orientation of

the actual embroidery (rotated 180°).

97
Saving and Printing

■ Checking a print image

■ Printing a Design Page with

You can preview the contents of the Design Page

sewing information
before printing.

You can print the Design Page together with its

sewing information.

Click ,

then

[Print], then [Print Preview].

1 Click ,

then

[Print], then [Print].

2 Select the necessary settings.

Basic

Layo

ut & E

diting

Op

The print image can also be displayed by clicking

3 Click [OK] to begin printing.

er

[Print Preview] in the [Print Setup] dialog box.

atio
4 Follow the instructions for the printer to finish n

printing.

98

Saving and Printing

99

Creating Embroidery Patterns

Containing Text

This section provides descriptions for entering

text and the various operations for arranging

them. In addition, details are provided for creating

embroidery patterns whose text can easily be

replaced.

From Layout & Editing, various embroidery

patterns can be created for text.

The following types of text can be created.

Built-in fonts:

This software is provided with 130 built-in

fonts. (10 built-in fonts are specifically for

small text)

TrueType fonts: TrueType fonts installed on your computer

can be used to create embroidery patterns.

Small text:

These small fonts have sizes between 3 and

6 mm (0.12 and 0.24 inch).

Because of their size, these fonts are useful

for beautifully sewing small text.

Monogram:

Design custom monograms by combining

text and decorative patterns.

User-defined

User-defined fonts can be created by using

fonts:

the Font Creator.

In addition, text can be arranged in the following

ways.

Text

The text can be arranged along an outline or

arrangement:

an arc.

Transforming:

Text can be transformed into any of the 26

Transform styles.
Tutorial 2: Using Templates

Tutorial 2: Using Templates

Using the [Template Wizard], you can easily create custom embroidery patterns
by simply changing the text in the patterns that are already available. Follow
each step to create a custom embroidery pattern.

The sample file for this tutorial is located at Documents (My documents)\PE-
DESIGN 10\Tutorial\Tutorial_2.

Step 1

Starting the Template Wizard

Step 2
Selecting the type of template to be used

Step 3

Editing the text

Step 4

Outputting the edited template

Step 1 Starting the Template

Step 2 Selecting the type of

Wizard

template to be used

When Layout & Editing starts up, the first dialog box

1 Select [shirtsCH11B.pes] from the category

of the wizard appears.

[Shirts_Chest], and then click [Next].

1 Plug your USB media into the computer.

2 Click [Use Template Designs].

101
Tutorial 2: Using Templates

1 Click "R" in the text edit box, to be changed,

and then click [Edit Text].

Various templates are available when [Template]

 The text is highlighted.

is selected in the [From] selector of the [Import]

pane.

Select [shirtsCH11B.pes] from the category

[Shirts_Chest], and then click [Template

Wizard] to open the Template Wizard.

2 Type "S", and then press the <Enter> key.

 The results of editing appear in the preview

Cr

window.

ea

The text "Sweetheart" in the second row is

ting Embr

highlighted.

oide

ry Pa

Step 3 Editing the text

tte

rns

Cont

aining Te

3 Type "Championship", and then press the

<Enter> key.
xt

4 Click [Next].

a Text list: Edit the text here.

b Preview window: Check the results of the

edited text.

c Embroidery information for the template

102
Tutorial 2: Using Templates

■ Outputting the edited template

Step 4 Outputting the edited

USB media, a sewing machine, an original card or

template

the Link function can be selected as output

destinations.

1 Depending on the desired output destination,

prepare the USB media or original card.

Otherwise, connect the embroidery machine

to the computer.

2 Select the output destination from the [Send

To] selector, and then click [Send].

a Edit in Design page

Click this button to open the template in a

Design Page, where it can be edited or

saved.

b Send to selector

Select the output destination.

c Send

Click this button to output the template.

d Create New Embroidery Design

Click this button to return to the dialog box

• Select an output destination according to the

for selecting a template. A different

method used to transfer data to your embroidery

template can be edited.

machine.

• When no output destination is found, the [Send]

button will be grayed out and unavailable.

1 In the [Send To] selector, select your USB

cc

"Transferring Embroidery Designs to

media to be used, and then click [Send].

Machines" on page 201 and "Using the Link

Function to Embroider From the Computer" on

page 204

2 To create another embroidery pattern using a

different template, click [Create New

Embroidery Design]. The dialog box from

Step 2 appears.

To close the Template Wizard, click [Cancel].

103

Template Feature

Template Feature

Saving your design as a

new template
A design that you have created can be used as a

template.

1 Create an embroidery pattern that contains

text.

2 Apply the [Name Drop] attribute to the text.

cc

"Tutorial 5: Creating Name Drop" on

page 124 and "Name Drop Feature

(Replacing Text)" on page 127

3 Click ,

then

[Save As].

Creating Embr

oide

ry Pa

tte

4 Save the created embroidery pattern in a

rns

folder of the [Template Library] folder. Select

Cont

the folder (Drive where PE-DESIGN was

installed)\Program Files (x86)\Brother\PE-

DESIGN 10\Template Library\Sample, type

aining Te

in the file name, and then click [Save].

xt

104
Tutorial 3: Entering text

Tutorial 3: Entering text

This section describes the procedures for importing a transformed text pattern
and editing the text.

The sample file for this tutorial is located at Documents (My documents)\PE-
DESIGN 10\Tutorial\Tutorial_3.

Step 1

Importing a transformed text pattern

Step 2

Editing entered text

Step 1 Importing a transformed

Step 2 Editing entered text

text pattern

1 Select the imported text pattern, and then click

Import a text pattern from the [Import] pane.

the [Text Attributes] tab.

1 Display the [Import] pane.

2 Click in the text field.

2 Select [Text] from the [From] selector and

 The text pattern appears as dotted lines,

[Transformed] from the [Category] selector.

and the cursor appears at the end of the

Select [TT_001.pes], and then click [Import].

text.

3 Press the <BackSpace> key to delete the

text, and then click characters in the character

table to enter text. Final y, press the <Enter>

key to apply them.

For details on other ways to edit text, refer to the

section indicated below.

Sample built-in font patterns are available in the

[Import] pane when [Text] is selected in the

cc

"Editing entered text" on page 107

[From] selector.

105
Advanced Operations for Entering Text

Advanced Operations for Entering Text

6 Press the <Enter> key or click the Design

Entering text

Page.

1 Click the [Home] tab.

2 Click [Text] in the [Tools] group, and then

click .

• Hold down the <Ctrl> key and press the

<Enter> key to enter a new line of text.

Cr

• Characters can also be entered by clicking them

ea

in the character table. This is particularly useful

ting Embr

if you have to enter accented characters that are

not available on your keyboard.

3 If necessary, change the font, text size, color

oide

and sew type.

ry

cc
"Setting text attributes" on page 107 and

Pa

"Embroidery attributes for text" on

page 117

tte

rns

4 Click in the Design Page.

• Click [Hide List] to hide the character table.

Cont

While it is hidden, click [Show List] to display

the character table.

aining Te

If the entered character is not available with the

xt

5 Type the text.

selected font or if the character cannot be

converted to an embroidery pattern, the character

appears as

in the Design Page. If this occurs,

enter a different character.

106
Advanced Operations for Entering Text

Editing entered text

Setting text attributes

Switch to one of the following text edit modes, and

Text attributes can be specified with the [Font]

then type text as needed using the cursor appearing

selector and [Text Size] selector in the [Text] tab.

at the end of the text.

■ Using Text Attributes tab

1 Select a single text pattern.

2 Click the [Text Attributes] tab, and then click

in the text field.

b
The [Text] tab appears when a text pattern or a

Text tool is selected.

■ Font

Click the [Font] selector, and then select the

desired font.

■ Using Edit text tool

1 Select a single text pattern.

Click the [Text] tab, and then click [Edit Text]

in the [Edit] group.

■ Using keyboard

1 Select a single text pattern.

a Font Type

Press a character key in the keyboard.

• A number identifies built-in fonts.

•

identifies user-defined fonts.

■ Using Text tool

identifies TrueType fonts.

1 Click [Text] in the [Tools] group of the

b Font sample

[Home] tab, and then select

If a single string of text is selected, the

fonts in the list appear with the selected

characters.

c Font name

d Recommended minimum size

e Most recently used fonts

2 Click a text pattern to edit.

107
Advanced Operations for Entering Text

4 Select the check boxes for the fonts to be

displayed, and clear the check boxes for the

fonts to be hidden.
• User-defined fonts

PEF files created with Font

Creator and saved in the [MyFont]

folder where PE-DESIGN was

installed appear as userdefined

fonts after the fonts listed in the

table above.

The UD icon appears on user-

defined fonts.

cc

"Font Creator" on page 274

• TrueType fonts

The installed TrueType fonts appear after the

user-defined fonts.

The [Monogram] check box is available when

a pattern with a monogram font or the

[Monogram] tool is selected.

5 Click [OK] to apply the filter settings.

ea

TrueType font settings can be changed in the

ting Embr

[TrueType Font Attribute Setting] dialog box.

cc

"Specifying TrueType font attributes" on

To return the fonts to the default (all fonts

page 110

displayed), click [Default].

oide

6 To filter the fonts, click [Font Filter] so that it ry

Pa

appears as

• Text created using certain TrueType fonts may

tte

not be converted correctly into an embroidery

Clicking the button switches between filtering

r
pattern due to the shape of the character. These

and unfiltering the fonts.

ns

characters cannot be embroidered correctly.

Cont

Test sew before embroidering on your project.

• In addition, text created using some TrueType

fonts cannot be converted at all.

ining Te

■ Font Filter

A font listed in the [Font] selector can be selected.

The font filter cannot be applied to small text fonts.

cc

"Small Text" on page 118

Click text or a monogram, or select the [Text]

tool or [Monogram] tool.

2 Click the [Text] tab.

3 Click

beside

[Font Filter] in the [Font]

group, and then click [Font Filter Settings].

108
Advanced Operations for Entering Text

■ Text size

3 Change the text attributes.

Click the [Text Size] selector. Type the desired

height and press the <Enter> key, or select the

desired value.

Built-in fonts are listed in the [Font] selector with the

recommended minimum size. We recommend

using these fonts at a size equal or greater than the

size indicated.
a

1 Recommended minimum size

■ Specifying various text attributes

1 Select the text.

Click the [Text Attributes] tab.

If the [Text Attributes] pane is not displayed,

click the [View] tab, then [Attributes], and

then click [Text Attributes].

a Kerning

0.0 mm
5.0 mm

(between "A" and "B")

b Vertical Offset

0.0 mm

2.0 mm

c Rotate Angle

0°

20°

109
Advanced Operations for Entering Text
d Character Spacing

■ Specifying TrueType font

0.0 mm

2.0 mm

attributes

1 Select text in a TrueType font.

2 Click [TTF Settings] in the [Font] group.

e Line Spacing

100%

150%

f Alignment

3 Select a font style from the [Font style]

selector, select a character set from the

Left

Center

Right

[Script] selector, and then click [OK].

g Direction

Cre

Horizontal

Vertical
ating Embr

oide

h Transform

• The settings for [Font style] and [Script] differ

ry

cc

"Transforming text" on page 111

depending on the TrueType font that is selected.

Pa

• If text created from multiple TrueType fonts is

tte

selected, this command is not available. In

Click to return to the default setting.

addition, if text of the same font but different font

ns

styles or scripts is selected, this dialog box

Cont

j Name Drop
appears with the attribute settings for the first

cc

"Name Drop Feature (Replacing Text)"

letter in the text. In either case mentioned above,

on page 127

selecting only one character from within text

ining Te

displays a dialog box containing only that

character's attributes.

• Both [Kerning] and [Character Spacing] set

the spacing between characters. [Character

Spacing] is always applied to the entire text

pattern, while [Kerning] can be applied to

individual characters.

cc

Refer to "Editing individual characters" on

page 113 for more details about selecting

individual characters in a text pattern.

• Settings specified for [Kerning], [Vertical

Offset] and [Rotate Angle] in the [Text

Attributes] pane are applied to all selected

characters.

110
Advanced Operations for Entering Text

■ Transforming text

If

was selected in step 2, the following

operations can also be performed.

Drag
,

and

to transform the text.

1 Select the text.

2 Select the [Transform] check box, and then

click the transformation shape button.

:Adjusts the text size.

:Moves the text along the circle.

Depending on the selected shape, a dotted

line and

or

appear around the text.

A text pattern contains data for both line and

region sewing. Therefore, if this command is

:Adjusts the radius of the circle.

selected, depending on the form of the font, there

may be a gap between the line and the region in

the text.

3 Drag to transform the text.

b
•

can only be dragged vertically.

can only be dragged horizontally.

• To return the transformed text to its original

shape, clear the [Transform] check box.

111
Advanced Operations for Entering Text

4 Specify the desired settings in the [Fit Text to

Outline Attribute Setting] dialog box, and

then click [OK].

Depending on the shape selected under

[Transform], different handles appear for editing

the text.

c
d

a Horizontal Alignment

Creati

Fitting text to an outline

ng Embr

oide

ry Pa

1 Select the text or small text and an outline.

tte

rns

b Vertical Alignment

Cont

aining Te

2 Click the [Home] tab.

xt

3 Click [Group] in the [Edit] group, and then

click [Fit Text to Outline].

c Text Orientation

d the other side

112
Advanced Operations for Entering Text
a

Editing individual

• When fit text to outline is specified, the text

characters

transformation is cancelled.

• Only one string of text can be arranged on a

1 Select the text.

single outline.

2 Select characters in the text.

To select a single character, click

for the

character.

• To change the position of text on the outline,

select the text, and then drag it.

• The settings for some text attributes ([Size],

[Character Spacing], [Vertical Offset] and

[Rotate Angle]) can be changed for single

characters, even with text fit to an outline.

cc

"Editing individual characters" on page 113

b

■ Releasing text from an outline

a Rotation handle

b Size handle

c Vertical offset handle

1 Select text or small text that is arranged on an

Individual characters can be rotated, resized

outline.

or repositioned. In addition, when text is

selected, click the [Text] tab to change the

Click the [Home] tab.

thread color and sewing attributes.

3 Click [Group] in the [Edit] group, and then

click [Release Text from Outline].

Multiple

can be selected and the selected

can be changed in the same way that embroidery

pattern points are selected.

• Drag the pointer.

 All points within the box are selected.

• Hold down the <Ctrl> key while clicking the

points.

 To deselect a point, click the selected

point.

• Hold down the <Shift> key while pressing an

arrow key to select multiple points.

• Hold down the <Ctrl> key while pressing an

arrow key to change the point that is selected.

cc

"Selecting points" on page 66

113
Advanced Operations for Entering Text

2 When you release the mouse button, the

Changing a character size

character spacing is changed.

and character's attributes

You can easily use drag operations to change the

size and text attributes.

■ Changing the size

1 Bring the pointer onto the upper right

■ Changing the vertical offset

handle.

1 Bring the pointer onto the lower handle.

2 Drag the handle.

2 Drag the handle vertically.

Creating Embr

oide
3 When you release the mouse button, the

3 When you release the mouse button, the

character size is changed.

ry

character offset is changed.

Pa

tte

rns

Cont

aining Te

■ Changing the kerning

■ Rotating the characters

1 Place the pointer onto the character body

1 Bring the pointer onto the handle.

other than the

handles, and drag

2 Drag the handle.

the character horizontally.

114
Advanced Operations for Entering Text

3 When you release the mouse button, the

■ Converting text to blocks

character angle is changed.

Converting text patterns

Text can be converted into blocks, allowing you

reshape characters. By changing the sewing

direction line in each of these small regions, you can

Text pattern

create text patterns that appear like manual

embroidery.

1 Select the text or monogram text.

2 Click the [Text] tab.

3 Click [Convert to Blocks] in the [Edit] group.

Blocks

Shapes

*Blocks: A group of shape patterns with multiple

sewing direction lines

Small text cannot be converted into blocks (shape

After being converted, text attributes are no longer

patterns with multiple sewing direction lines).

available, but the following editing operations can be

performed.

Convert to Blocks

The pattern is converted while maintaining the

• The text pattern is converted with the original

multiple sewing direction lines.

sewing quality maintained.

The character shapes can be partially rearranged.

• The shapes of created blocks can be edited in

Convert to Outline

their finest details.

The text is converted to shapes, which can be

cc

For details on editing blocks or outlines, refer

edited.

to "Reshaping Embroidery Patterns" on

page 66

Various sew types or embossing/engraving effects

• Since the text data is no longer available, the

can be applied.

text cannot be edited.

For details on the shape pattern and text pattern,

refer to page 8.

115
Advanced Operations for Entering Text

■ Converting text to outline pattern

Selecting connection point

positions in a text pattern

The positions for connection points between

characters within the same text (end point of one

character and the start point of the next character)

can be specified.

The available settings are [Default], [Closest] and

1 Select text.

[Farther].

2 Click the [Text] tab.

1 Select the text or monogram text.

3 Click [Convert to Outline] in the [Edit] group.

If the [Sewing Attributes] pane is not

displayed, click the [View] tab in the Ribbon,

and then click [Sewing Attributes].

2 Click a setting under [Connection Points].

Cre

ating Embr

Transformed shapes are grouped. In addition, hole

sewing is automatically specified for openings

(such as the triangle inside the letter "A").

oide

ry

Pa

Text patterns created with built-in fonts 025 and

029, user-defined fonts or small text fonts cannot

tte

be converted to outlines.

rns

a Default

Cont

aining Te

• When a pattern is converted outlines, the sewing

quality will decrease slightly.

• The sewing direction will become uniform, but it

Stitches are created in the default sewing

can be edited.

order for good stitching quality of all

cc

"Specifying the sewing direction" on page 51

characters.
• Since the text data is no longer available, the

text cannot be edited.

116

Advanced Operations for Entering Text

b Closest

Embroidery attributes for

text

The Sew group in the Attributes tab allows you to set

the embroidery attributes (thread color and sew

Stitches are created at the shortest distance

type, outline and inside region on/off).

between the end point of one character and

When text is selected, settings can be specified for

the start point of the next character. This

the following.

shortens jump stitches and reduces the

number of times that the thread is trimmed.

c Farther

Stitches are created at a farther distance

a Line color/Region color

between the end point of one character and

Sets the thread color for outlines and

the start point of the next character. This

inside regions.

lengthens jump stitches so they can easily be

cc

"Color" on page 46

trimmed manually.

A Connection Points setting can be selected

b Line sew type

not only for region sewing, but also for line

Sets the sew type for the outlines.

sewing.

Except with built in fonts 025 and 029, and

a user-defined fonts, all sew types are

available for lines in text.

cc

"Line sew types" on page 49

• These settings are not available with text

created using built-in fonts 025 or 029, a

TrueType font, a user-defined font or a small text

c Region sew type

font.

Sets the sew type for an inside region.

• These settings are not available for text

[Satin Stitch], [Fill Stitch] and [Prog.

containing characters of different colors.

Fill Stitch] are available for lines in text.

• These settings are not available for text where

cc

"Region sew types" on page 49

the sewing order of the characters is not

continuous.

• Text patterns created using built-in fonts 025

and 029 or user-defined fonts only have an

inside region. The thread color and sew type for

only the region can be selected.

• Sewing attribute that can be set with Text under

sewing. For details, refer to "Region sewing

attributes" on page 331.

117
Advanced Operations for Entering Text

b
• To turn off line sewing, select [Not Sewn (Line)]

Sample small text font patterns are available in the

from the [Line sew type] selector.

[Import] pane when [Text] is selected in the

• To turn off region sewing, select [Not Sewn

[From] selector and [Small Text] is selected in the

(Region)] from the [Region sew type] selector.

[Category] selector.

• The variety of embroidering effects possible

cc

"Example of Importing Embroidery Data" on

differs depending on the selected combination of

page 13

settings for line sewing and region sewing.

Line sewing

Region sewing

specified

specified

■ Editing small text

(Text Outline Sew

(Text Body Sew

Small text attributes can be selected from the [Text]

Type)

Type)

tab, the [Text Attributes] pane and the [Color]

pane. When the small text tool is selected, the

Any other than [Not Any other than [Not

[Text] tab appears as shown below.

Sewn (Line)]

Sewn (Region)]

Any other than [Not

[Not Sewn (Line)]

Sewn (Region)]

at

ing Embr

The [Text] tab appears when a small text pattern

Any other than [Not [Not Sewn

or the small text tool is selected.

Sewn (Line)]

(Region)]

oide

Small text fonts

ry Pa

tte

Small Text

rns

Cont

Precautions for embroidering small text patterns.

ai

cc

ning Te

"Fonts Suitable for Embroidering" on

page 303

xt

■ Entering small text

ab

d
1 Click the [Home] tab.

2 Click [Text] in the [Tools] group, and then

a Font number

b Font sample

click .

c Font name

d Recommended size

cc

"Font List" on page 340

3 Enter text in the same way that regular text is

entered, starting with step 3.

cc

"Entering text" on page 106

118

Advanced Operations for Entering Text

Only built-in fonts specifically for small text can be

used.

cc

For a list of the built-in fonts specifically for

small text, refer to "Small Text" on page 342.

The settings for all small text attributes except the

font are specified in the same way that they are

specified for regular text patterns.

However, with small text, settings cannot be

specified for the following.

• Sew type

• Sewing Attributes

• Transform

• Name Drop

To edit an entered small text, select the small text

with the [Select] tool, and then type the new text

into the text field in the [Text Attributes]

pane.There are three other ways to edit text.

cc

"Editing entered text" on page 107

■ When sewing small fonts

For best results when using your embroidery

machine to embroider patterns containing small font

patterns, follow the recommendations described

below.
1 Reduce the thread tension to less than what is

used when embroidering normal designs.

2 Sew at a speed slower than what is used when

embroidering normal designs.

(For details on adjusting the thread tension

and sewing speed, refer to the Operation

Manual provided with your embroidery

machine.)

3 Do not trim the jump stitches between the

characters.

(For details on setting the machine for thread

trimming, refer to the Operation Manual for the

embroidery machine.)

119
Tutorial 4: Monograms

Tutorial 4: Monograms

The sample file for this tutorial is located at Documents (My documents)\PE-
DESIGN 10\Tutorial\Tutorial_4.

Step 1

Entering monograms

Step 2

Adding a decorative pattern

Step 3

Changing character size of the monogram

Step 4

Changing the thread color and sew type of the monogram

4 Click [Edit Text] in the [Edit] group.

re

Step 1 Entering monograms

ating Embr

1 Display the [Import] pane.

2 Select [Text] from the [From] selector and

[Monogram] from the [Category] selector.

oide

Click [TM_002.pes], then [Import].

 The text pattern appears as dotted lines,

ry

and the cursor appears at the end of the

Pa

text.

tte

rns

Cont

aining Te

5 Press the <BackSpace> key to delete the

text, and then use the keyboard to type in

xt

"XYZ".

6 Press the <Enter> key.

 The text appears in the Design Page.

b

Sample monogram patterns are available in the

[Import] pane when [Text] is selected in the

[From] selector and [Monogram] is selected in

the [Category] selector.

3 Select the imported monogram pattern, and

then click the [Text] tab.

120
Tutorial 4: Monograms

3 Select [Monogram Decoration] from the

[Category] selector. Click [Deco09.pes],

then [Decorative Import].

• In this example, a monogram pattern was

imported from the [Import] pane; however, a

pattern can also be created by selecting the

Monogram tool, then typing in text.

cc

"Entering text" on page 106

• Characters can also be entered from the

character table in the [Text Attributes] tab.

• You cannot insert line feeds.

• A maximum of three characters can be entered.

 The decorative pattern is added.

• Only uppercase letters (the characters

displayed at the character table) can be entered.

• If a monogram is selected, the [Decorative

Step 2 Adding a decorative

Import] button and [Maintain aspect ratio]

pattern

check box will appear.

To import the decorative pattern adjusted to the

A decorative pattern can be added.

size of the monogram while maintaining its

original height-to-width proportion, select the

1 Display the [Import] pane, and select

[Maintain aspect ratio] check box. Clear the

[Decorative Pattern] from the [From]

check box to import the decorative pattern with

its height-to-width proportion adjusted to the

selector.

monogram.

2 Select the monogram.

• If no monogram is selected, the button will

appear as the [Import] button. Clicking this

button will import the decorative pattern at its

standard size.

121
Tutorial 4: Monograms

■ Changing the thread color

Step 3 Changing character size

of the monogram

1 Click [Color] tab to display the color palette.

■ Changing the character size of the

2 Click [TANGERINE].

monogram

Click the [Text Size] selector, and then type in "22".

3 Select the characters "YZ", and then click

[RED].
Diamond and Script are fonts exclusively for

monograms. You can also use the built-in fonts or

TrueType fonts.

cc

"Editing monograms" on page 123

Creating Embr

Step 4 Changing the thread color

and sew type of the

monogram

oide

Click the point for the monogram character whose

■ Changing sew type

settings are to be changed.

ry

1 Click the [Text] tab.

Pa

2 Click the [Text Body Sew Type] selector in

tte

the [Sew] group, and then select [Fill Stitch].

rns

Cont
1

1 Click here.

ining Te

xt

122

Advanced Operations for Entering Monograms

Advanced Operations for Entering

Monograms

Editing monograms

b
Monogram attributes can be selected from the

Diamond and Script are fonts exclusively for

[Text] tab, the [Text Attributes] pane, the [Sewing

monograms. You can also use built-in fonts, user-

Attributes] pane and the [Color] pane. When the

defined fonts and TrueType fonts.

Monogram tool is selected, the [Text] tab appears

cc

For a list of the built-in fonts and monogram

as shown below.

fonts, refer to "Font List" on page 340.

The settings for all monogram attributes except the

font are specified in the same way that they are

specified for regular text patterns.

However, with monograms, settings cannot be

specified for the following.

The [Text] tab appears when a monogram or the

• Rotate Angle, Character Spacing, Line Spacing,

Monogram tool is selected.

Alignment, Direction
• Transform

■ Monogram font

• Name Drop

• Fit Text to Outline

Click the [Font] selector, and then select the

desired font.

• To edit an entered monogram, select the text

pattern with the [Select] tool, and then type the

new text into the text field in the [Text

Attributes] pane.

• There are three other ways to edit text.

cc

"Editing entered text" on page 107

a Font Type

• A number identifies built-in fonts.

•
identifies Monogram fonts.

b Font sample

If a single string of text is selected, the

fonts in the list appear with the selected

characters.

c Font name

d Most recently used fonts

123
Tutorial 5: Creating Name Drop

Tutorial 5: Creating Name Drop

By creating an embroidery pattern containing text and using the Name Drop
function, you can easily create a number of similar embroidery patterns, for
example, for uniforms, by replacing only the name in the pattern.

The sample file for this tutorial is located at Documents (My documents)\PE-
DESIGN 10\Tutorial\Tutorial_5.

Step 1

Designing the embroidery pattern

Step 2

Creating the list

Step 3

Outputting patterns using text from the text list

5 Type in "Fernand", and then press the

Step 1 Designing the embroidery

<Enter> key.

pattern

eating Embr

1 Display the [Import] pane, and select [Design

Library] from the [From] selector.

2 Select [Misc] from the [Category] selector,

oide
and then drag the rainbow pattern into the

Design Page.

ry Pa

tte

rns

6 Select the text pattern, select the [Transform] Cont

check box, and then click

aining Te

xt

3 Click the [Home] tab.

4 Click [Text] in the [Tools] group, click

and then click the Design Page.

124
Tutorial 5: Creating Name Drop

7 Drag the pattern to adjust its position.

(3) When entering text, press the <Enter>

key so that the cell in the next row enters

input mode.

Repeat steps (1) through (3) to create the text

list.

Selecting a cell containing entered text allows you

to preview that text.

Step 2 Creating the list

1 Select "Fernand", and then select the [Name

Drop] check box, and click [Name Drop List]

button.

Step 3 Outputting patterns using

text from the text list

Let's practice outputting the patterns to files.

Embroidery data with the text replaced by each row

of text in the list can be outputted.

1 Click [To Folder].

2 Enter text in the list. In this example, we will

add text at the end of the list.

(1) Click a cell in the

row and click [Edit

Text], or click the cel to enter input mode.

2 Select the drive and folder in the dialog box

that appears after clicking

, type the name

of the file in the [File Name] box, and then

click [OK].
(2) Use the keyboard to enter the text.

 This application begins checking that there

are no errors in the embroidery data. If no

errors were detected, it begins outputting

the data.

125
Tutorial 5: Creating Name Drop

The files are named " <file_name> xxx.pes" (where

"xxx" are consecutive numbers starting with 001).

3 After the data has been outputted, the

following message appears. Click [OK].

An embroidery file is saved in the selected

folder for each line of text in the list.

Creating Embr
oide

ry Pa

tte

rns

Cont

aining Te

xt

126
Name Drop Feature (Replacing Text)

Name Drop Feature (Replacing Text)

Text attributes with Name

Drop attribute applied

The [Name Drop List] dialog box for a text pattern

can be displayed by selecting a text pattern with

the [Name Drop] attribute applied, clicking [Text]

d

in the [Home] tab, then clicking [Text], then [Open

Name Drop List].

c Maintain aspect ratio

If this check box is selected, the height-to-

width proportion of the text is maintained.

■ Alignment

a Name Drop

If this check box is selected, the [Name

Drop] attribute is applied.

e
• When the [Name Drop] attribute is applied, the

settings for [Kerning], [Vertical Offset],

[Rotate Angle], [Character Spacing], [Line

Spacing], the character size and color will be

reset.

• The [Name Drop] attribute is not available with

text where the [Fit Text to Outline] command

has been specified, small text or monogram text.

b Name Drop List

Click this button to display the [Name

Drop List] dialog box.

127
Name Drop Feature (Replacing Text)

Functions in the Name

Drop List dialog box

If the pattern contains two text patterns with the

[Name Drop] attribute applied, the text list

appears as shown below.

ac

f
b

■ Saving / importing a text list (CSV)

f Saves the created Name Drop List.

Cr

Click this button, select the drive and

ea

folder, type the name of the file in the [File

ting Embr

Name] box, and then click [Save] to save

a Name Drop List

the list as a .csv file.

Create the list of text to be used to replace

text in the pattern. Double-click a cell to

g Imports a Name Drop List as a .csv file.

Click this button, select the drive and

oide

enter input mode.

Select a row to display a preview of the

folder, click the name of the file, and then

ry

pattern with the text in that row. A row in

click [Open], or double-click the file's

Pa

the text list can be selected by pressing

icon.

tte

the

or

key.

rns

■ Outputting patterns using text

b Click

to add a row at the end of the

Cont

from the text list

list.

(Up to 500 rows can be added.)

h Click to send to machines by using the

aining Te
c Edit Text

Link function. This button is available if an

Enters input mode for the text in the

embroidery machine compatible with the

selected cell. (Input mode can also be

Link function is connected to the

entered by double-clicking a cell.)

computer. Connect a compatible

xt

embroidery machine that has been

d Select a row, and then click [Insert]. A

new row is inserted above the selected

started in Link mode.

one.

cc

"Using the Link Function to Embroider

From the Computer" on page 204

e Select a row, and then click [Delete]. The

selected row is deleted.

i To Folder

cc
"Outputting patterns using text from the

text list" on page 125

■ Editing a pattern with text

replaced

j Select text in the [Name Drop List] dialog

box and click [OK] to return to the Design

Page and edit the pattern with the text

replaced.

128

Name Drop Feature (Replacing Text)

129

Creating Embroidery Patterns Using

Images

Embroidery patterns can easily be created from

images. In addition, this section provides details

on creating an embroidery pattern that is

combined with an image.

Stitch Wizard: Automatically Converting an Image to an Embroidery
Design

Stitch Wizard: Automatically Converting

an Image to an Embroidery Design

An embroidery pattern can be created from a digital camera photo, a scanned
illustration, or a clip art image.

■ Auto Punch (cc p. 132)

■ Cross Stitch (cc p. 135)

■ Photo Stitch 1 (cc p. 139)

■ Photo Stitch 2 (cc p. 144)

131
Tutorial 6-1: Auto Punch

Tutorial 6-1: Auto Punch

In this section, we are going to use the Auto Punch function to automatically
create an embroidery pattern from an image. This creates an embroidery pattern
from shapes and colors in the image.

Step 1
Importing image data into Layout & Editing

Step 2

Starting the Auto Punch wizard

Step 3

Applying an image mask and adjusting its size and position

Step 4

Creating a border from the mask outline and converting to an embroidery pattern

Step 1 Importing image data into

Layout & Editing

1 Click the [Image] tab.

2 Click [Open] in the [Image] group, and then

click [from File].

Creating Embr

• Images with few and distinct colors work best

oide

with [Auto Punch].

• Repeat steps

ry

1 to 4 to choose another picture Pa

3 Double-click the [Documents (My

image. Otherwise, the image can be replaced

with the dialog box in Step 4.

tte

documents)\PE-DESIGN 10\Tutorial\

Tutorial_6] folder to open it.

cc

"Select Mask dialog box" on page 147

ns

Us

• You can import picture images from a scanner,

or clipboard, and import that image.

ing Ima

When this application is installed, the [PE-

cc

"Importing Image Data" on page 150

DESIGN 10] folder is installed in the Documents

folder.

ge

s
Step 2 Starting the Auto Punch

4 Select the file [penguin.bmp], and then click

wizard

[Open], or double-click the file's icon.

1 Click the [Image] tab.

2 Click [Auto Punch] in the [Stitch Wizard]

group.

 The image appears in the work area.

132
Tutorial 6-1: Auto Punch

Step 3 Applying an image mask

Step 4 Creating a border from the

and adjusting its size and

mask outline and

position

converting to an

embroidery pattern

1 Click
to select the circle mask.

Select the [Add mask outline] check box, check

Drag handle to adjust the size of the mask,

the preview image, and then click [Finish].

and drag the mask to adjust its position.

Click [Next].

The mask outline selected here can be used as

line data (border) in Step 4.

cc

"Select Mask dialog box" on page 147.

2 Drag the image to adjust its output location

and size. The white background indicates the

sewing area in the Design Page.

Click [Next].

 The image is automatically hidden and

stitches are automatically input.

cc

"Check Mask Shape/Modify Image dialog

box" on page 148

133
Auto Punch Features

Auto Punch Features

c Zoom

Auto Punch Parameters

d Create Lines

dialog box

Click this button to display the [Select

Regions] dialog box, where the areas to

be converted to lines can be selected.

a

Crea

Click the areas to be converted to lines,

ing Embr

a Result View

and then click [OK].

The resulting analyzed image appears in

the Result View box.

oide

b Omit Region Colors/Omit Line Colors

In the [Omit Region Colors] list and

ry

[Omit Line Colors] list, click the colors to

Pa

select whether or not they will be sewn.

tte

You can select whether or not areas will

be sewn by selecting their colors. Colors

ns

that are crossed out are set to not be

Us

sewn.

ing Ima

• To select whether or not a part of the image is to

e Thread Chart

ge

be sewn, click in the Result View box, or click in

Select the thread chart to be used.

the [Omit Region Colors] and [Omit Line

Colors] lists.

f Add mask outline

If this check box is selected, line data is

• Areas filled with a crosshatch pattern in the

created from the mask outline.

Result View box will not be sewn.

In addition, lines that appear as dotted lines will

g Noise reduction

not be sewn.

Sets the level of noise (distortions) that is

removed from the imported image.

h Segmentation sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity for the image analysis.

i Max. Number of Colors

Sets the number of colors used.

j Retry

To view the results of the changes, click

this button.

1 These areas will not be sewn.

134
Tutorial 6-2: Cross Stitch

Tutorial 6-2: Cross Stitch

The Cross Stitch function creates cross-stitch embroidery patterns from images.
In this section, we will create a cross-stitch embroidery pattern from an image.

Step 1

Importing image data into Layout & Editing

Step 2

Starting the Cross Stitch wizard

3 Click [Next].
Step 1 Importing image data into

Layout & Editing

Select the [Tutorial_6] folder, and then select

[tulip.bmp] as the image.

cc

"Importing image data into Layout &

Editing" on page 132

From this dialog box, an image mask can be

applied, and its size can be adjusted and

shape edited. For this example, we will simply

continue to the next step.

cc

"Select Mask dialog box" on page 147

Step 2 Starting the Cross Stitch

4 Click [Next].

wizard

1 Click the [Image] tab.

2 Click [Cross Stitch] in the [Stitch Wizard]

group, and then click [Color].

From this dialog box, the size and position of

the image can be adjusted. For this example,

we will simply continue to the next step.

cc

"Check Mask Shape/Modify Image dialog

box" on page 148

135
Tutorial 6-2: Cross Stitch

5 Click [Next].

In this dialog box, the cross size and the

number of colors can be specified. For this

example, we will use the default settings.

6 Click [Finish].

Creating Embr

oide

ry Pa
tte

rns

Us

In this dialog box, stitches can be added,

deleted or edited, and colors and the number

ing Ima

of times each stitch is sewn can be specified.

For this example, we will use the default

settings.

ge

 The image is automatically hidden and

stitches are automatically input.

136
Cross Stitch Features

Cross Stitch Features

f Max. Number of Colors

Cross Stitch Parameters

Sets the number of colors used in the

created pattern.

dialog box

g Retry

To view the results of the changes, click

cb

this button.

h Next

Continues to the next step ([Edit Cross

Stitch] dialog box).

■ Edit Cross Stitch dialog box

Click a button in (1) to select the type of stitch,

select a thread color in (2), and then click or

drag in (3) to edit the stitches.

c
ad

a Result View

Areas that will not be converted to cross-

stitching are shown with a crosshatch

pattern.

b Omit Colors

In the Omit Colors list, click the colors to

select whether or not they wil be sewn.

• To select whether or not a part of the image is to

a Selecting stitches

be sewn, click in the Result View box, or click in

Selecting stitches to be added/deleted

the [Omit Colors] list.

(cross-stitches): Specifies a cross-

• Areas filled with a crosshatch pattern in the

stitch inside a box.

Result View box will not be sewn.

(backstitches): Specifies a back stitch

inside (

or

) or on the edge (

or

) of a box.

b Color Option

To change the color, click [Change

Color] to display the [Thread Color]

dialog box, and then click the desired

1 These areas will not be sewn.

color.

To select the color to be used for a stitch,

c Zoom

click

, and then click the stitch to

d Cross size
be sewn with that color.

Sets the size of the pattern.

e Thread Chart

You can select the brand of thread to use

in the created cross stitch pattern.

137

Cross Stitch Features

c Editing area

 For cross-stitches

Clicking a box: Adds one stitch.

 For backstitches

Clicking an edge of a box: Adds one

stitch at the edge.

Clicking a diagonal line in a box: Adds

one stitch on the diagonal.

 For both cross-stitches and

backstitches

Dragging the pointer: Adds

consecutive stitches.

Right-clicking/dragging with the right

mouse button held down: Deletes one

stitch/deletes consecutive stitches.

d Zoom

e Display Template

To display the imported image, click

[Display Template].

rea

f Add mask outline

ting Embr

If this check box is selected, line data is

created from the mask outline.

g Cross Stitch Times/Backstitch Times

oide

For the number of times each stitch is to

be sewn, select [Single], [Double] or

ry

[Triple].

Pa

tte

r
If [Previous] is clicked to return to the [Cross

ns

Stitch Parameters] dialog box after the stitches

Us

have been edited, the edited stitches are reset to

ing Ima

their previous arrangement.

ge

138
Tutorial 6-3: Photo Stitch 1

Tutorial 6-3: Photo Stitch 1

By using the Photo Stitch 1 function, embroidery patterns can be created from
photos. This type of embroidery pattern created from a photo has detailed and
overlapping stitching.

Step 1

Importing photo data into Layout & Editing

Step 2

Starting the Photo Stitch 1 wizard

Step 3
Applying an image mask and adjusting its size and position

Step 4

Selecting appropriate thread colors and creating an embroidery pattern

Step 1 Importing photo data into

Step 3 Applying an image mask

Layout & Editing

and adjusting its size and

position

Select the [Tutorial_6] folder, and then select

[swimming_girl.jpg] as the image.

1 Drag the handles to adjust the shape of the

cc

"Importing image data into Layout &

mask. Drag the mask to adjust its position.

Editing" on page 132

2 Then click Next.

Step 2 Starting the Photo Stitch 1

3 Click [Design Settings].

wizard

1 Click the [Image] tab.

2 Click [Photo Stitch 1] in the [Stitch Wizard]

group, and then click [Color].

With [Photo Stitch 1], an embroidery pattern can

be created in color (Color), sepia (Sepia),

grayscale (Gray) or one color (Mono). For this

example, select [Color].

139
Tutorial 6-3: Photo Stitch 1
4 Select [Hoop Size] and choose a Design

Step 4 Selecting appropriate

Page size of 100 × 100 mm from the selector.

Then, click [OK].

thread colors and creating

an embroidery pattern

5 Click [Fit to page] to change the final finishing

At this point, the embroidery pattern can be

size.

completed by clicking [Finish]. However, this

section wil describe how to improve the photo

stitching by changing various settings.

Cre

1 From the [Thread Chart] selector, select

at

[Brother Chart (Photo Stitch)].

ing Embr

In the [Max. Number of Colors] selector,

specify "20".

Click [Update Preview].

oide
ry Pa

tte

• The size of the embroidery pattern appears in

the lower left corner of the dialog box. The user

ns

can change the size freely with this display.

2 Slide the [Brightness] slider one position to

Us

the left, and the [Contrast] slider two

• The minimum sizes of embroidery patterns that

ing Ima

positions to the right.

can be sewn are listed below.

Click [Update Preview].

 Face only: 100 × 100 mm

 Head and face: 130 × 180 mm

ge

cc
"Check Mask Shape/Modify Image dialog

box" on page 148 and "Gray Balance /

Modify Image dialog box" on page 149

6 Check the preview of the area to be converted

then click [Next].

Make adjustments as needed, depending on the

image. If it is difficult to adjust the tone, click

[Select from Candidates].

cc

"Select from Candidates" on page 143.

140
Tutorial 6-3: Photo Stitch 1

3 While looking at the preview on the right side,

select colors from the list for the most

frequently used colors (light blue for the

If the created embroidery pattern contains colors

background) and for the more characteristic

that you do not wish to emphasize (for example,

colors (deep rose for the lips), and then click

grays in the face), change the sewing order in the

[Reserve].

[Sewing Order] pane so that the undesirable color

is sewn before all other colors.

 For this example, four colors (cream brown,

light blue, salmon pink and deep rose) are

cc

"Changing colors" on page 85.

reserved.

Tips for improved results

If the actual thread colors differ from the thread

colors on the screen, the embroidering results wil

be greatly affected.

[Brother Chart (Photo Stitch)] is a thread chart

based on the Brother embroidery thread colors and

4 In the [Max. Number of Colors] selector,

flesh tones, and has been adjusted to account for

specify "10", and then click [Update Preview].

the difference between thread colors on the screen

and actual thread colors; however, colors may

appear differently depending on your operating

environment.

If the thread colors on the screen are different from

the actual thread colors, use the user thread color

lists and adjust the thread colors to achieve better

5 Click [Finish].

results.

cc

"Editing user thread color lists" on

page 192

 The image is automatically hidden.

141
Photo Stitch 1 Features

Photo Stitch 1 Features

a Color options

Photo Stitch 1 Parameters

dialog box

Color/Sepia/Gray

You can select the brand of thread to

Thread Chart

With Color, Sepia or Gray

use in the created pattern.

Select whether thread colors will be

selected automatically (on) or manually

Auto Select

(off). Select this check box to turn on

this function.

Number of

Sets the number of colors selected by

Colors

the Auto Select function.

Displays the thread colors that are

List of colors being used. With this list, the thread

used

colors that are being used can be

checked or changed.

Click this button to add a thread color to

the list of colors used.

When clicked, the [Add] dialog box

appears.

ea

ting Embr

With Mono

Add

oide

ry Pa
tte

Select a thread chart, then a thread

color, and then click [OK] to add the

rns

color to the list. Added thread colors will

Us

be reserved as thread colors that must

be used.

ing Ima

Select a thread color in the list of colors

used, and then click this button to delete

Remove

the selected color from the list. This is

ge

used to delete unnecessary thread

colors and reduce the number of colors.

Specifies thread colors that must be

Select the thread colors in the color options a,

used. Select a thread color in the list of

specify the desired settings under [Sewing Option]

colors used, and then click this button to

b and [Color Option] c, and then, click [Update

Reserve

display

in the Reserved column. To

Preview] d to preview the effects of the specified

cancel this setting, click to icon so that it

settings. Click [Finish] e to convert the image to

appears as

an embroidery pattern.

Mono

List of colors Displays the thread colors that are

used

being used.

Click this button to display the [Thread

Change
Color] dialog box, where the thread

Color

colors can be changed.

142

Photo Stitch 1 Features

b Sewing Option

d Update Preview

Update the previewed image after settings have

Selecting a setting closer to [Fine]

been changed.

creates more details in the pattern and

Detail
increases the number of stitches. (The

stitches will be overlapping.)

When the value is lowered, the sewing

• I f the [Auto Select] check box is selected, the

Run Pitch

pitch (stitch length) will be shortened,

thread colors will be automatically selected from

resulting in finer stitching.

the chart selected in the [Thread Chart]

selector. If thread colors are reserved, they will

Sew Page

included in the colors selected according to the

Color

If this check box is cleared, the parts of

number specified in the [Number of Colors]

(Available

the pattern that are the same color as

box.

only with

the Design Page will not be sewn.

If the [Auto Select] check box is cleared, the

Color, Sepia If it is selected, those parts will be sewn.

settings in the [Thread Chart] selector and

and Gray)

[Number of Colors] box are not applied, and

Add mask

If this check box is selected, line data is

only the thread colors in the current list of colors

outline

created from the mask outline.

used will be used to assign thread colors.

Click this button to display the [Others]

• When thread colors are added/deleted, the

dialog box, where the following settings

[Auto Select] check box is cleared. To use

can be specified.

added thread colors and automatically select

[Conversion Priority]:

other thread colors, select the [Auto Select]

To give priority to creating a pattern as

check box, and then update.

close to the original photograph, select

[Stitch Quality].

• The thread colors in the list of colors used are

To give priority to reducing the number

listed, in order, starting from the brightest. This

of jump stitches, select [Jump Stitch

order is the sewing order and cannot be

Reduction].

changed.

Others

[Image Type]:

If [Photo] is selected, the thread colors

will be mixed together, which will result

in a more natural look.

If [Cartoon] is selected, the thread

Creating beautiful photo embroidery

colors will not be mixed together, which

• [Brother Chart (Photo Stitch)] in the [Thread

will result in a more simply colored look.

Chart] selector is a thread chart created to allow

Select [Photo] for image data from a

you to preview, in colors nearest to the actual

photograph, etc. Select [Cartoon] for

embroidered thread colors, patterns using

image data from an illustration, etc.

Brother embroidery threads. This chart provides

a color scheme that best corresponds to your

c Brightness / Contrast

expected result.

However, the colors may appear differently

The top slider is used to adjust the brightness.

depending on the computer environment. By

The bottom slider is used to adjust the contrast.

editing the colors to create a user thread chart

The image can be automatically

corresponding to the threads that you have, you

adjusted.

can create patterns while viewing them in colors

Click this button to display nine patterns

nearest to the actual threads that will be

with different brightness and contrast

embroidered.

levels based on the original image.

cc

"Editing user thread color lists" on page 192

Select one of the candidates, and then

click [OK].

• The following types of photos are not

Select from

appropriate for creating embroidery patterns.

Candidates

 Photos where the subject is small, such as in

photos of gatherings

 Photos where the subject appears dark, such

as photos taken in a room or taken with

backlighting

• An image with a width and height between 300

and 500 dots is suitable.

143
Tutorial 6-4: Photo Stitch 2

Tutorial 6-4: Photo Stitch 2

We will create an embroidery pattern with [Photo Stitch 2] in a method different

than that used with [Photo Stitch 1]. Although this embroidery pattern will also
be created from a photo, this type of embroidery pattern contains repeating
zigzag stitches. This produces a more general rendering than with [Photo Stitch
1]; however, the data is created with wel -regulated stitching.

Step 1

Importing photo data into Layout & Editing

Step 2

Starting the Photo Stitch 2 wizard

Step 3

Applying an image mask and adjusting its size and position

Step 4

Changing the sewing angle

Step 1 Importing photo data into

Step 3 Applying an image mask

Layout & Editing

and adjusting its size and

position

Select the [Tutorial_6] folder, and then select

[girl2- face.bmp] as the image.

1 Click

to select the circle mask.

cc

"Importing image data into Layout &

Editing" on page 132

Drag handle to adjust the size of the mask,

Cr

and drag the mask to adjust its position.

eat

Click [Next].
ing Embr

oide

ry Pa

tte

rns

Step 2 Starting the Photo Stitch 2

Us

wizard

ing Ima

1 Click the [Image] tab.

cc

"Select Mask dialog box" on page 147

2 Click [Photo Stitch 2] in the [Stitch Wizard]

ge

group, and then click [Mono].

From this dialog box, the size and position of

the image can be adjusted. For this example,

we will simply continue to the next step.

Click [Next].
cc

"Check Mask Shape/Modify Image dialog

box" on page 148 and "Gray Balance /

Modify Image dialog box" on page 149

144
Tutorial 6-4: Photo Stitch 2

Step 4 Changing the sewing

angle

1 In the [Direction] box, type "45".

2 Click [Update Preview].

3 Click [Finish].

145
Photo Stitch 2 Features

Photo Stitch 2 Features

a Sewing Option

Photo Stitch 2 Parameters

dialog box

Line interval

Line interval

With Color

Lower value

Higher value

Max. Density

0°

45°

90°

Direction

Add mask

If this check box is selected, line data is

outline

created from the mask outline.

b Color Option

Cr

Color

ea

You can select the brand of thread

ti

Thread Chart

ng Embr

available in the [Color Set] selector.

With Mono

If [Auto Select] is selected, the most

appropriate four colors will automatically

be selected.

oide

Selecting a different option specifies the

four colors used when creating the

ry

embroidery pattern.

Pa

The color choices are: cyan (C),

Color Set

magenta (M), yel ow (Y), black (K), red

tte

(R), green (G) and blue (B). Select one

rns

of the following combinations that

Us

contains the colors most used in the

image.

ing Ima

Color combinations: CMYK, RGBK,

CRYK, BMYK

Thread

Displays the four selected thread colors.

ge

Colors Used
s

Under [Thread Colors Used], click a

color. Then, click [Change Color] to

Specify the desired settings under [Sewing Option]

display the [Thread Color] dialog box.

Change

Select the new color and click [OK].

a and [Color Option] b, and then click [Update

Color

The selected thread color will be applied

Preview] c to preview the effects of the specified

to the image shown in the preview

settings. Click [Finish] d to convert the image to

window.

an embroidery pattern.

Mono

Click on the [Change Color] button to

open the [Thread Color] dialog box if

Change
you wish to change the color of the

Color

photo stitching. Select the color and

click [OK] to make the color change.

Color/Mono

The top slider is used to adjust the

Brightness / brightness.

Contrast

The bottom slider is used to adjust the

contrast.

Update

Updates the previewed image after

Preview

settings have been changed.

146
Advanced Stitch Wizard Operations

Advanced Stitch Wizard Operations

Image To Stitch Wizard

Adjusting the Mask and

Image

Click
at the top of the window (in the [Quick

Access Toolbar]) to display the Startup Wizard,

and then click [Create Embroidery Patterns Using

■ Select Mask dialog box

Images]. If an image has been imported, the next

The [Select Mask] dialog box appears no matter

dialog box appears.

which conversion method was selected.

a Sample image before being converted

f
f

b Sample image of embroidery pattern

after being converted

a Mask shapes

The image will be masked with the

c Select the conversion method.

selected shape.

d Select to start up Design Center and

import the image into the Design Page.

b The mask can be reshaped or

repositioned. Select the tool appropriate

e Description of conversion method

for the operation to be performed.

f Click to continue to the next step.

: Drag the handles to enlarge/

reduce the mask. Drag the mask

to adjust its position.

If no image has been imported into the Design

: Points can be entered, moved and

Page, the [Open an image file] dialog box

deleted to create a mask with the

appears.

desired shape.

To add points, click the outline of

the mask. To move a point, select

the point, and then drag it. To

delete points, select the point, and

then press the <Delete> key.

With a small original image, it may not be possible

to reduce the size of the mask.

147
Advanced Stitch Wizard Operations

c If [Auto Generate] was clicked, an outline

• Move the [Original] – [Sharp] slider to

of mask was automatically detected from

adjust the sharpness of the image's

the image.

outlines. A setting more towards [Sharp]

The [Auto Generate] button is available

makes a more noticeable boundary

only with images that have a light-colored

between bright and dark areas.

background, like in this photo.

• Move the [Dark] – [Bright] slider to adjust

the brightness of the image.

• Move the [Low] – [High Contrast] slider to

adjust the contrast of the image.

f Clicking [Open Image] allows you

replace the image with a different one.

The [Open an image file] dialog box

appears. Select a file.

The next step differs depending on the color range

selected for the embroidery pattern.

■ Check Mask Shape/Modify Image C

dialog box

rea

If Color, Sepia or Gray was selected for [Photo

ti

A mask shape edited with

or
ng Embr

Stitch 1], [Photo Stitch 2] or Cross Stitch, or if

created by clicking [Auto Generate]

[Auto Punch] was selected:

wil be added at the top of the list. Then,

this mask shape can be selected the

The following dialog box appears.

next time a pattern is created using a

oide

Stitch Wizard. A maximum of five

shapes will be added, and they will be

ry

arranged in order of the most recently

Pa

used.

tte

These mask shapes appear no matter

which Image To Stitch function is

ns
selected.

Us

ing Ima

d Zoom

e Clicking the [Image Tune] button displays

ge

an [Image Tune] dialog box.

a Adjust the position and size of the image.

Drag the image to the desired position.

Drag the handle to adjust the image to the

desired size.

b Click [Design Settings] to change the

size of the Design Page. Specify the

settings in the [Design Settings] dialog

box.

cc

"Specifying the Design Page Settings" on

page 14

c Click [Fit to page] to adjust the image to

the size of the Design Page.

d Embroidery pattern size

148
Advanced Stitch Wizard Operations

■ Gray Balance / Modify Image

dialog box

Importing to Design Center

If [Mono] was selected for [Photo Stitch 1] or

We wil create embroidery data in Design Center by

[Photo Stitch 2]:

using an image that was opened in Layout & Editing.

The following dialog box appears.

1 Click the [Image] tab.

2 Click [Design Center] in the [Stitch Wizard]

group.

 Design Center starts up and the image

appears in the Design Page.

cc

"Basic Design Center Operations" on

page 211 and "Line Image Stage" on

d
e

page 224

a Adjust the position and size of the image.

Drag the image to the desired position.

Drag the handle to adjust the image to the

desired size.

b Click [Design Settings] to change the

size of the Design Page. Specify the

settings in the [Design Settings] dialog

box.

cc

"Specifying the Design Page Settings" on

page 14

c Click [Fit to page] to adjust the image to

the size of the Design Page.

d Embroidery pattern size

e Drag the slider to adjust the gray balance.

149
Importing Image Data

Importing Image Data

An imported image can be used with the Image To Stitch Wizard, as a template
for manual punching, or for printing onto iron-on transfer sheets or printable
fabric when using "Print and Stitch".

An image can be imported using any of the following four methods.

• From a file

• From the Clipboard

• From a scanner (TWAIN Device)

a
Only one image can be added to the work area. If you try to display a different
image, it wil replace the previous one.

■ Image file formats

3 Select the drive, the folder and the file. Click

Images in the following formats can be imported.

[Open].

- Windows bitmap (.bmp), Exif (.tif, .jpg), Windows

Metafile (.wmf), Portable Network Graphics

re

(.png), Encapsulated PostScript (.eps), GIF (.gif)

ating Embr

• Vector image data in the ".wmf" (Windows

Metafile), ".emf" (Enhanced Metafile) and ".svg"

oide

(Scalable Vector Graphics) file formats can be

converted to shape patterns as it is without

ry

some information not supported.

Pa
cc

"Importing vector images (WMF/EMF/SVG)"

tte

on page 93

rns

• If an EPS file doesn't contain a "Preview" image,

Us

it can not be displayed correctly. When you

create a file in EPS format, be sure to save it with

ing Ima

preview image.

ge

Importing image from a file

1 Click the [Image] tab.

2 Click [Open] in the [Image] group, and then

click [from File].

• If the [Preview] check box is selected, the

contents of the selected file will appear in the

[Preview] window.
• Various clip art images can be found in the

[ClipArt] folder (in the folder where PE-DESIGN

was installed) at:

C:\Program Files (x86)\Brother\PE-DESIGN 10

\ClipArt

150
Importing Image Data

4 From the [Sources] list, click the desired

Importing image from the

device to select it. Click [Select].

clipboard

1 Click the [Image] tab.

2 Click [Open] in the [Image] group, and then

click [From Clipboard].

If no TWAIN device is installed, there will be no

names displayed in the [Sources] list. First, install

the driver software for the TWAIN device.

5 Click the [Image] tab.

 The image on the clipboard is imported into

6 Click [Open] in the [Image] group, and then

the Design Page.

click [From TWAIN Device].

This can only be done when there is image data on

the Clipboard.

Importing image from a

scanner (TWAIN Device)

 The driver interface for the device selected

in the Select Source dialog box appears.

TWAIN is an application interface (API)

standardization for software that controls scanners

7 Specify the necessary settings for importing

and other devices.

an image, and then import the image.

1
a

Check that the scanner or other TWAIN

device is correctly connected to your

For information on using the driver interface, refer

to the help manual for that interface, or contact the

computer.

manufacturer of the interface.

2 Click the [Image] tab.

 The imported image will be pasted into the

Click [Open] in the [Image] group, and then

Design Page at its original size.

click [Select TWAIN device].

151
Changing the Image Settings

Changing the Image Settings

Adjusting the density of

Changing the size, angle

the background image

and position of the image

1 Click the [Image] tab.

■ Selecting an image

2 Drag the slider, or click or in the

1 Click the [Image] tab.

[Image] group.

2 Click [Modify Image] in the [Image] group.

 The image is selected and appears as

shown below.

Cre

Hide (off) 50% 100%

ting Embr

25%

75%

oide

Press the shortcut key <F6> to switch between

displaying the image (On (100%)) to displaying it

ry

faded at each density (75%, 50% and 25%) to

2

Pa

hiding the image (Off).

tte

rns

Us

1 Handle

ing Ima

2 Red line

ge

The status bar shows the dimensions (width and

height) of the image.

■ Moving an image

Drag the selected image to the desired location.

■ Scaling an image

Drag the handle to adjust the image to the desired

size.

If the <Shift> key is held down while a handle is

dragged, the image is enlarged or reduced from

the center of the image.

152
Changing the Image Settings

■ Rotating an image

Saving the image data

An image can be rotated in 90° increments.

1 Click the [Image] tab.

■ Saving as a file

2 Click [Rotate Right] or [Rotate Left] in the

1 Click the [Image] tab.

[Edit] group.

2 Click [Save] in the [Image] group, and then

click [to File].

Rotate Right

3 Select the drive, the folder and the format.

Type in file name. Click [Save].

Rotate Left

■ Deleting an image

1 Click the [Image] tab.

2 Click [Delete] in the [Edit] group.

The image data can be saved in either of the

following formats: Windows bitmap (.bmp), Exif

(.jpg).

An image can also be deleted by selecting it, then

■ Outputting to the Clipboard

pressing the <Delete> key.

1 Click the [Image] tab.

cc

"Changing the size, angle and position of

the image" on page 152

2 Click [Save] in the [Image] group, and then

click [to Clipboard].

153
Tutorial 7: Print and Stitch

Tutorial 7: Print and Stitch

In this example, we wil create a design that combines embroidery and an image.

Print the background image on fabric.

Embroider

The sample file for this tutorial is located at Documents (My documents)\PE-
DESIGN 10\Tutorial\Tutorial_7.

Step 1

Creating a design combined with a background image

Step 2

Printing the background image

rea

Step 3

Printing the positioning sheet

ting Embr

Step 4

Embroidering

4 Import the file [Bear_Background.jpg].

Step 1 Creating a design

oide

Select the file Bear_Background.jpg in the

combined with a

folder [Documents (My documents)\PE-

background image

ry

DESIGN 10\Tutorial\Tutorial_7].

Pa

For this example, we will use the gift box image

tte

(Bear_Background.jpg) and the embroidery pattern

of the bear (tutorial_7_Bear.pes).

rns
Us

1 Start up Layout & Editing.

ing Ima

Specify a Design Page size of 130 × 180 mm.

cc

"Specifying the Design Page Settings" on

page 14

ge

2 Click the [Image] tab.

3 Click [Open] in the [Image] group, and then

cc

"Importing Image Data" on page 150.

click [from File].

5 Display the [Import] pane.

154
Tutorial 7: Print and Stitch

6 Import the file [tutorial_7_Bear.pes].

8 Transform the text to fit with the design of the

Select [Tutorial] from the [From] selector and

image.

[Tutorial_07] from the [Category] selector.

a Click [Text Attributes] tab.

Drag [tutorial_7_Bear.pes] to the Design

b Select the [Transform] check box, and

Page.

then click

cc

"Importing embroidery designs" on

page 91

7 Enter the text.

Select built-in font [No. 30], and thread color

[DEEP ROSE].

Type in "Happy Birthday!".

c Drag the rotation handle to adjust the

angle of the pattern.

c
d

d Drag

or a handle to adjust the size of

the pattern.

cc

"Transforming text" on page 111 and

"Rotating patterns" on page 33

cc

"Entering text" on page 106

9 After the design is finished, save the

embroidery data onto media so it can be

transferred to the embroidery machine.

cc

For details on saving embroidery

patterns, refer to "Saving" on page 95.

For details on transferring designs to an

embroidery machine, refer to

"Transferring Embroidery Designs to

Machines" on page 201.

155
Tutorial 7: Print and Stitch

e To print a flipped image on an iron-on

Step 2 Printing the background

transfer sheet, select the [Print a flipped

image

image] check box.

Some printers will automatical y print an

Print the background image on an iron-on transfer

image flipped if an iron-on transfer sheet

sheet or printable fabric.

is selected as the paper. If this type of

printer is being used, clear the [Print a

Click ,

then

[Print], then [Print Setup].

flipped image] check box.

For details, refer to the instructions for the

printer being used.

3 Click [Change Position].

4 Check the image position.

2 Specify the print settings.

Creati

ng Embr

oide

ry Pa
If any part of the image extends out of the print

tte

area, drag the image to adjust its position.

rns

Us

5 Click [OK].

ing Ima

6 Click [Print].

ge

To check the print image, click [Print Preview].

a Select the printer to be used.

b Under [Paper] and [Orientation], select

the appropriate settings for the iron-on

transfer sheet or printable fabric to be

printed on.

c Select [Image print mode].

d Select [Print the image on printable

fabric or an iron-on transfer sheet].

156
Tutorial 7: Print and Stitch

7 Specify the appropriate settings in the [Print

b Select [Print a sheet of paper for

Setup] dialog box, and then click [OK].

aligning the printed image and the

embroidery].

cc

"Printing" on page 96.

Printing begins.

Click [Print].
3 Specify the appropriate settings in the [Print

Setup] dialog box, and then click [OK].

cc

"Printing" on page 96.

 Printing begins.

For details on printing on iron-on transfer sheets or

printable fabric, refer to the instructions for the

iron-on transfer sheets and printable fabric.

To check the print image, click [Print Preview].

Step 3 Printing the positioning

sheet

Step 4 Embroidering

Print a sheet for aligning the image and the

embroidery.

1 If an iron-on transfer sheet is used, transfer

the image onto fabric.

Specify the print settings.

b
For details on transferring from iron-on transfer

sheets, refer to the instructions for the iron-on

transfer sheets.

2 Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame.

a Under [Paper] and [Orientation], select

the appropriate settings for the paper to

be printed on.

157
Tutorial 7: Print and Stitch

3 Place the positioning sheet on the fabric to be

embroidered so that it is aligned with the

printed image.

• For details on using the embroidery machine,

refer to the Operation Manual included with the

machine.

• Some patterns of completed samples for "Print

and Stitch" are provided in the following folder.

Documents (My documents)\PE-DESIGN 10\

Sample\Layout & Editing\Print and Stitch

• If the positioning sheet is too large, cut it to

an appropriate size so it can easily be used

for aligning the positions.

• Tape the positioning sheet to the fabric to

rea

secure it in place.

ting Embr

4 Attach the embroidery frame to the

embroidery machine.

Be sure that the positioning sheet does not

oide

move out of place.

ry

5 Align the needle with the mark at the center of

Pa

the positioning sheet.

tte

• If the embroidery machine has a built-in

rns

camera, press the start positioning button

Us

to detect the positioning mark and

automatically align the embroidering

ing Ima

position.

• With other embroidery machines, manually

ge

align the positions.

6 After positioning is finished, remove the

positioning sheet from the fabric.

7 Start the embroidery machine to embroider

the pattern.

158

Tutorial 7: Print and Stitch

159

Operations for Specific Applications

This section describes operations for creating

embroidery patterns using manual punching and

for specific applications such as appliqués,

embroidered patches and large-sized embroidery

patterns.
Tutorial 8-1: Creating Appliqués

Tutorial 8-1: Creating Appliqués

The Applique Wizard provides instructions for easily creating appliqués. For this
example, we wil create an appliqué that has holes (empty regions).

Finish

The sample file for this tutorial is located at Documents (My documents)\PE-
DESIGN 10\Tutorial\Tutorial_8.

Step 1

Creating an appliqué pattern

Step 2

Using the Applique Wizard

5 Select the two patterns, click [Modify

Overlap] in the [Edit] group, and then select

[Set hole sewing] to apply hole sewing.

The Applique Wizard cannot be used if a pattern

containing text with the [Name Drop] attribute

applied is selected.
Step 1 Creating an appliqué

pattern

1 Click the [Home] tab.

2 Click [Shapes] in the [Tools] group, and then

cc

"Hole sewing" on page 39

click .

Step 2 Using the Applique Wizard

1 Select the outer pattern, and then click

[Applique Wizard] in [Home] tab to start the

[Applique Wizard] dialog box.

Be sure to select the outer pattern before starting

3 Drag the pointer in the Design Page to draw a

the [Applique Wizard].

circle.

4 Select as described in steps 1 and 2, and

then drag the pointer in the Design Page to

draw a heart on top of the circle.

161
Tutorial 8-1: Creating Appliqués

2 Specify settings in the [Applique Wizard]

Running Stitch

dialog box in the following order a - f.

Select this setting to sew the

cutting line, then cut along

the cutting line with scissors.

Cutting

In order for this setting to be

available

cc

"Basic requirements for

a Applique Material

Cutwork functions" on

page 173

b Applique Position

Select this setting to cut the

c Tack down

fabric with a machine

d Covering Stitch

er

installed with cutwork

at

e Output Pattern

needles.

io

f Create an applique with hole sewing

4 [Applique Position] is specified

sf

This check box appears when using a

automatically.

pattern with hole sewing applied and

rS

[Replace] is selected under [Output

 The guideline for attaching the appliqué

Pattern].

piece is set to be sewn automatically.

eci

fi

5 Specify basting of the appliqué in [Tack

c Ap

down].

To return all parameters to their default settings,

The appliqué piece can be basted onto the

click [Default].

lic

base fabric. Select one of three stitches.

atio

 For this example, select [Yes] then [V

3 Specify cutting lines for the appliqué in

Stitch].
s

[Applique Material].

The outline of the appliqué can be sewn as

running stitches or the appliqué can be cut out,

or it can be neither sewn nor cut out.

Satin Stitch

E Stitch

V Stitch

 For this example, select [Yes] then

[Cutting].

162
Tutorial 8-1: Creating Appliqués

6 Specify the stitching for securing the appliqué

7 Under [Output Pattern], select whether

in [Covering Stitch]. Select the sew type and

covering stitches will be added around the

other attributes ([Width] and [Density]) for

entire pattern ([Add]) or covering stitches wil

finishing the appliqué.

be sewn for shape lines ([Replace]).

 For this example, select "Satin Stitch", and

 For this example, select [Replace].

then set [Width] to "3.0 mm" and [Density]

to "5.0 line/mm".

Add

Settings can be

Satin Stitch

specified for

Settings can be

[Distance from

specified for [Width]

original Pattern].

and [Density].

Replace

E Stitch

Settings can be

specified for
[Stroke], [Interval]

and [Pitch].

8 Specify hole sewing in [Create an applique

with hole sewing].

V Stitch

Settings can be

specified for

[Stroke], [Interval]

and [Pitch].

cc

For details on setting [Stroke], [Interval]

Select this check box when creating an

and [Pitch], refer to "E/V Stitch" on

appliqué with holes (empty regions).

page 328

 For this example, select this check box.

This check box appears when only the outer

pattern with hole sewing applied or only a text

pattern (with fonts other than built-in fonts 025 and

029, a user-defined font or a Small Text font) is

selected, or when [Replace] is selected under

[Output Pattern].

* Multiple text patterns can be selected if certain

conditions are met.

163
Tutorial 8-1: Creating Appliqués

■ About the Output Pattern settings

Add

The shape of the appliqué material appears as

• Covering stitches will be created around the

shown below, depending on whether the [Create

original pattern.

an applique with hole sewing] check box is

selected or not.

• Under [Distance from original Pattern], specify

the distance of the covering stitches from the

When the [Create an applique

original pattern.

with hole sewing] check box is

cleared
When the [Create an applique

with hole sewing] check box is

selected

9 Click [OK] to exit the Applique Wizard dialog

box.

• This can be used to combine various patterns.

Operations f

or S

The [Add] setting is not available if the stitch

pattern does not exist, for example, when both the

peci

line and region sew types are set to [Not Sewn].

fic Ap

Replace

lic

When [Cutting] is selected under [Applique

at

• Covering stitches will be sewn for outlines in the

Material]:

io

original pattern.

• Uncut sections wil remain in cutting lines

• The original pattern will be deleted.

specified with the Applique Wizard. Be sure to

cut them with scissors after embroidering is

• Shape and text patterns can be used as the

finished.

original pattern. However, the following patterns

cannot be used.

- Open lines

- Closed lines that are intersecting

- Text created with built-in fonts 025 and 029,

an user-defined font or a Small Text font

- Original patterns containing both a shape

pattern and a text pattern

164
Tutorial 8-1: Creating Appliqués

When multiple patterns are selected, covering

stitches will be created as shown below.

• If the patterns do not overlap

Covering stitches wil be created for each

pattern.

[Add]

[Replace]

• If the patterns overlap

With the [Add] setting, covering stitches will be

created for an outline around all patterns.

[Add]

[Replace]

165
Tutorial 8-2: Creating Embroidered Patches

Tutorial 8-2: Creating Embroidered

Patches

The Embroidered Patch Wizard provides instructions for easily creating

embroidered patches.
Op

The sample file for this tutorial is located at Documents (My documents)\PE-
DESIGN 10\Tutorial\Tutorial_8.

eration

Step 1

Creating the patch pattern

sf

Step 2

Using the Embroidered Patch Wizard

or S

4 Drag each pattern to arrange them so that

eci

they are well balanced.

fi

The Embroidered Patch Wizard cannot be used if

c Ap

a pattern containing text with the [Name Drop]

attribute applied is selected.

plic
atio

Step 1 Creating the patch pattern

ns

1 Select the appropriate [Shapes] tool, and

then draw a heart.

cc

"Drawing various shape" on page 62.

2 Import the fish pattern from the [Aquatic]

category of the Design Library.

cc

"From Design Library" on page 91.

3 Select the [Text] tool, and then type in "I",

"Fresh" and "Fish".

cc

"Entering text" on page 106.

166
Tutorial 8-2: Creating Embroidered Patches
Step 2 Using the Embroidered

Patch Wizard

• [Width], [Density] and [Distance from original

1 Select all patterns, and then click the [Home]

Pattern] will be available if [Yes] has been

selected.

tab.

• Use [Distance from original Pattern] to specify

2 Click [Embroidered Patch] in the [Cut and

the distance between the original pattern and

the border.

Sew] group to start the [Embroidered Patch

Wizard].

5 Under [Cutting Line], specify the cutting lines

for the embroidered patch.

The cutting line of the embroidered patch can

be sewn as running stitches or the

embroidered patch can be cut out.

 For this example, select [Running Stitch],

Specify settings in the [Embroidered Patch

and then set [Distance from satin stitch]

Wizard] dialog box in the following order a -

to "3.0 mm".

b.

Running Stitch

Select this setting to sew the

cutting line, then cut along

the cutting line with scissors.

Cutting

In order for this setting to be

available

cc

"Basic requirements for

Cutwork functions" on

page 173

Select this setting to cut the

fabric with a machine

a Satin Stitch
instal ed with cutwork

b Cutting Line

needles.

6 Click [OK] to exit the [Embroidered Patch

Wizard] dialog box.

To return all parameters in the [Embroidered

Patch Wizard] to their default settings, click

[Default].

• When [Cutting] is selected under [Cutting

Line], uncut sections will remain in the cutting

lines created with the Embroidered Patch

Under [Satin Stitch], specify a border for the

Wizard. Be sure to cut them with scissors after

embroidered patch.

embroidering is finished.

 For this example, select [Yes], and then set

• The thread color of the satin stitching is the color

[Width] to "3.0 mm", [Density] to "4.5 line/

currently specified in the Design Page.

mm" and [Distance from original Pattern]

to "5.0 mm".

167
Tutorial 8-2: Creating Embroidered Patches

When [Satin Stitch] is set to [No]

Practical use of Satin

The distance between the patch pattern and the

Stitch and Cutting Line

cutting line is specified under [Distance from

original Pattern].

When [Satin Stitch] is set to [Yes]

The distance between the patch pattern and the

satin stitches is specified under [Distance from

original Pattern], and the distance between the

satin stitches and the cutting line is specified under

[Distance from satin stitch].

1 Patch pattern

2 Cutting Line

If multiple patterns are selected for the patch

pattern, the finished result differs depending on the

Op

distances between the patterns and between the

er

1 Patch pattern

patterns and cutting line.

at

2 Satin Stitch

io
3 Cutting Line

ns f

or S

If multiple patterns are selected for the patch

pattern, the finished result differs depending on the

peci

distances between the patterns as well as between

the patterns, satin stitches and cutting line in

ic Ap

addition to the width of the satin stitches.

plic

ations

168
Tutorial 8-3: Creating a Cutwork Pattern Filled with Net Stitching

Tutorial 8-3: Creating a Cutwork Pattern

Filled with Net Stitching

Cutwork patterns, combining embroidery and cutting with cutwork needles, can
be created using the extended functions. By using the [Cutwork Wizard], a
cutwork pattern can easily be created.

Finish

The sample file for this tutorial is located at Documents (My documents)\PE-
DESIGN 10\Tutorial\Tutorial_8.

Step 1

Creating an outline shape for cutwork

Step 2

Using the Cutwork Wizard

For the cutwork functions to be available, click

2 Select [Outline Shapes] from the [From]

then [Design Settings]. Under [Machine Type],

selector, select [Leaves] from the [Category]

selector, select [OL_clover01.pes], and then

select .

click [Import].

When the cutwork functions are not being used, it is

not necessary to select this setting.

cc

"Specifying the Design Page Settings" on

page 14

Step 1 Creating an outline shape

for cutwork

1 Display the [Import] pane.

Patterns in [Outline Shapes] from the [From]

selector are appropriate for creating the cutwork

patterns.

169
Tutorial 8-3: Creating a Cutwork Pattern Filled with Net Stitching

3 Enlarge the pattern imported into the Design

Page.

4 Ungroup the pattern. Select the pattern,

• The [Cutwork Wizard] can also be used if

closed shape patterns or text patterns are

right-click it, and then click [Ungroup].

selected.

• If a line of the pattern crosses itself, the

[Cutwork Wizard] will not be available.

• Text with built-in font 025 or 029 or a user-

defined font cannot be used.

• Shape patterns and text patterns cannot be

combined.

3 Specify settings in the [Cutwork Wizard] in

the following order a - e.

Operations f

or S

peci

a Stabilize Cut Edge

fic Ap

Step 2 Using the Cutwork Wizard

b Cutting Line
p

1 Select the four leaves, and then click the

c Secure Water-Soluble Stabilizer

lic

d Net Fill

at

[Home] tab.

io

e Covering Satin Stitch

2 Click [Cutwork Wizard] in the [Cut and Sew]

group to start the [Cutwork Wizard].

To return all parameters to their default settings,

click [Default].

4 Specify running stitching along the edge

before cutting in [Stabilize Cut Edge].

By specifying that running stitches be sewn

before the fabric is cut, the cut edges are

reinforced, preventing them from unraveling.

 For this example, select [Yes].

170
Tutorial 8-3: Creating a Cutwork Pattern Filled with Net Stitching

5 Specify cutting line type in [Cutting Line].

7 Specify net fill stitching inside the cutout areas

Select whether the fabric wil be cut along the

in [Net Fill].

cutting line or whether the cutting line will

By sewing net fill stitching in cutouts, inner

remain as running stitches.

cutouts can be reinforced while allowing for a

 For this example, select [Cutting].

greater design variety.

 For this example, select [Yes].

Cutting
In order for this setting

to be available

cc

"Basic

requirements for

Cutwork

functions" on

page 173

Select this setting to

cut the fabric with a

Select the parameters according to the

machine installed with

cutwork needles.

procedure from step 8 to 10, when [Net Fill]

is set to [Yes].

Running Stitch

Select this setting to

8 Specify the net fill stitch pattern in [Pattern].

sew the cutting line,

Five net fill stitch patterns are available.

then cut along the

cutting line with

 For this example, select [Pattern 2].

scissors.

6 Specify securing of the water-soluble

stabilizer in [Secure Water-Soluble

Stabilizer].

Running stitches will be sewn to secure the

water-soluble stabilizer after the fabric has

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

been cut. In order to prevent embroidery from

losing its shape after it has been cut, place

water-soluble stabilizer in the cutout areas

and sew it in place.

 For this example, select [Yes].

Pattern 3

Pattern 4

Pattern 5

171
Tutorial 8-3: Creating a Cutwork Pattern Filled with Net Stitching

9 Specify the pattern spacing for the net fill stitch

13 Specify the density of the satin stitching in

in [Spacing].

[Density].

 For this example, set it to [3.0 mm].

 For this example, set it to [6.5 line/mm].

2.0 mm

10.0 mm

5.0 line/mm

7.0 line/mm

10 Specify the pattern direction of the net fill stitch

14 Click [OK] to exit the [Cutwork Wizard].

in [Direction].

 For this example, set it to [0°].

Operatio

0°

90°

ns f

11 Specify satin stitching after cutting in

or S

[Covering Satin Stitch].

p
Satin stitching is sewn along the edges of

eci

inner cutouts.

fi

The zigzag stitch or the stem stitch is used as

c Ap

an underlay for the satin stitching.

 For this example, select [Yes].

lic

ations

Select the parameters according to the

procedure from step 12 to 13, when

[Covering Satin Stitch] is set to [Yes].

12 Specify the width of the satin stitching in

[Width].

 For this example, set it to [4.0 mm].

3.0 mm

6.0 mm

172
On Using the Cutwork Functions

On Using the Cutwork Functions

Before using Cutwork functions, check the following.

• Patterns when [Outline Shapes] is selected in

Basic requirements for

the [From] selector of the [Import] pane.

Cutwork functions

■ Set the "Machine Type" to multi-

needle embroidery machine

For the Cutwork functions to be available, click

then [Design Settings]. Under [Machine Type],

select .

■ Use a multi-needle machine that

has been upgraded to work with

Cutwork functions

■ Outline shapes and text can be

The embroidery machine should be set to cutwork

used to create a cutwork pattern

mode in the settings screen before starting to

embroider. Refer to the included Operation Manual

• Outline shapes that have been drawn with the

for the details of embroidery machine operation.

tools indicated below.

• Text created in fonts other than built-in fonts 025

and 029, a user-defined font or a small text font.

Cutwork functions cannot be used with single-

needle embroidery machines. In addition, some

multi-needle machines may not support the

functions. Be sure to check that your machine is

compatible with the cutwork functions.

173
On Using the Cutwork Functions

Layout & Editing window for cutwork patterns

The settings and window areas specifically for cutwork functions are described
below.

perations f

or S

peci

ic Ap

plic

ation
1 Sewing Order

4 Previewing cutting lines

The cutting lines appear in one frame in the

In the [Stitch Simulator] pane, the cutwork

[Sewing Order] pane, and the icon for the

needles are displayed in four different shades of

cutwork needle appears beside the frame.

gray.

2 Design Page

The cutting lines appear as gray dotted lines in

the Design Page, regardless of whether the

[Solid View], [Stitch View] or [Realistic View]

is selected.

In a stitch simulation, the cutting lines appear as

3 Sewing Attributes

short gray lines, indicating the needle drop

In the [Sewing Attributes] pane, detailed

points for making the cuts.

cutting settings can be specified for the cutwork

functions.

cc

"Cutting" in the "Line sewing attributes"

on page 329

While being edited

In a stitch simulation

174
On Using the Cutwork Functions

5 Checking Design Property

When [Cutting] has been assigned to a line

Transferring/saving/

from the [Line sew type] selector, [Design

exporting the cutwork

Property] screen appears as shown below.

patterns

In addition to transferring cutwork patterns to a

machine, they can be saved or printed.

■ Transferring

Transferring using USB media

By using commercially available USB media,

cutwork patterns can be transferred to embroidery

machines compatible with the USB media.

cc

"Transferring to a machine by using USB

media" on page 201

Transferring directly to a machine's

memory
[Color order] can be also viewed in the [Design

Cutwork patterns can be transferred to embroidery

Property] screen in the Design Database.

machines that can be connected to a computer

using a USB cable.

cc

"Transferring directly to a machine's

memory" on page 201

• In patterns with [Cutting] selected in the [Line

sew type] selector, the line color and region

sewing settings are not available.

• Cutwork patterns cannot be transferred to a

• Designs containing the line sew type [Cutting]

machine by using an original card or the Link

are saved as cutwork patterns.

function.

cc

"Transferring/saving/exporting the cutwork

• The cutwork patterns can be transferred to

patterns" on page 175

embroidery machine only after the upgrade for

• Created cutwork patterns can be used only with

cutwork has been installed and certified to the

embroidery machines upgraded for cutwork.

machine.

• With PE-DESIGN 10, the line sew type

[Cutting] changes to [Running Stitch] in the

following situations.

 When the [Machine Type] setting (on the

■ Saving

[Design Page] tab of the [Design Settings]

dialog box) is changed from a multi-needle

Saving cutwork patterns in the PES format

embroidery machine to a single-needle

For details, refer to "Saving and Printing" on

embroidery machine

page 95.

 When a cutwork pattern is imported while

[Machine Type] (on the [Design Page] tab) is

set to a single-needle embroidery machine

a

• Cutwork pattern cannot be transferred to a

Designs containing the line sew type [Cutting] are

machine by using an original card or the Link

saved as cutwork patterns.

function.

• Cutwork pattern cannot be created in Design

Center. To set the line sew type to [Cutting],

use Layout & Editing.

175

On Using the Cutwork Functions

■ Exporting

Exporting cutwork patterns in other

formats

Created cutwork patterns can be converted to other

formats (.dst, .hus, .exp, .pcs, .vip, .sew, .jef, .csd,

.xxx, and .shv) and outputted.

When exported as another format, the cutting lines

will be changed to a running stitch.

Operations f

or S
peci

fic Ap

plic

ations

176
Tutorial 9-1: Creating Split Embroidery Designs

Tutorial 9-1: Creating Split Embroidery

Designs

Layout & Editing has a function for creating split embroidery designs when the
embroidery pattern being created is larger than the embroidery hoop.

The sample file for this tutorial is located at Documents (My documents)\PE-
DESIGN 10\Tutorial\Tutorial_9.

Step 1

Specifying the Design Page size in Layout & Editing

Step 2
Creating the embroidery design

Step 3

Checking the embroidering order

Step 4

Attaching stabilizer to the fabric

Step 5

Using the Positioning Sheet, mark the embroidering position on the fabric

Step 6

Hooping the fabric

Step 7

Embroidering

b Select [Custom Size], and then type or

Step 1 Specifying the Design

select the desired width and height for the

Page size in Layout &

Design Page. This setting is to specify the

Editing

exact width and height of a design. For

this example, set width to 230 mm and

1 Click ,

then
[Design Settings].

height to 330 mm.

c Click the [Section Size (for Hoop Size)]

selector, and then select the size of the

sections (your embroidery hoop). For this

example, select 120 × 170 mm

(130 × 180 mm).

• With the [Section Size (for Hoop Size)] setting,

the width and height of the sections are 10mm

smaller than the actual hoop size in order to

provide space for fine positioning adjustments

with adjustment sections. The 10mm is for

overlapping.

• It is not necessary for the [Section Size (for

Specify the Design Page size and the size of

Hoop Size)] to match the Design Page size.

the design sections.

Select the hoop size to be used for sewing.

3 Click [OK].
a

a Select the type of embroidery machine to

be used.

177
Tutorial 9-1: Creating Split Embroidery Designs

Step 2 Creating the embroidery

Step 3 Checking the

design

embroidering order

For this example, we will use one of the lace

Check the sewing order to see the order that the

embroidery patterns provided with the software.

design sections wil be sewn and determine which

parts of the fabric should be hooped.

Display the [Import] pane.

The design sections are sewn in order from left to

right, top to bottom.

Select [Tutorial] from the [From] selector and

[Tutorial_9] from the [Category] selector.

1 Click ,

then

[Design Property].

Click [tutorial_9-1.pes], then [Import].

Operations f

or S

2 Uncheck the [Show about selected

Object(s)] to view the separate design

eci

sections. Click on [Next] and [Previous] to

fi

move back and forth through each section.

c Ap

Check the design, and then click [Cancel].

cc

"Importing embroidery designs" on

plic

page 91.

ations

Before an embroidery pattern created in a custom

Design Page is saved, running stitches are added

at the edges of the design sections so that the

design sections can easily be aligned during

sewing. This alignment stitching appears in the

[NOT DEFINED] color and cannot be edited.

cc

Memo of "Step 7 Embroidering" on page181

178

Tutorial 9-1: Creating Split Embroidery Designs

1 Punch a hole at the end of each arrow on the

Step 4 Attaching stabilizer to the

positioning sheet.

fabric

Stabilizer must always be used when embroidering

to stabilize the fabric. There are many types of

stabilizer; the type that you will use depends on the

type of fabric that you are embroidering on. For

large-size designs that are split into sections, the

stabilizer must be adhered to the fabric, for

example, iron-on stabilizer. In some cases, you may

need to use two pieces of stabilizer for your

2 Place the positioning sheet on the fabric, and

embroidery.

then insert the tip of a marking pen into each

When using spray adhesive, spray the adhesive

hole to mark the fabric.

onto a hooped piece of stabilizer that is strong

enough for the entire large-size embroidery. In

some cases, you may need to use two pieces of

stabilizer for your embroidery.

a
• For best results, attach the stabilizer to the fabric

(as described on this page). Without the correct

stabilizer, the design may become misaligned

3 Connect the points marked on the fabric to

due to puckering in the fabric.

draw reference lines.

• Be sure to check the recommendations on the

stabilizer package.

Step 5 Using the Positioning

Sheet, mark the

embroidering position on

the fabric

4 Place the positioning sheet on the fabric, and

mark points A, B, C and D.

• The positioning sheets are included in the

package.

• The Positioning Sheets are also in the

[Positioning Sheet] folder and can be printed

out with a printer.

• Location of the Positioning Sheets: C:\Program

Files (x86)\Brother\PE-DESIGN 10\Positioning

5 To mark an area to the right of the previously

Sheet.

marked area, align points A and D on the

• The positioning sheets in the PDF files are at

positioning sheet with marks B and C on the

actual size. When printing the positioning sheet

fabric.

from the PDF file, be sure to print it at actual

size. Do not print while reducing or enlarging to

fit the paper size.

AB

DC

C
179

Tutorial 9-1: Creating Split Embroidery Designs

6 To mark an area below the previously marked

Step 6 Hooping the fabric

area, align points A and B on the positioning

sheet with marks C and D on the fabric.

1 Insert the embroidery sheet into the inner ring

of the embroidery hoop, and then place them

on top of the fabric with the centerline on the

embroidery sheet aligned with the reference

lines (drawn on the fabric) for the first pattern

section to be sewn.

7 Repeat steps 5 through 6 to reposition the

positioning sheet and draw the embroidering

position for each section of the embroidery

pattern.

2 Keeping the reference lines on the embroidery

sheet aligned with the reference lines for the

• The intersection of the horizontal and vertical

first pattern section, place the fabric and inner

er

line indicates the center of the embroidery hoop.

ring of the embroidery hoop into the outer ring

atio

• While carefully considering how the fabric will be

of the hoop, and then pull the fabric so that it

hooped, place the positioning sheet on the

is tight.

sf

fabric, and then draw lines to indicate the

o

embroidering position. In addition, because all

rS

embroidery areas are not drawn on the

positioning sheet for large embroidery hoops, be

eci

careful that the embroidery area does not extend

fi

from the marked area on the fabric as shown

c Ap

below.

plic

ations

3 Finish hooping the fabric, and then remove the

embroidery sheet.

180
Tutorial 9-1: Creating Split Embroidery Designs

5 Hoop the fabric for the next design section.

a
cc

"Hooping the fabric" on page 180

• Place the fabric and hoop on a level surface, and

then make sure that the inner ring is pressed in

wel enough that the top edge of the inner ring

aligns with the top edge of the outer ring.

When an embroidery design created in a custom

• If the embroidery sheet is not used, the marks on

Design Page is saved or transferred to an original

the embroidery hoop can be used to hoop the

card, alignment stitching (single lines of running

fabric vertically and horizontally.

stitches with the color [NOT DEFINED], with a

However, since the center point on some

pitch of 7.0 mm, and starting with fixed stitches

embroidery machines is off center, the

with a pitch of 0.3 mm) is added at the edges of the

embroidery sheet should be used for best

design sections. (The alignment stitching appears

results.
in the print preview and is printed in red.)

• Another way to hoop the fabric is to use sticky

Sample data for this tutorial

stabilizer that can be hooped separately, tear

away the protective paper, then carefully align

the fabric onto the sticky surface using the

1) Embroider the upper-left design section.

embroidery sheet as a guide.

 Alignment stitching is sewn below and on

• Tip: The sticky stabilizer should be removed

the right side of the embroidered design

right away after the embroidery design is

section.

finished.

• Tip: The fabric can be hooped more easily if

double-sided tape is affixed to the back of the

inner ring, which is placed on top of the fabric,

and then the fabric is clamped between the inner

ring and the outer ring.

Step 7 Embroidering

1
2) Hoop the fabric for the upper-right design

When large-size embroidery designs are

section with the left side of the hoop aligned on

transferred to the embroidery machine, the

the alignment stitching on the right side of the

patterns appear on the embroidery machine

design section sewn in step 1, and then

display as shown below. For this example,

embroider the design.

select the first embroidery pattern section

 Before the design section is embroidered,

(Aa).

alignment stitching is sewn on the left

side. Make sure that this alignment

stitching aligns with the alignment

stitching sewn in step 1. After the design

section is embroidered, alignment

stitching is sewn below the design

section.

If there is no stitching in section Aa, select the first

section that contains stitching. Click on

[Application] button, and then click [Design

Property] to check the embroidering order.

2 Attach the embroidery hoop to the embroidery

machine, and then using the machine's layout

adjusting functions, align the needle position

with the intersection of the lines drawn on the

fabric.

3 Embroider the selected pattern.

4 Remove the embroidery hoop from the

embroidery machine, and then remove the

fabric from the hoop.

181
Tutorial 9-1: Creating Split Embroidery Designs

3) Hoop the fabric for the lower-left design section

with the top of the hoop aligned on the

alignment stitching at the bottom of the design

section sewn in step 1, and then embroider the

design.

 Before the design section is embroidered,

alignment stitching is sewn at the top.

Make sure that this alignment stitching

aligns with the alignment stitching sewn in

step 1. After the design section is

embroidered, alignment stitching is sewn

on the right side of the design section.

Operat

4) Hoop the fabric for the lower-right design

io

section with the left side of the hoop aligned on

the alignment stitching on the right side of the

sf

design section sewn in step 3 and with the top

or S

of the hoop aligned on the alignment stitching at

the bottom of the design section sewn in step 2,

peci

and then embroider the design.

 Before the design section is embroidered,

ic Ap

alignment stitching is sewn on the left side

and at the top. Make sure that this

plic

alignment stitching aligns with the

at

alignment stitching sewn in step 3 and in

io

step 2.

ns

6 Continue hooping the fabric and embroidering

until the entire embroidery design is sewn.

182
Tutorial 9-2: Creating Design for Multi-Position Hoops

Tutorial 9-2: Creating Design for Multi-

Position Hoops

This program enables you to create multi-position designs that you can stitch in
any multi-position hoop attached to your embroidery machine.

b
c

ABC

Example of multi-position hoop: 100 × 172 mm hoop

Although the size of the design that can be embroidered using an multi-position
hoop is 130 × 180 mm (or 100

× 100 mm, depending on the sewing area of the embroidery machine), first
determine which of the three installation positions (indicated as a, b, and c in the
illustration above) the multi-position hoop will be installed at and determine the
orientation of the design.

When creating the design, each design section can only be as large as the sewing
area of the embroidery machine.

The sample file for this tutorial is located at Documents (My documents)\PE-
DESIGN 10\Tutorial\Tutorial_9.

Step 1

Selecting the Design Page size

Step 2

Creating the design

Step 3

Optimizing hoop changes

Step 4

Checking the pattern

Step 1 Selecting the Design Page

2 Select
under

[Machine Type], and

size

then select [Hoop Size] and choose a Design

Page size of 130 × 300 mm or 100 × 172 mm

1 Click ,

then

[Design Settings].

from the selector. Then, click [OK].

183
Tutorial 9-2: Creating Design for Multi-Position Hoops

• The size of one pattern must be no larger

than 100 × 100 mm (or 130 × 180 mm).

• Settings for multi-position hoops are indicated

• Each pattern must completely fit within a

by " ".

single area (a, b, or c).

• Choose the appropriate setting after checking

the size of the hoop available for your machine.

Step 2 Creating the design

1 The Design Page appears on the screen as

shown below.

2
b

Op

erat

ion

1: The position of this pattern is correct since it fits

sf

completely within area a.

or S

2: The position of this pattern is correct since it fits

completely within either area b or area c.

• Area a

eci

Embroidering area when the multi-position hoop

3: The size of this pattern is acceptable, but its

position must be corrected since it does not fit

is installed at the top installation position.

ic Ap

completely within any of the areas.

• Area b

(It will be necessary to correct the position in

Embroidering area when the multi-position hoop

order to fit in either b or c.)

lic

is installed at the middle installation position.

4: This pattern must be corrected since it is too

at

• Area c

large.

io

Embroidering area when the multi-position hoop

(It will be necessary to correct the position and

is installed at the bottom installation position.

size in order to fit in either a, b, or c.)

The dotted lines separate each area.

2 Create the design, making sure that it meets

the following conditions.

184
Tutorial 9-2: Creating Design for Multi-Position Hoops

Step 3 Optimizing hoop changes

1 Click ,

then

[Design Settings].

• A check mark appears when this function is

turned on; no check mark is displayed when this

function is turned off.

5

2 Click [Output] tab.

• When the Optimize hoop change function is

turned on, the sewing order that you have set is

Select the [Optimize the number of times to

optimized to reduce the number of times that the

change the hoop’s position] check box, and

hoop installation position is changed.

then click [OK].

For the example shown on this page, the sewing

order is: a (pattern 1)  b (pattern 2)  a

(patterns 3 & 5)  c (patterns 4 & 6)

If the Optimize hoop change function is turned

off, each pattern is sewn according to the sewing

order that you have set.

For the example shown on this page, the sewing

order is: a (pattern 1)  b (pattern 2)  a

(pattern 3)  c (pattern 4)  a (pattern 5)  c

(pattern 6)

Therefore, since the number of times for

changing the hoop installation position is not

optimized, it may be changed more often than if

it was optimized.

Since the pattern may not be sewn correctly or the

fabric may not feed evenly if the hoop installation

position is changed too often, we recommend

turning on the [Optimize hoop change] function.

Turning on this function wil change the sewing

order that you have set, therefore, check the

sewing order before you begin embroidering.

185
Tutorial 9-2: Creating Design for Multi-Position Hoops

■ Saving the design

Step 4 Checking the pattern

The entire design is saved as a single file (.pes).

1 Click ,

then

[Design Property].

If the file size or the number of color changes is

larger than the specified number, or if one of the

patterns does not completely fit within an

embroidery area, the error message appears.

■ Writing the design to an original

card

A design for a multi-position hoop is created by

considering the pattern in each hoop installation

position as one pattern, then combining them.

Therefore, when this type of design is written to an

2 Check the sewing order of each pattern and

original card, one multi-position hoop design is

saved as a combination of multiple patterns.

the number of times the hoop position wil be

er

changed.

ations f

rS
peci

: This pattern is sewn when the hoop is

fi

installed at the top installation position

c Ap

(position a).

: This pattern is sewn when the hoop is

lic

installed at the middle installation position

at

(position b).

ion

: This pattern is sewn when the hoop is

installed at the bottom instal ation position

(position c).

Only the patterns that would be sewn at the

Therefore, the frame installation position sewing

current position in the hoop installation order

order for the pattern shown above is b, a, then c.

appear in the Design Page, and the

embroidering area for the current hoop

position is outlined in red.

a The position in the hoop installation order

for the currently displayed pattern.

b To display information for patterns at

other positions in the hoop installation

order, click [Previous] or [Next].

If a pattern is larger than the embroidery area or if

a pattern is positioned so that it does not

completely fit within an embroidery area, the error

message appears. After the pattern causing the

error is displayed, select the pattern and change

its size or position.

186

Tutorial 9-2: Creating Design for Multi-Position Hoops

Notes on embroidering using the multi-

■ Printing a Design Page for a multi-

position hoop

position hoop
• Before embroidering your design, sew a trial

On the first page, a complete image of the Design

sample of the design on a scrap piece of fabric

Page is printed at actual size. (However, for a 130 ×

from your design, making sure to use the same

300 mm Design Page, a reduced image of the

needle and thread.

Design Page is printed.) On the following pages, an

• Be sure to affix stabilizer material to the back of

image of each design section and its sewing

the fabric and tightly stretch the fabric within the

information are printed in the sewing order.

hoop. When embroidering on thin or stretch

When [Actual Size] is selected:

fabrics, use two layers of stabilizer material. If no

An image of the pattern in each design section is

stabilizer material is used, the fabric may become

printed on a separate page as the corresponding

over-stretched or wrinkled or the embroidery may

sewing information.

not be sewn correctly.

When [Reduced Size] is selected:

cc

For more ways to stabilize large designs,

An image of the pattern in each design section is

refer to "Attaching stabilizer to the fabric"

printed on the same page as the corresponding

on page 179

sewing information.

• Use the zigzag stitch for sewing the outlines in

cc

"Printing" on page 96

order to prevent embroidering outside the

outlines.

• For patterns that require the hoop to be installed

at different installation positions, design the

embroidery pattern so that the various parts of

the pattern overlap in order to prevent

misalignment while embroidering.

1 Overlap

187
Tutorial 9-3: Embroidering With the Jumbo Frame

Tutorial 9-3: Embroidering With the

Jumbo Frame

This section describes the procedures for creating embroidery data and for
embroidering using the jumbo frame (frame size: 360 × 360 mm; with mounts
on both sides of the embroidery frame).

• If the jumbo frame was selected, the size of the Design

Page becomes 350 × 350 mm in order to create margins

that allow automatic positioning using the built-in camera.

• The jumbo frame described here was designed specifically

for our multi-needle embroidery machines equipped with a

built-in camera. It cannot be used with any other machine,

such as single-needle embroidery machines. Check the

Operation Manual provided with your multi-needle

embroidery machine to determine if it is compatible with the

jumbo frame.

Jumbo frame: 360 × 360 mm embroidery frame

Oper

atio

For details on embroidering using the camera and on affixing the embroidery
positioning stickers, refer to the n

Operation Manual provided with the embroidery machine.

sf

or S

The sample file for this tutorial is located at Documents (My documents)\PE-
DESIGN 10\Tutorial\Tutorial_9.

peci

Step 1

Selecting the Design Page size

fic Ap
Step 2

Creating the embroidery design

Step 3

Checking a divided pattern

plic

Step 4

Attaching stabilizer to the fabric

at

Step 5

Embroidering

ions

Step 1 Selecting the Design Page

2 Click

under

[Machine Type], select

size

360 × 360 mm (Jumbo Frame) from the

[Hoop Size] selector under [Page Size], and

1 Click ,

then

[Design Settings].
then click [OK].

188
Tutorial 9-3: Embroidering With the Jumbo Frame

2 Select [Tutorial] from the [From] selector and

[Tutorial_9] from the [Category] selector.

Click [tutorial_9-3.pes], then [Import].

Check the size of embroidery frames that can be

used with your machine before changing the

setting.

3 The Design Page appears on the screen as

shown below.

a
b

a Side 1 embroidering area

Area embroidered first

cc

"Importing embroidery designs" on

b Side 2 embroidering area

page 91.

Area embroidered second

The embroidery pattern is automatically

Step 3 Checking a divided

divided into the different areas.

pattern

Before starting to embroider, the divided embroidery

pattern can be checked. If a pattern that you do not

The embroidery pattern is split with a section

wish to be divided has been split onto Side 1 and

overlapping a and b.

Side 2, you can check the embroidery pattern, then

If the pattern arranged in this section uses satin

adjust it so it is not split.

stitches, the stitch may change when the pattern is

split. Therefore, we recommend shifting the

pattern or changing the sew type to fill stitches.

1 Click ,

then

[Design Property].

Step 2 Creating the embroidery

design

For this example, an embroidery pattern provided

with this software will be used in the procedure

described below.

1 Display the [Import] pane.

189
Tutorial 9-3: Embroidering With the Jumbo Frame

2 Click [Next] to view the next side of the

Step 4 Attaching stabilizer to the

embroidery design.

fabric
Always use stabilizer when embroidering.

For large designs split into sections, the stabilizer

must be attached to the fabric, for example, by using

iron-on stabilizer, self-adhesive stabilizer or spray

adhesive. Use stabilizer appropriate for the fabric.

In addition, be sure to use stabilizer that is strong

enough and large enough for the entire

embroidering area. You may need to attach two

layers if thin stabilizer is used.

cc

See more information about stabilizer,

"Step 4 Attaching stabilizer to the fabric"

on page179.

Step 5 Embroidering

Op

Embroider using the embroidery positioning stickers

er

included with the embroidery machine. These

atio

stickers are detected by the embroidery machine's

n

built-in camera to automatically position the fabric.

sf

To view the embroidery pattern of the separate

1 Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame.

rS

sides, uncheck the [Show about selected

Object(s)].

eci

fic Ap

plic

ations

■ Saving the design

2 Attach the embroidery frame to the

The entire design is saved as a single file (.pes).

embroidery machine.

cc

"Transferring to a machine by using USB

3 Select the pattern for side 1, and then start the

media" on page 201, and "Transferring

directly to a machine's memory" on

embroidery machine to embroider the side 1

page 201

embroidering area.

An embroidery design for the jumbo frame cannot

be transferred to the machine by using an original

card. Transfer these designs directly to the

machine's memory or to the machine by using

USB media.

190
Tutorial 9-3: Embroidering With the Jumbo Frame

4 When embroidering is finished, follow the

6 Follow the embroidery machine instructions to

instructions on the embroidery machine to

remove the embroidery positioning stickers.

affix embroidery positioning sticker on the

embroidering area.
7 Select the pattern for side 2, and then start the

embroidery machine to embroider the side 2

embroidering area.

An image of the needle location appears in the

screen with the positioning detection area framed

by a line.

Affix an embroidery positioning sticker so that it fits

within the line. For details, refer to the Operation

Manual for the machine.

 The embroidery machine's built-in camera

detects the embroidery positioning sticker.

5 After the sticker have been detected, remove

the embroidery frame, rotate it 180°, and then

re-attach it to the embroidery machine.

• For details on using the embroidery machine,

refer to the Operation Manual included with it.

• Carefully remove the embroidery frame and

reattach it correctly. If the embroidery frame is

not correctly attached or if there is slack in the

fabric, the embroidery pattern may become

misaligned.

■ Embroidery data for the jumbo

frame

• When the embroidery design is being saved in

[Layout & Editing], older file format versions are

not available.

In addition, the embroidery design is saved as

data specifically for our multi-needle embroidery

machines equipped with a built-in camera. It

cannot be sewn with any other machine.

• An embroidery pattern created in a Design Page

set to the jumbo frame size in [Design Center]

cannot be transferred directly to the machine.

Import the embroidery pattern into [Layout &

 The embroidery machine's built-in camera

Editing], and then transfer it to the embroidery

detects the embroidery positioning sticker

machine.

again.

191
Specifying/Saving Custom Sewing Attributes
Specifying/Saving Custom Sewing

Attributes

■ Deleting a group of settings from

Saving frequently used

the list

sewing attributes

1 In the [Load/Save Default Settings] dialog

Frequently used sewing attributes can be saved

box, select the group of settings to be deleted.

together, and recalled when specifying sewing

2 Click [Delete] to delete the selected group of

attributes.

settings from the list.

■ Saving the settings in a list

■ Recalling a group of settings from

1 Click the [Sewing Attributes] tab.

the list

cc

"Specifying sewing attributes" on

1 In the [Load/Save Default Settings] dialog

page 54
box, select the group of settings to be recalled.

2 If necessary, change the settings, and then

Op

click .

erat

3 Click [Save As].

ions f

or S

peci

fic Ap

a A group of settings that you have saved

will appear with "*" beside its name.

plic

b Sewing attributes appropriate for various

at

fabrics are already available. Select the

io

type of fabric to be embroidered to specify

n
4 Type in a name for the group of settings, and

the recommended settings for that fabric.

then click [OK] to register the group in a list.

2 Click [Load].

 The settings in the [Sewing Attribute

Setting] dialog box change to the saved

settings.

Editing user thread color

• The saved setting can also be used on a

lists

different computer. Simply copy [sastu.txt] from

[C:\Program Files (x86)\Brother\PE-DESIGN

If you have a list of thread colors that are frequently

10\Settings] on the original computer to the

used, they can be saved in a user thread chart.

Settings folder at the same path on the

destination computer.

1 Click [Option], then [Options].

• In Explore click on C:\Program Files

(x86)\Brother\PE-DESIGN 10\Settings. Single

left click on the Settings folder to view the

contents. Single right click on sastu.txt and

select copy from the menu. Paste to a USB

device and transfer to a different computer.

192
Specifying/Saving Custom Sewing Attributes
2 Click [Edit User Thread Chart].

■ Creating a new thread chart

1 Click [New Chart] a.

2 Type in the name of the chart, and then click

[OK].

3 A user thread chart can be saved, edited or

deleted.

defg

A saved thread chart can be selected from the

[User Thread Chart] selector and [Thread Chart]

selector.

■ Renaming a thread chart

1 From the [User Thread Chart] selector j,

select the chart.

2 Click [Rename Chart] b.

3 Type in the name of the chart, and then click

h
i

kl

[OK].

a Select an existing thread chart.

b Adds thread colors from a existing thread

chart.

c When editing or deleting a thread chart,

select the thread chart here before

performing the operation.

■ Deleting a chart

d Imports the thread chart.

1 From the [User Thread Chart] selector j,

e Deletes a thread chart.

select the chart.

f Creates a new thread chart.

2 Click [Delete Chart] c.

g Changes the thread chart name.

h Displays thread colors in existing thread

3 If a message appears, click [Yes].

chart.

i Deletes a thread color.

j Displays thread colors in the user thread

chart.

k Changes the order of the thread colors.

l Adds a new thread color.

m Edits a thread color.

193
Specifying/Saving Custom Sewing Attributes

■ Importing a thread chart

■ Adding a new item

1 Click [Import Chart] c.

1 Click [New Item] f.

2 Select the drive, the folder, and the btc, btc2 or

2 To create a new color, click [Mix].

csv file, and then click [Open].

3 Specify the color, and then click [OK] to add

the specified color to the [Edit Thread] dialog

box.

(a)

Files in the .btc, .btc2 or .csv format can be

imported.

per

cc

"User thread chart files" on page 195

atio

3 If a message appears, click [Yes].

ns f

■ Editing a chart

rS

1 From the [User Thread Chart] selector j,

eci

select the chart.

fic Ap

2 Continue with the appropriate procedure. To

save the changes, click [OK].

The color cannot be changed if the slider (a) is

lic

moved to the top of the scale.

at

■ Adding items from a thread chart

ions

1 From the [Thread Chart] selector h, select

4 If necessary, type in the code, brand and

the thread brand or a user thread chart.

description into the appropriate boxes.

If multiple user thread charts have been

created, thread colors can be selected from

different user thread charts.

Only numbers can be entered for the code.

2 From the list i, click the thread colors.

5 Click [OK] to add the new item to the user

thread chart k.

To add multiple items, hold down the <Shift> or

<Ctrl> keys while selecting thread colors.

An asterisk (*) appears in front of the index number

Click [Add] l.

for items created or edited by the user.

 The selected items are added to the list in

the user thread chart j.

194

Specifying/Saving Custom Sewing Attributes

■ Deleting items
1

From the list for the user thread chart k,

User thread chart files

select the item to be deleted.

Existing user thread charts can be imported, or

2 Click [Delete] m to delete the item from the

edited user thread charts can be used on a

user thread chart.

different computer.

• A newly created user thread chart is saved, in

■ Editing an item

the .btc2 format with the same name as the

An item registered in the list for a user thread chart

thread chart, at [C:\Program Files

(x86)\Brother\PE-DESIGN 10\MyChart].

can be edited to change the color or thread number.

• Existing user thread charts, created with the

1 From the list for the user thread chart k,

previous versions of the application such as PE-

select the item to be edited, and then click

DESIGN NEXT, can be used in PE-DESIGN 10.

[Edit Item]

Import the file "chart2.btc" from the following

g.

location;

2 Edit the item details in the same way as

[C:\Program Files (x86)\Brother\PE-DESIGN

NEXT\Color].

adding a new item.

• The file "chart1.btc" in the [Color] folder cannot

be imported.

• A user thread chart file in the .csv format can be

imported.

The .csv file should contain information for

Code, Brand, Description, R, G and B,

separated by commas with one color on each

line. The RGB values must be within 0-255.

Example: For a .csv file

As with newly added items, an asterisk (*) appears

100,MyBrand,Black,10,10,10
in front of the index number of edited items.

101,MyBrand,White,245,245,245

■ Changing the order of items

1 From the list for the user thread chart k,

select the item to be moved.

2 Click [Up] or [Down] e to change the order

of the item.

195

Specifying/Saving Custom Sewing Attributes

Thread colors in embroidery patterns created with

this application may appear differently on the

embroidery machine, depending on the model

used.

1. Embroidery machines without a function for

displaying thread colors

The specified thread color information cannot

be displayed at all.

2. Embroidery machines with a function for

displaying thread colors

Of the thread color information specified in the

embroidery pattern, only the thread color

names are displayed on the machine.

However, the names that are displayed are

limited to the machine's preset thread color

names. Therefore, the machine displays the

names of its preset thread colors that are

closest to the colors specified in the embroidery

pattern.

er

3. Embroidery machines with a thread color

at

index

ion

Some machines can display the thread

sf

information specified with this application.

However, for thread colors that have been

rS
edited or added by the user (thread colors with

an asterisk (*) at the left side), only the thread

eci

number is displayed.

fic Ap

plic

ations

196
Using Manual Punch Tool

Using Manual Punch Tool

By using the [Manual Punch] tools, you can create embroidery patterns whose
sewing direction lines can be manually adjusted.

Shapes drawn using the [Manual Punch] tools can be edited in the same way as
shapes drawn using the

[Shapes] tools.
2 First, select the [Manual Punch] tool. Click

Creating an original logo

the [Home] tab, click [Shapes], and then click

Using the [Manual Punch] tools, an embroidery

pattern can be created using an image of your logo

in the background.

1 Open an image of the logo to be used to

create the embroidery pattern.

cc

"Importing Image Data" on page 150

: Select this tool to create straight block

patterns (region sewing).

(Shortcut key: <Z> )

: Select this tool to create curved block

patterns (region sewing).

For this example, we wil create a pattern of the red

(Shortcut key: <X> )

design at the far left.

: Select this tool to create running

patterns (line sewing).

b

(Shortcut key: <V> )

A faded copy of the background image can be

displayed in the [Design Page].

: Select this tool to create feed patterns

cc

"Adjusting the density of the background

(jump stitches).

image" on page 152

(Shortcut key: <B> )

cc

"Jump Stitch and Jump Stitch Trimming"

on page 297

197
Using Manual Punch Tool

3 Click points 1 through 4, in order.

7 Click point 13, then point 14 (last point of

running stitching connecting the parts), and

then press the <Enter> key.

3
Specify the point so that it overlaps/connects

the part created in step 5.

13

14

To remove an entered point, right-click it or press

the <BackSpace> key.

4 Select the Curve tool.

8 Click

in the [Input] group of the

[Manual Punch] tab.

Op

Click

in the [Input] group of the

er

[Manual Punch] tab.

9 Click points 15 through 23, in order.

atio

Click point 24 (last point of the pattern part),

n
and then press the <Enter> key.

sf

Specify the point so that it overlaps/connects

rS

the part created in step 7.

peci

fi

5 Click points 5 through 11, in order.

c Ap

16

Click point 12 (last point of the pattern part),

and then press the <Enter> key.

15

18

lic

17

at

19

20
io

21

ns

23

22

24

10

10 Click

in the [Input] group of the

12

[Manual Punch] tab.

11

Instead of pressing the <Enter> key, the pattern

part can be completed by double-clicking.

6 Click
in the [Input] group of the

[Manual Punch] tab.

198
Using Manual Punch Tool

11 Click points 25 through 27, in order.

Click point 28 (last point of the pattern part),

and then press the <Enter> key.

Specify the point so that it overlaps/connects

the part created in step 9.

27

25

26

28

Image of finished logo

• If parts are connected to previous and following

ones, jump stitches will not be created in order

to automatically optimize entry and exit points.

We recommend checking stitching with the

Stitch Simulator before sewing.

cc

"Checking the stitching with the Stitch

Simulator" on page 80

• Manually adding or adjusting sewing direction

lines in shape patterns afterward allows you to

continue creating patterns using the same

Manual Punch tools.

cc

"Specifying the sewing direction" on page 51

199

Transferring Data

This section describes operations for transferring

embroidery designs to embroidery machines.

Transferring Embroidery Designs to Machines

Transferring Embroidery Designs to

Machines

The procedures for transferring the created embroidery pattern to an embroidery

machine differ depending on your embroidery machine model. For details, refer
to the Operation Manual provided with your embroidery machine.

4 After the data has been transferred, the

Transferring to a machine

message "Finished outputting data." appears,

indicating that the transfer is finished. Click

by using USB media

[OK], and then remove the USB media.

Designs can be transferred to

an embroidery machine

compatible with the USB Host

If multiple USB media are connected, specify

function.

where the data is to be transferred in the area

shown below.

The "PE-DESIGN Software Key" cannot be used

as USB media. Do not save embroidery files on

the "PE-DESIGN Software Key" for transferring.

1 Plug the USB media into the computer.

2 Click the [Home] tab.

Transferring directly to a

machine's memory

Click [Send] in the [Sew] group, click [Send

to USB Media], and then select the desired

Designs can be transferred to

drive.

embroidery machines that can

be connected to a computer

using a USB cable.

1 Connect the embroidery machine to the

computer.

2 Click the [Home] tab.

 Data transfer begins.

3 Click [Send] in the [Sew] group, click [Send

to Your Machine], and then select the

desired drive.

If there is already a file with the same name at the

destination, the following dialog box appears.

Select whether to overwrite the existing file, to stop

copying or to copy the file using a different name.

 Data transfer begins.

201
Transferring Embroidery Designs to Machines

Transferring to a machine

If there is already a file with the same name at the

by using an original card

destination, the following dialog box appears.

Select whether to overwrite the existing file, to stop

Designs can be transferred to

copying or to copy the file using a different name.

an embroidery machine

equipped with a card slot.

• Be sure that the hoop size of the design does not

exceed the hoop that will be used on the

embroidering machine.

• When writing to an original card that already

contains data, all data on the card wil be

deleted. Before writing to a card, save all

necessary data to a hard disk or other media,

4 After the data has been transferred, the

and check that no necessary data remains on

the card.

message "Finished outputting data." appears,

Tr

indicating that the transfer is finished. Click

cc

"From an original card" on page 92

an

[OK].

sf

• An embroidery design for the jumbo frame

er

cannot be transferred to the machine by using

rin

an original card. This size is designed

specifically for our multi-needle embroidery

g Da

• For details on transferring designs with this

machines equipped with a built-in camera.

method, refer to the Operation Manual provided

cc

"Tutorial 9-3: Embroidering With the Jumbo

with your embroidery machine.

• If multiple machines are connected, specify

Frame" on page 188

where the data is to be transferred in the area

shown below.

cc

For details on writing multiple embroidery

designs, refer to "Transferring

Embroidery Designs to Machines" on

page 246.

1 Plug the USB card writer module. Insert an

original card into the USB card writer module.

• If the connected embroidery machine has been

set to Link mode, the command [Send to Your

Machine], mentioned in this procedure, cannot

be selected. To select this command, return the

machine to normal mode.

2 Click the [Home] tab.

202
Transferring Embroidery Designs to Machines

3 Click [Send] in the [Sew] group, and then click

[Write to Card].

a
Transferring split embroidery designs

Embroidery patterns for the split patterns created

on the custom-sized Design Page are written to

cards split into their separate sections.

If the total size of the pattern exceeds the capacity

of the media or the machine's memory or if the

pattern is split into over 80 sections with a Design

Page size of 90 × 90 cm (35.4" × 35.4"), you will

need to split the pattern and write the separate

4 When the following message appears, click

sections onto several media.

[OK].

If all pattern sections cannot be saved with a single

operation, the [Select Hoop Sections] dialog box

appears. Select pattern sections until the media

becomes full.

 Data transfer begins. The following

message appears while the data is being

transferred.

The card capacity indicator at the top of the dialog

box shows the amount of space available on the

5

card (white) and the amount of space used by the

After the data has been transferred, the

pattern sections (blue).

following message appears, indicating that the

When a pattern section is selected, the total

transfer is finished. Click [OK].

amount of space used by the selected pattern

sections appears in blue. If the capacity is

exceeded, the entire card capacity indicator

appears in red. To deselect a pattern section, click

it again.

Click [Write] to write the selected pattern sections

to the media. (The [Write] button is available only

when a pattern section is selected and there is

sufficient space on the media for the selected

pattern sections.)

cc

For details on creating split embroidery

designs, refer to "Tutorial 9-1: Creating Split

Embroidery Designs" on page 177.

203

Using the Link Function to Embroider From the Computer

Using the Link Function to Embroider

From the Computer

Embroidery designs can be embroidered by transferring the embroidery data

from the

computer to one or more embroidery machines compatible with the Link

function. These

embroidery designs are embroidered after the data is sent from the computer to
the

embroidery machine in the same way that a document is printed after the data is
sent from a computer to a printer.

• The Link function can be used only with

• For details on connecting the machines to the

embroidery machines compatible with the

computer, refer to the Operation Manual

function; it cannot be used with other machines.

provided with your embroidery machine.

For details, refer to the Operation Manual

• If the machine is positioned far from the

provided with your embroidery machine.

computer, we recommend you to use a self-

• The Link function cannot be used with the

powered USB hub. Do not use USB extension

following embroidery designs.

cables or repeater cables.

 Size exceeds the area that can be

• Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable

Tr

embroidered with the machine

while the machine is turned on.

an

 Embroidery designs in a Design Page of a

• Select [Power Options] in [Control Panel], and

sf

custom size or for the jumbo frame

er

then set both [System standby] and [System

rin

 Patterns for the 240 × 360 mm hoop

hibernates] to [Never].

g
• Up to four embroidery machines can be

Da

connected using the Link function.

ta

1 Create an embroidery design in [Layout &

One or more embroidery machines can be

Editing].

connected to PC by using the Link function.

2 Set the embroidery machine in Link mode.

4 Click the [Home] tab.

• Turn on the Link function of the embroidery

machine, and then turn off the machine.

For details on setting the machine in Link mode,

refer to the Operation Manual provided with your

embroidery machine.

3 Use the USB cable included with the

embroidery machine to connect the machine

to the computer.

• Turn on the embroidery machine.

204
Using the Link Function to Embroider From the Computer

5 Click [Send] in the [Sew] group, and then click

6 After the design has been transferred, press

[Link].

the start/stop button on the embroidery

machine to begin embroidering.

The transferred data cannot be edited from the

embroidery machine. The received data can only

be embroidered. However, embroidering settings

can be specified.

When embroidering is started, the following appears

in the [Link] dialog box.

b
c Shows the status of the embroidery

a Transferred design

machine.

b Queue

Each status indication is described below

Displays the data before it is transferred

to the embroidery machine.

Status

Description

 When the machine is ready to start loading

Ready

Press the button on the

the data, data transfer begins. While the

embroidery machine (Start/Stop

data is being transferred, a message

button) to start sewing.

appears in the screen of the embroidery

machine, and the design moves to the

Waiting

If there is no data in the queue

transferred design area.

b, select [Link] as the

destination in the application,

and send data.

If this is the status even though

there is data in the queue b,

continue the operation by using

the machine's operation panel.

Sewing

The machine is sewing.

Paused

The machine has temporarily

been stopped.

If the data sent from [Layout & Editing] does not

Color

Change the thread spool on the

appear in the transferred design box, continue the

change

machine.

operation by using the machine's operation panel.

Check
Check the bobbin thread or the

thread

upper thread on the machine.

Check frame

Install a different embroidery

frame on the machine.

If you want to send more than one design to the

[Link] dialog, repeat step 4 for each design. The

Error

Check the details of the error

[Link] dialog will remain open while the selected

that occurred on the machine.

design from [Layout & Editing] will be sent to the

Link.

205
Using the Link Function to Embroider From the Computer

■ If multiple designs were sent to a

■ If multiple embroidery machines

single machine

are connected

Multiple embroidery designs can be embroidered

The [Distributor] dialog box appears, in addition

after being sent to the [Link] dialog box. In this case,

with the [Link] dialog box for each embroidery

the dialog box appears as shown below.

machine. The designs in the [Distributor] dialog will

all be selected. Specify which file is to be transferred

to which machine.
b

• Design Database is available to send multiple

designs at a time.

Distributor dialog box

cc

"Sending embroidery designs to machines by

using the Link function" on page 250

• With the [Name Drop] function, you can also

send multiple designs where only the text is

replaced.

cc

"Outputting patterns using text from the text

list" on page 128

abcd

f
ran

sferrin

a Selects all embroidery designs.

g Da

b Deselects the embroidery designs.

ta

c Deletes the selected embroidery design.

The following operations can be performed from this

(The design is deleted without being

dialog box.

moved to the <Recycle Bin> .)

a Moves the selected design(s) to the

beginning of the embroidering order.

b Moves the selected design(s) one

position forward in the embroidering

order.

• Sending a design to the Distributor dialog for

multiple machines.

c Moves the selected design(s) one

• For multiple designs to be sent, repeat Step 5

position backward in the embroidering

for each design.

order.

d Moves the selected design(s) to the end

of the embroidering order.

e Automatically adjusts the embroidering

order of the designs to reduce as much as

possible the number of thread color

changes.

f Deletes the selected design(s) from the

[Link] dialog box.

Before the message "The machine will move.

Keep your hands etc. away from the machine."

appears on the machine and [OK] is pressed, the

embroidering order of the designs, including the

first one, can be changed since the first design has

not yet been sent to the machine.

206
Using the Link Function to Embroider From the Computer

1 Select a machine in the [Machine Name] a

selector, select an embroidery file, and then

click [Send] b.

2 Repeat step 1 to move each design to the

Machine name

[Link] dialog box.

• The initial machine name is the machine's ID.

For details, refer to the Operation Manual

provided with your embroidery machine.

• The name of the machine can be changed.

For details, refer to "Changing the embroidery

machine name appearing with the Link function"

on page 208

 The embroidery designs are moved to the

[Link] dialog box.

207

Using the Link Function to Embroider From the Computer

■ Changing the embroidery

b
machine name appearing with the

• The embroidering order of designs in the queue

Link function

can be changed.

1 Click [Machine Name] in the [Option] menu

cc

For details, refer to "If multiple designs were

of the queue whose name is to be changed.

sent to a single machine" on page 206.

• If additional machines are connected while the

[Link] dialog box is displayed, corresponding

queues will appear. If a machine is

disconnected, the corresponding queue will

disappear.

• To display the [Property] dialog box for a file,

double-click the file's icon, or click a file to select

it, right-click it, and then click [Property] from

2 Type the name in the [Machine Name] box,

the menu that appears.

and then click [OK].

• To reduce this dialog box to a button on the

taskbar, click the [Minimize] button.

To disconnect the USB cable, or shut down the

computer

ran

• After data transferring to embroidery machine

sf

and the transferring message on the screen of

er

the machine is closed, you can disconnect the

rin

USB cable, or shut down the computer.

When connected to the embroidery machine

Da

again, you can continue the Link operation.

A name (up to 10 alphanumeric characters/

ta

• The embroidery machine can finish sewing the

symbols) can be specified for the embroidery

design currently being embroidered even if the

machine.

computer is turned off.

• If the embroidery machine is turned off while it is

embroidering, the resume operation can be

used the next time it is turned on. At that time,

transmission can be resumed using the Link

• When an embroidery machine is connected to

function by clicking [Link] in [Design Database]

the computer, the embroidery machine is

or in the [Option] menu of [Layout & Editing]

recognized by the computer as a removable disk

to display the [Link] dialog box.

and is assigned a drive letter. If this drive letter

• If the embroidery machine connection cannot be

is the same as one that has already been

detected, the [Link] dialog box wil close

assigned by the computer, designs cannot be

automatically.

sent from the computer to that embroidery

machine. This problem occurs, for example, if a

• To display the [Link] dialog box again after the

network drive has been assigned a computer

computer has been restarted, click [Link] in

drive letter. If this occurs, cancel the assignment

[Design Database] or in the [Option] menu (in

for the drive with the conflicting drive letter.

the upper-right corner) of [Layout & Editing].

• When the number of embroidery machines

• To display the [Distributor] dialog box, click

connected to the computer via USB is

[Distributor] in the [Option] menu of the [Link]

increased, the operating system may require

dialog box.

that the computer be restarted. At that time,

restart the computer.

208

Using the Link Function to Embroider From the Computer

209

Design Center

This section describes the basic operations

performed in Design Center. A simple step-by-

step procedure is provided to create an

embroidery pattern from a template image, such

as an illustration.
Basic Design Center Operations

Basic Design Center Operations

In Design Center, embroidery patterns can be created from an original image. In

addition, you can specify colors and sewing attributes for the lines and regions
that are more detailed than those specified with the [Auto Punch] function in
Layout & Editing.

An embroidery design is created in the following four stages.

Step 1

Step 2
Step 3

Step 4

Original Image Stage

Line Image Stage

Figure Handle Stage

Sew Setting Stage

Open an image file, and

The original image is

The line image is converted The sew type and thread

select the colors to be used converted to a black-and-

to a figure handle image.

colors are specified in the

for creating the outlines.

white line image.

Points in the figure handle

outline to complete the

Outlines can be drawn or

image can be edited to

embroidery design.

erased.

change the design.

Example:

Example:

Example:

The stripes in the scarf are

The eyes are moved, and

By applying colors different

erased.

the facial expression is

than in the original image,

Stripes are added to the

changed.

the design is given a

scarf.

A star is added to the tail of

different appearance.

the plane.

• If the data is saved, work can be stopped at each stage, then started again.

• The most appropriate images to use are those with few and distinct colors.
Images or photos that are intricate or have gradations are not suitable since it is
difficult to extract their outlines.

• Line image data is saved in the .pel format, and figure handle data is saved in
the .pem format.
• The embroidery data is saved in the .pem format. To transfer .pem data created
in Design Center to an embroidery machine, import the pattern into Layout &
Editing, and then transfer the data to an embroidery machine.

cc

"Importing into Layout & Editing" on page 220 and "Transferring Embroidery
Designs to

Machines" on page 201

This section describes the basic operations performed in Design Center. For
details on the procedures or settings, refer to "Design Center Window" on page
221.

211
Basic Design Center Operations

Step 1 Original Image Stage

4 Click .
■ Extract outlines from an image

1 Click the down arrow in the bottom-left corner

of the [Start] screen to show the [All Apps]

view.

5 Select the desired image file, and then click

[Open].

2 Click [Design Center] under the title [PE-

DESIGN 10] in the screen.

De

Airplane image is located at:

ign Ce

Documents (My documents)\PE-DESIGN 10

\Sample\Design Center.

nte

3 Click .

212
Basic Design Center Operations

6 In the image displayed in the [Pick Colors]

Step 2 Line Image Stage

window, select the colors to be used for the

outlines (embroidery lines).

■ Using the Eraser

 The selected color appears in a box on the

right side, and

appears in the check box

1 To erase a line, click [Eraser] in the [Tools]

to show that the color is selected.

group, and then select a tool

according to

the size of the area or thickness of the line to

be erased.

2 Move the pointer over the line to be erased,

and then click the line or drag the pointer to

erase the line.

The desired color can be selected more

easily if the [Zoom] slider is used to

enlarge the image.

If a color other than that for the outline

was selected, clear the check box

beside the color to deselect it.

7 After selecting the colors to be used for the

outlines, click [OK].

■ Using the Pen

 The line image appears in the Design

1 To draw lines, select the [Pen] in the [Tools]

Page.

group, and then select a tool

with the

desired thickness of the line to be drawn.

213
Basic Design Center Operations

2 Drag the pointer to draw a line. To add a point,

2 Click [OK].

click in the Design Page.

To draw vertical or horizontal lines, hold down the

<Shift> key while moving the pointer.

 The line image is converted to a figure

handle image.

• If lines are drawn or erased incorrectly, click

(Undo button) to undo the last operation.

• To change the display size, use [Zoom]

command.

• The part of the work area that is displayed can

De

easily be changed by using the [Pan] tool.

sign Ce

nte

Step 3 Figure Handle Stage

■ Moving outlines

1 Click the [Figure Handle] tab.

■ Editing the extracted outline

2 Click

in

the

[Tools] group, and then click

the outline to be moved.

1 When the line image is finished, click [To

Figure Handle] in the [Stage] group or

(the second icon from the left) in the upper-

right corner of the screen.

1
2

1 Rotation handle

2 Scale handles

214
Basic Design Center Operations
3 Move the pointer over the outline so that the

3 Double-click the end point.

shape of the pointer changes to

, and then

drag the outline.

Drag a handle to change the size or angle. To

delete the outline, press the <Delete> key.

■ Adding lines to the figure handle

image

1 Click [Input Line] in the [Tools] group.

■ Reshaping outlines

1 Click [Select Point] in the [Tools] group.

2 Click the start point (1), and then click the next

point (2).

2 Click an outline.

 A line is drawn connecting the two points.

Continue clicking to draw additional lines.

1
2

1 Point

2 Pink Line

• To remove the last point that was entered, right-

click.

3 To add a point, click the outline (1).

• To draw vertical or horizontal lines, hold down

To create a corner, drag the point (2).

the <Shift> key while moving the pointer.

215
Basic Design Center Operations

4 If the point is deleted, the corner is removed.

2 Select a point, and then click [Split at Point]

Click the point to be deleted, and then press

in the [Edit] group to split the line.

the <Delete> key, or click [Delete] in the

[Clipboard] group.

■ Connecting lines

Two points can be connected to form a line.

5 To change the shape of the line, drag the

1 Perform steps 1 and 2 in "Reshaping

point.

outlines" to select a line.

2 While holding down the <Alt> key, drag the

selected point to the other point that you want

to connect to it.

 The shape of the pointer changes to

De

and a red square appears when the two

si

points are overlapping.

gn Ce

nte

• If multiple points are selected, all of the points

wil be moved or deleted.

• To select additional points, hold down the <Ctrl>

key and click each point, or drag the pointer over

the points.

3 Release the mouse button to connect the two

points.

■ Splitting lines
Lines can be split at a point.

1 Perform steps 1 and 2 in "Reshaping

outlines" to select a line.

216
Basic Design Center Operations

■ Continuing to the Sew Setting

Stage

Step 4 Sew Setting Stage

When the figure handle image is finished, continue

We are now going to apply sewing attributes to the

to the Sew Setting Stage.

different parts of the outline to create the embroidery

pattern.
1 Click [To Sew Setting] in the [Stage] group or

in the upper-right corner of the screen.

■ Specifying sewing attributes

1 Click the [Sew Setting] tab.

2 To specify the sew type for the line, click

[Line] in the [Tools] group, and then select

the desired tool from [Line Sew Tool].

1 [Line sew type] selector

: Click this button to apply sewing

attributes to the entire outline.

: Click this button to apply sewing

Even after continuing to the Sew Setting Stage,

attributes to a portion of the outline.

you can return to the Figure Handle Stage to edit

the figure handle image.

To specify the sew type for the region, click

[Region] in the [Tools] group.

1 [Region sew type] selector

b

Sewing attributes cannot be applied to regions if

the region is not completely enclosed in an outline

in the Figure Handle Stage.

3 Click .

217
Basic Design Center Operations

4 Click the desired color.

7 When using

, click the region where the

sewing attributes are to be applied.

5 Click the down arrow in the sew type selector

and choose the desired sew type.

6 When using

or
, click the outline

where the sewing attributes are to be applied.

De

sign Ce

nte

To change the sewing attributes, repeat steps

1 through 7.

218

Basic Design Center Operations

b
Sewing attributes for region cannot be applied to

• From the [Sewing Attribute Setting] dialog

open regions (regions not fully enclosed in an

box, detailed settings for attributes, such as the

outline), as shown in the illustration below.

width of satin stitches and the run pitch, can be

specified.

cc

"Specifying sewing attributes" on page 233.

• The Reference Window is useful for specifying

colors while checking the colors of the original

image.

If attributes cannot be applied to a region, return to

Using the Reference Window

the Figure Handle Stage and make sure that

region is closed. Edit any broken lines with the Edit

This allows you to select colors while checking

Point tool.

the colors in the original image.

cc

"Adding lines to the figure handle image" on

1. Click the [View] tab.

page 215

2. Select the [Reference Window] check box

in the [Show/Hide] group.

3. Click the [Image] tab.

 The image opened in Original Image

stage appears.

If [Reference] has been clicked, click

[Original].

219

Basic Design Center Operations

Step 5 Importing into Layout &

Editing

The embroidery pattern created in Design Center

can be imported into Layout & Editing. In addition,

the created data can be transferred to the machine

using functions in Layout & Editing.

If the sewing attributes of an outline or region are

not set, the embroidery pattern cannot be

imported.

1 Click the [Sew Setting] tab.

2 Click [Send to Layout & Editing] in the

[Stage] group.

 Layout & Editing starts up.

3 Select either to import a pattern as stitch

pattern or as outline pattern.

De

sign Ce

nte

4 Specify settings for [Import], [Magnification]

and [Orientation], and then click [Import].

b

For details on the settings [As Stitches] and [As

Outlines] beside [Import], refer to "Importing

embroidery design from Design Center" on

page 94.

220

Design Center Window

Design Center Window

3
4

56

10

11

1 Application button

2 Ribbon

3 Quick Access Toolbar

4 Stage button

Indicates the current stage. Click to move to a different stage.

5 Option button

6 Help button

7 Reference Window (cc p. 228)

Displays all outlines and patterns in the work area, giving you an overview while
you work on a detailed area.

8 Design Page

9 Work area
10 Status Bar

11 Refresh Window button

cc

"Understanding Windows" on page 11

221
Original Image Stage

Original Image Stage

e Most Recently Used Files

Using the wizard

From the list, click the name of the file,

and then click [Open].

This wizard provides a step-by-step guide for

creating embroidery patterns.

f Always show Wizard at Startup

Select this check box to start up the

Click

, and then select [Wizard] from the

wizard each time Design Center is started

command list.

up.

■ Opening an image

When you click the [From Image] button in the

[How do you want to produce embroidery?]

dialog box, the [From Image] dialog box appears.

De

a Open Image File

a

Clicking this button that displays the

ign Ce

[Open] dialog box to select an image file.

cc

"Image file formats" on page 150

nte

b From Clipboard

Clicking this button to paste the image on

the Clipboard into the Design Page. This

function can only be used when there is

an image on the Clipboard.

c From TWAIN Device

Clicking this button to import an image

a From Image

from a TWAIN device (such as a scanner)

Clicking this button displays the [From

connected to your computer, then paste it

Image] dialog box.

in the Design Page.

b New Line Image

d Use Current Image

Clicking this button opens a new Design

Clicking this button to use an image

Page in the Line Image Stage.

opened in the Original Image Stage. This

function can only be used when an image

cc

"Drawing a new line image freehand" on

page 225.

is opened in the Original Image Stage.

c New Figure

Clicking this button opens a new Design

Page in the Figure Handle Stage.

cc
"Drawing a new figure handle image

freehand" on page 227.

d Open PEM

Clicking this button displays the [Open]

dialog box so that a .pem file can be

selected.

222

Original Image Stage

Opening a file
• To import an image from a file TWAIN device

1 Click , and then select [Open] from the

 Connect the TWAIN device to the computer,

command list.

and then click [Image], then [Open from

TWAIN Device], or click [From TWAIN

Device] in the [From Image] dialog box.

When the [Select Source] dialog box

appears, select a device. Next, click [Select].

 For information on using the driver interface,

refer to the help manual for that interface, or

contact the manufacturer of the interface.

• Tips for scanning illustrations for Design Center

 If the outline is not clear, trace the outline on

tracing paper.

 Better scanning results may be produced by

reducing the tone of the image.

2 Select the drive and the folder.

3 To open a file, select it, and then click [Open],

or double-click the file's icon.

b
• If an image file is selected, the file is opened in

the Original Image Stage.

• If a .pel file is selected, the file is opened in the

Line Image Stage.

• If a .pem file is selected, the file is opened in the

Figure Handle Stage or the Sew Setting Stage.

223
Line Image Stage

Line Image Stage

Extracting the outlines of

an image

When the extracting color boundaries using

[Detect Outlines], the colors are converted to line

1 In the Original Image Stage, click [To Line

image as shown below.

image].

cc

"Original Image Stage" on page 212.

2 Selecting the colors to be used for the

outlines, and then click [OK].

g Click [Preview] to preview the line image

in the Design Page.

De

sign Ce

nte

a Zoom slider

Use this slider to adjust the zoom ratio for

displaying the image.

b Tone slider

Use this slider to reduce color tones in

images where it is difficult to select the

outline color.

c Noise reduction slider

Use this slider to reduce image noise

(distortions) in images where the outline is

not clear.

d Click the outline color(s) to convert into

black outlines.

e Displays the colors selected in d. To

deselect a color, clear the corresponding

check box.

f To extract the color boundaries, click

[Detect Outlines] check box.

224
Line Image Stage

Drawing a new line image

freehand

Click

, and then select [New Line Images] from

the command list.

Using the Pen and Eraser tools, the line image can

be drawn freehand in the Design Page.

cc

"Line Image Stage" on page 213.

b
In the Line Image Stage, the file will be saved as a

.pel file.

cc

"Saving embroidery patterns" on page 237,

and "Drawing a new figure handle image

freehand" on page 227.

225
Figure Handle Stage

Figure Handle Stage

Changing settings for

converting to outlines

1 In the Line Image Stage, click [To Figure

ON

Handle].

To replace the black lines with figure

handle lines following the border of the

cc

"Line Image Stage" on page 213.

outlines, clear the [Thinning Process]

2 Specify the desired settings in the [Figure

check box.

Object Conversion Setting] dialog box, and

then click [OK].

OFF

De

ign Ce

nte

c Use the [SIZE] slider to set the size.

d You will not be able to enlarge the image

a Select a setting under [Resolution].

beyond the limits of the Design Page

Fine

area. If necessary, click [Design Page

Select this setting only if the image

Property], and then change the Design

contains many small details.

Page size.

Normal

e To create outline data from a part of the

Select this setting to provide a sufficient

image, select the specific area by clicking

resolution without making the file too

[Pick Area], then dragging the pointer (+)

large.

to draw a selection frame around the area

Coarse

to be selected.

Select this setting to keep the file as small

as possible.

b To replace the black outlines with figure

handle lines along the center of the

outlines, select the [Thinning Process]

check box, and then use the slider to

select the degree of detail.

When the slider is set to [Much], even very thick

black lines will be replaced with a line along the

center.

226
Figure Handle Stage

Specifying the Design

It may not be possible for outline data to be created

Page size

from an image when moving from the Line Image

Stage to the Figure Handle Stage, even after

1 Click the [Figure Handle] tab.

various outline conversion settings have been

specified. If this occurs, return to the Line Image

2 Click [Design Page Settings] in the [Design

Stage, and correct the outlines in the line image or

Page] group.

apply corrections to the image.

Drawing a new figure

handle image freehand

Click

, and then select [New Figure Data] from

3 Select the Design Page size, and then click

the command list.

[OK].

a Select a machine type.

The settings available in the [Page Size]

• In the Figure Handle Stage, the file will be saved

selector differ depending on the machine

as a .pem file.

type selected here.

• To retrieve data from a saved .pem file, use the

b To adjust the Design Page size according

command [Import Figure] in the [Figure

to the hoop size, select [Hoop Size], and

Handle] tab.

then select the desired hoop size from the

selector.

c To specify a custom Design Page size,

select [Custom Size], and then type or

select the desired width and height for the

Design Page.

d To return to the default settings, click

[Default].

• Do not select a hoop size larger than the

embroidery hoop that can be used with your

machine.
• Do not create a Custom Hoop larger than the

embroidery hoop that can be used with your

machine.

227
Figure Handle Stage

■ Rotating outlines

Editing outlines

■ Scaling outlines

Rotating manually

Scaling numerically:

1 Select the outline.

1 Select the outline.

2 Move the pointer over the rotation handle. And

then drag.

Click the [Figure Handle] tab.

3 Click [Numerical Setting] in the [Edit] group,

Rotating numerically

and then select [Size].

1 Select the outline.

2 Click [Numerical Setting] in the [Edit] group,

and then select [Rotate].

4 Select a size, and then click [OK].

3 Type or select the desired rotation angle, and

then click [OK].

De

sign Ce

nte

a To change the width and height

proportionally, select the [Maintain

An angle can also be selected by dragging

in

aspect ratio] check box.

the [Rotate] dialog box.

b Select whether the width and height will

be set as a percentage (%) or a dimension

(millimeters or inches).

Viewing outlines in the

Type or select the desired width and

height.

Reference Window

■ Flipping outlines horizontally or

1 Click the [View] tab.

vertically

2 Select the [Reference Window] check box in

1 Select the outline.

the [Show/Hide] group.

2 Click [Flip Vertically] or [Flip Horizontally] in

the [Edit] group.

228
Figure Handle Stage

■ Zooming

■ Displaying a different reference

The [Reference Window] can be switched to

image

display either the entire Design Page or only the

1 Click the [Image] tab.

embroidery pattern.

Click the [Pan/Zoom] tab, click

Displays the entire Design

Page.

2 Click [Reference], then click .

3 Select the reference image, and then click

Displays the entire

[Open].

pattern.

■ Moving the display area frame

The part of the outline displayed in the Design Page

can be selected from the [Reference Window].

1 Move the pointer over the display area frame.

2 Drag the display area frame so that it

surrounds the desired part of the outline.

 The selected part of the outline is displayed

in the Design Page.

■ Redrawing the display area frame

Instead of moving the display area frame, the frame

can be redrawn to display the desired part of the

outline in the Design Page.

Click the area to be displayed, or drag the pointer

over the desired part of the outline in the

[Reference Window].

229
Figure Handle Stage

Changing the background

image

■ Changing the display of the

background image

1 Click the [View] tab.

2 Drag the slider, or click or in the

[Template] group.

Changing application

settings

■ Changing the grid settings

Hide (off)

50% 100%

1 Click the [View] tab.

25% 75%

De

Press the shortcut key <F6> to switch between

ign Ce

displaying the image (On (100%)) to displaying it

faded at each density (75%, 50% and 25%) to

hiding the image (Off).

nte

2 Specify the grid settings in the [Grid] group.

r

■ Changing the size and position of

the background image

1 Select the template. Click [Modify Template]

in the [Template] group.

a To display the grid, select the [Show

Grid] check box.

To hide the grid, clear the [Show Grid]

check box.

b To display the grid as solid lines, select

the [with Axes] check box.

2 Drag the template image to move it to the

To display the grid as dots (intersecting

desired location.

points of the grid) , clear the [with Axes]

Drag a handle to enlarge or reduce the size of

check box.

the template image.

c To set the grid spacing, type or select a

value in the [Interval] box.

■ Changing the measurement units

Click [Option], then [Options], then [System Unit],

and then select the desired measurement units

([mm] or [inch]).

cc

"System unit" on page 20

230
Sew Setting Stage

Sew Setting Stage

1 In the Figure Handle Stage, click [To Figure

4 Click the enclosed region to apply the sewing

Handle] to display the [Stage] group.

attributes.

2 Click [To Sew Setting] in the [Stage] group.

In the Sew Setting Stage, the colors of the Design

Page and background can be changed from the

[Design Settings] dialog box (displayed by

clicking the [Option] menu, and then selecting

[Design Page Settings].)

1 Marching lines

• If the attributes cannot be applied to a region, go

back to the Figure Handle Stage and make sure

that region is closed.

• Edit any broken lines with the Edit Point tool.

Setting region/line sewing

• Although a region may seem closed, if the

■ Region sewing

sewing attributes cannot be specified for the

1

region, the region may not actually be closed.

Click the [Sew Setting] tab.

• To find the opening in the region, use the line

2 Click [Region] in the [Tools] group.

drawing mode in the Figure Handle Stage to

divide the region into smaller regions, and then

check which region sewing attributes cannot be

applied to in the Sew Setting Stage.

3 If necessary, change the color and sew type.

cc

"Sewing attributes" on page 232

231
Sew Setting Stage

■ Line sewing

Sewing attributes

1 Click [Line] in the [Tools] group, and then

The Sew pane on the [Sew setting] tab, available in

select the desired tool (

or

) from

the Sew Setting Stage, allows you to set the color

[Line Sew Tool].

and sew type of region and outlines.

The sewing attributes that are available depend on

the tool selected.

Example 1: When

is selected

2 If necessary, change the color and sew type.

cc

"Sewing attributes" on page 232.

1 Region color button

2 Region sew type selector

Click the outline to apply the sewing attributes.

Example 2: When

or

is selected

1 Line color button

2 Line sew type selector

De
si

■ Sew type

gn Ce

1 Click in a sew type selector.

nte

2 Click the desired sew type.

Line sew type

Region sew type

1 Marching lines

3 Click the region or line to apply the sew type

setting.

When

is selected, settings are applied only to

a portion of the clicked outline.

• To turn off sewing, select [Not Sewn (Line)]

from the [Line sew type] selector or [Not Sewn

(Region)] from the [Region sew type] selector.

• If the sewing has been turned off, the regions

appear in white or the lines appear as dotted

lines.

232
Sew Setting Stage

■ Specifying sewing attributes

b To Expert mode/To Beginner mode

Click to switch the mode.

Click the [View] tab.

Select the [Sewing Attributes] check box in

Click to load/save the sewing settings.

the [Show/Hide] group to display the [Sewing

Attributes] dialog box.

cc

"Saving frequently used sewing

attributes" on page 192

d Hide Hint/Show Hint

Click to switch between displaying and

hiding the hint view

e With each change in the sewing

attributes, a preview of the stitching can

• For region sewing

be checked here.

Beginner mode

Expert mode

1 Change the sewing attributes displayed under

[Line sew] or [Region sew].

cc

For details on the different sewing

attributes and settings, refer to "Line

sewing attributes" on page 325 and

"Region sewing attributes" on page 331

2 When the line sewing attributes are displayed,

click an outline to apply the line sewing

attributes to the outline.

When the region sewing attributes are

displayed, click a region to apply the region

sewing attributes to the region.

Saving frequently used sewing attributes

• Frequently used sewing attributes can be saved

together, and recalled when specifying sewing

attributes.

• Perform this operation in the same way that it is

performed in Layout & Editing.

• For line sewing

cc

For details, refer to "Saving frequently used

sewing attributes" on page 192

Beginner mode

Expert mode

■ Color

1 Click the [View] tab.

2 Select the [Sewing Attributes] check box in

the [Show/Hide] group to display the [Sewing

Attributes] dialog box.

3 Click the [Color] tab.

Click to return to the default setting.

233
Sew Setting Stage

4 From the [Thread Chart] selector, select a

2 Specify the desired settings in the [Gradation

thread color chart or a user thread chart.

Pattern Setting] dialog box, and then click

[OK].

a To select a preset gradation pattern, click

the desired pattern under [Select

pattern].

b Move the sliders to adjust the density of

the gradation pattern.

c The preview area shows the setting

changes that you make.

5 From the list of thread colors, click the desired

Gradation can be specified if satin stitches, fill

color.

stitches or programmable fill stitches have been

selected for the region sewing and [Manual] has

cc

For details on the four buttons under the

been selected as the sewing direction.

list, refer to "Special colors" on page 48

De

6 Click the region or outline to apply the color

ign Ce

setting.

a
An additional color (used for blending in Layout &

nte

■ Creating a gradation

Editing) cannot be specified with the gradation

The density of the color can be adjusted at various

setting in Design Center.

locations to create a custom gradation pattern.

1 In Expert mode of the [Sewing Attribute

Setting] dialog box, select the [Gradation]

Applying effects to

check box, and then click [Pattern].

concentric circle and radial

stitches

In order to increase the decorative effect, you can

move the center point of regions set to the

concentric circle stitch or radial stitch.

1 Click the [Sew Setting] tab.

2 Click [Region] in the [Tools] group.

3 Select the desired color and sew type

([Concentric Circle Stitch] or [Radial

Stitch]).

234
Sew Setting Stage

4 Click the region.

Preventing overlapping

 The center point (

) appears.

stitching of regions (hole

5 Drag the center point to the desired location.

sewing)

By specifying hole sewing, the stitching in

overlapping regions will not be sewn twice. Hole

sewing can be set only when one region completely

encloses another.

1 Click the [Sew Setting] tab.

2 Click [Hole Sew] in the [Tools] group.

3 Click the region that completely encloses

another region.

4 Click [OK] to set hole sewing.

To move the center point later, click

, and then

right click the region with the concentric circle

stitch or radial stitch applied. The center point

appears and can be moved.

235
Sew Setting Stage
b

Checking and editing the

To cancel hole sewing, click the white inner region.

sewing order

The inner region will be sewn twice when it

appears in the same color as the outer region.

1 Click the [Sew Setting] tab.

2 Click [Sewing Order] in the [Check Design]

group.

3 To change the sewing order of a color, select

the frame for the color, and then drag the

frame to the desired position.

Applying stamps

Stamps can be applied to regions in the Sew Setting

Stage of Design Center.

1 Click the [Sew Setting] tab.

2 Click [Stamp] in the [Tools] group, and then

De

• To select additional frames, hold down the

select the desired tool from [Stamp Tools].

<Shift> or <Ctrl> key and select each frame.

sign Ce

• The frames containing regions are separated

from the frames containing outlines with a thick

vertical line. Frames from one side of the line

nte

cannot be moved to the other side.

• To enlarge the pattern for better viewing, click

: Click this button to apply a stamp.

To view the sewing order of multiple patterns

of the same color, select the frame, and then

click the [Part] tab.

: Click this button to edit the applied stamp.

Settings for stamps are specified in the same way

that they are in Layout & Editing.

cc

"Applying and editing stamps" on

page 58
b

5 To change the sewing order of a pattern,

Some stamp patterns are provided with this

select the frame for the pattern, and then drag

application; however, by using Programmable

the frame to the desired position.

Stitch Creator, you can edit the patterns that are

provided or you can create your own.

6 Click [OK].

236
Sew Setting Stage

Checking the stitching in

Saving embroidery

the Stitch Simulator

patterns

1 Click the [Sew Setting] tab.

The file can be saved at each stage.

2 Click [Stitch Simulator] in the [Check

■ Overwriting

Design] group to view stitching using the

stitch simulator.
Click

, and then select [Save] from the

command list.

The basic operations are the same as those

described for Layout & Editing.

cc

"Checking the stitching with the Stitch

Simulator" on page 80

Viewing embroidery

patterns in the Reference

Window

Embroidery patterns can be viewed in the

■ Saving with a new name

Reference Window in the Sew Setting Stage in the

same way that they are in the Figure Handle Stage.

1 Click , and then select [Save As] from the

cc

"Viewing outlines in the Reference

command list.

Window" on page 228.

2 Select the drive and the folder, and then type

in the file name.

237

Sew Setting Stage

3 Click [Save].

• Image data from the Original Image Stage can

be saved as a bitmap file (.bmp).

• In the Line Image Stage, image data is saved as

a .pel file.

• In the Figure Handle Stage and the Sew Setting

Stage, pattern data is saved as a .pem file.

If you select a file type of a previous software

version, saved .pem files can be opened with that

version of the software; however, some

information may be lost.

De

sign Ce

nte

238
Sew Setting Stage

239

Design Database

Using Design Database, the created embroidery

data can be managed. In addition, while viewing

images of the file contents, the files can be

organized, or multiple embroidery designs can be

transferred to embroidery machines.

Design Database Window

Design Database Window

54

11

10

1 Toolbar

11 Writing box display/non-display button

2 Folder pane

Click when writing/transferring designs.

Click this button to hide or display the Writing list.

3 Contents pane

Displays thumbnails of all embroidery design in

the selected folder.

Settings for the following can be selected from the

4 Card reading button

Option menu.

Reads an original card.

• Select mm or inch as the system units.

5 Folder content display button

• Select Blue, Black, Silver or Aqua as the

Displays the folder contents.

application color.

6 Send to selector

Select where the embroidery files will be written

or sent.

7 Write button

Begins writing the selected designs (displayed in

the writing list).

8 Remove button

Returns the selected design (displayed in the

writing list) to the unselected state.

9 Writing list

Displays the list of designs to be written to the

original card, USB media or embroidery

machine.
10 Add button

Adds the design selected in the contents pane to

the writing/transfer list.

241

Starting Up Design Database

Starting Up Design Database

1 Click the down arrow in the bottom-left corner

of the [Start] screen to show the [All Apps]

view.
2 Click [Design Database] under the title [PE-

DESIGN 10] in the screen.

3 Click a folder in the folder pane.

 All embroidery files in the folder are

displayed in the contents pane on the right.

• The displayed files have the following

extensions.

.pes, .phc, .dst, .exp, .pcs, .hus, .vip, .shv, .jef,

.sew, .csd, .xxx, .pen

Des

• .pem files are not displayed since they cannot be

read by the machine. Import the embroidery

ign

design into Layout & Editing from Design

Databas

Center, and then save it as a .pes file.

• Zipped file can not be read in this application.

cc

"Importing into Layout & Editing" on page 220

242
Organizing Embroidery Designs

Organizing Embroidery Designs

Creating new folders

b
1 In the folder pane, on the left, select the folder.

• To copy the file from one folder to another on the

same drive, hold down the <Ctrl> key while

2 Click [File], then [Create New Folder].

dragging the embroidery design.

• To move the file from one folder to another on

different drives, hold down the <Shift> key while

dragging the embroidery design.

• The file can also be removed from the current

folder (or copied) by selecting the menu

command [Edit] - [Cut] (or [Edit] - [Copy]).

Then, the file can be added to the new folder by

selecting it in the folder pane, then selecting the

menu command [Edit] - [Paste].

Changing file names

3 Type in the name of the new folder, and then

press the <Enter> key.

The names of embroidery designs can be changed

Moving/copying files to a

from Design Database only when the sewing

information (menu command [Display] –

different folder

[Details]) is displayed.

cc

"Changing how files are displayed" on

1 In the folder pane, locate the folder where you

page 244

want to move the embroidery design.

In the folder pane, click the folder that contains

In the folder pane, select the folder containing

the embroidery design.

the embroidery design.

Drag the embroidery design in the contents

Select the embroidery design. Then click

pane to the folder you previously located in the

again.

folder pane.
3 Type in the new name of the embroidery

design, and then press the <Enter> key.

When renaming a file, the file extension cannot be

changed.

 If the two folders are on the same drive, the

selected embroidery design is moved to

the other folder.

 If the two folders are on separate drives,

the selected embroidery design is copied

into the other folder.

243
Organizing Embroidery Designs

■ Small Thumbnails

Deleting files

Click

or click [Display], then [Small

In the folder pane, select the folder containing

the embroidery design that you want to delete.

Thumbnails].

2 In the contents pane, select the name of the

embroidery design.

3 Press the <Delete> key.

 The file is moved to the Recycle Bin.

Changing how files are

displayed

The embroidery designs in the contents pane can

be displayed as large thumbnails or small

thumbnails, or they can be listed by their sewing

information.

■ Sewing information

■ Large Thumbnails

Click

or click [Display], then [Details].

Click

or click [Display], then [Large

Thumbnails].

Des
ign

Databas

244

Opening Embroidery Designs

Opening Embroidery Designs

Opening files with Layout

& Editing

1 In the folder pane, select the folder containing

the embroidery design that you want to open

in Layout & Editing.

Be sure to select a folder that contains .pes files.

2 In the contents pane, select the .pes file.

3 Click [File], then [Open in Layout & Editing].

Importing files into Layout

& Editing

Files in the following formats can be imported.

.pes, .phc, .dst, .exp, .pcs, .hus, .vip, .shv, .jef, .sew,

.csd, or .xxx

1 In the folder pane, select the folder containing

the embroidery design that you want to import

into Layout & Editing.

2 In the contents pane, select the embroidery

design.

3 Click [File], then [Import Into Layout &

Editing].

 The selected embroidery design appears in

the Layout & Editing window.

Files in the .pen format cannot be imported into

Layout & Editing.

245
Transferring Embroidery Designs to Machines

Transferring Embroidery Designs to

Machines

The procedures for transferring the created embroidery design to an embroidery

machine differ depending on your embroidery machine model. For detail, refer
to the Operation Manual provided with your embroidery machine.

2 Click .

Transferring to a machine

by using USB media/USB

cable/original card

1 Prepare the media to be used to make the

transfer, or connect an embroidery machine to

the computer.

Be sure that the hoop size of the design does not

exceed the hoop that will be used on the

embroidering machine.

• If the design is to be written to an original card,

insert the original card into the USB card writer

Des

module.

ign

• If the design is to be written to USB media, plug

the USB media into the computer.

Databas

• If the design is to be transferred directly to an

embroidery machine, connect the embroidery

machine to the computer. For details on

e
transferring design, refer to the Operation

Manual provided with your embroidery machine.

• In order to use the Link function to transfer

embroidery designs, an embroidery machine

compatible with the Link function must be

1 Contents pane (Available designs)

running in Link mode.

2 Writing list (Selected designs)

cc

"Using the Link Function to Embroider From

the Computer" on page 204

246
Transferring Embroidery Designs to Machines

3 Click the [Send To] selector, and then click

■ Using USB media

the destination.

Designs can be transferred to

an embroidery machine

compatible with the USB Host

function.

a
The "PE-DESIGN Software Key" cannot be used

as USB media.

4. Select from the [Send To] selector.

If multiple USB media are connected,

for each

connected device appears. Select the USB media

where the design is to be written.

5 Click .

6 Select a folder in a, select an embroidery file

from the contents pane b, and then click

to add the file to the writing list. After

all embroidery files to be written are added to

a Sends designs to the USB media.

the writing list, click

b Sends designs directly to an embroidery

machine.

c Sends designs to the USB card writer.

d Sends designs to embroidery machine(s)

by using the Link function.

If Link is not available in the [Send To] selector,

check that the embroidery machine is running in

Link mode and that the cable is correctly

connected.

 The designs in the writing list are written to

cc

"Using the Link Function to Embroider

From the Computer" on page 204

the USB media.

The remaining steps differ depending on the

 When the designs have been written, the

destination where the data is to be sent.

message "Finished outputting data."

appears.

247
Transferring Embroidery Designs to Machines

■ Transferring

directly to a

• Do not remove the USB media while designs are

machine's memory

being written.

Designs can be transferred to

• If there is already a file with the same name at

embroidery machines that can

the destination, the following dialog box

be connected to a computer

appears. Select whether to overwrite the

using a USB cable.

existing file, to stop copying or to copy the file

using a different name.

4. Select

from the [Send To] selector.

If multiple embroidery machines are connected,

for each machine appears. Select the

machine to be used to embroider.

5 Click .

6 Select a folder in a, select an embroidery file

from the contents pane b, and then click

to add the file to the writing list. After

all embroidery files to be written are added to

If a volume label has been specified for the USB

the writing list, click

.

media, "

[(Drive Letter):] (Volume Label)"

appears in the [Send To] selector.

If a volume label has not been specified,

"

[(Drive Letter):] USB Media" appears.

For details on changing the name (volume label)

for the USB media, refer to the manual provided

Des

with the USB media.

ign

Databas

 The designs in the writing list are written to

the embroidery machine's memory.

 When the designs have been written, the

message "Finished outputting data."

appears.

• Do not remove the USB cable while designs are

being written.

• If there is already a file with the same name at

the destination, a dialog box appears. Select

whether to overwrite the existing file, to stop

copying or to copy the file using a different

name.

248
Transferring Embroidery Designs to Machines

■ Using an original

card

Designs can be transferred to

an embroidery machine
a

equipped with a card slot.

• Files other than .phc files can be written.

• If no USB card writer module is connected to the

computer, an original card cannot be selected as

the output destination. Before transferring, make

sure that a USB card writer module is connected

to the computer.

• An embroidery design for the jumbo frame

4.

cannot be transferred to the machine by using

Select

from the [Send To] selector.

an original card.

• If the pattern in the selected embroidery file is

Under [Machine Type], select the type of

larger than the hoop size selected in step 6, or

embroidery machine to be used.

the number of stitches or number of colors for

the pattern exceeds the maximum for the hoop

selected in step 6, that file cannot be added to

the writing list. Only the embroidery designs

displayed in the writing list will be written to the

original card.

a Single-needle machine

b Multi-needle machine

6 From the [Hoop Size] selector, select the

• Embroidery files can also be added to the writing

appropriate size of embroidery hoop.

list by right-clicking the file, then clicking [Add to

Writing List], or by selecting a file in the

contents pane and dragging it to the writing list.

• A file can also be removed from the writing list by

a

right-clicking it in the writing list, then clicking

[Remove from Writing List].

• Do not select a hoop size larger than the

embroidery hoop that can be used with your

embroidery machine. Otherwise, the created

9 If the files are to be written to an original card,

original card will not work correctly with the

the following message appears. Click [OK].

embroidery machine.

• When writing to an original card that already

contains data, all data on the card will be

deleted. Before writing to a card, save all

necessary data to a hard disk or other media,

and check that no necessary data remains on

the card.

cc

"From an original card" on page 92

Click .
Do not remove the card or unplug the USB cable

8 Select a folder in

while designs are being written to the card (while

a, select an embroidery file

the LED indicator is flashing).

from the contents pane b, and then click

to add the file to the writing list. After

all embroidery files to be written are added to

the writing list, click

249
Transferring Embroidery Designs to Machines

10 When a message appears, indicating that

■ Sending

writing is finished, click [OK].

embroidery

designs to

machines by using

Patterns created on a custom-sized Design Page

the Link function

are written to cards split into their various hoop

An embroidery machine

sections.

compatible with the Link function must be running in

cc

Note of "Transferring to a machine by using an

Link mode.

original card" on page 202

cc

"Using the Link Function to Embroider

From the Computer" on page 204

• To rewrite the embroidery files written on

4. Select

from

the

[Send To] selector.

the original card, click

to select

those files, and move files to the writing list

5 Click .
in the same manner.

6 Select a folder in a, select an embroidery file

• To check the embroidery design file being

from the contents pane

written to the original card, click

b, and then click

appears in the folder pane, and

all embroidery designs written to the

original card appear in the contents pane.

Des

ign

7 Continue the procedure as described in

Databas

Step 5 of "Using the Link Function to

Embroider From the Computer" on page 205.

a

Files in the .dst, .exp and .phc formats cannot be

• Embroidery designs written to the original card

transferred with the Link function. When [Link] is

appear as [Card Data] in the contents pane.

selected in the [Send To] box, .dst, .exp and .phc

• To display the contents of the folder in the

files do not appear in the contents pane.

contents pane, click

. Switch the

In addition, embroidery files with the Design Page

size set to [Custom Size] or with [Hoop Size] set

display by clicking

and

to 360 × 360 mm (Jumbo Frame) do not appear

in the contents pane.

To display the [Link] dialog box again after the

computer has been restarted, click [Link] in the

[Option] menu.

250
Searching for an Embroidery Design

Searching for an Embroidery Design

1 In the folder pane, select the folder.

h Date Modified

In the boxes, type the modification date

2 Click [File], then [Search].

range (from when to when).

3 Specify the search conditions. Select the

When searching for .pes files, the

check box of the search conditions to be

following conditions can also be specified.

specified.

i Design Name

Type the design name in the box.

j Category

In the box, type specific characters or the

embroidery category.

k Author

In the box, type the author's name to be

f
searched for.

l Keywords

In the box, type the keyword to be

searched for.

m Comment

In the box, type the comment to be

a File Name

Select to search for files with a specific file

searched for.

name. Type the file name in the box.

• To also search through the subfolders (folders

Wildcard characters ("?" to represent a single

within the selected folder), select the [Search

character and " " to represent multiple

subfolders] n check box.

characters) can also be used.

• Al characters entered in the box beside [File

Name] will be considered as a single set of

characters. However, you can search for files

b Format

matching multiple words in the boxes below

Select the check box beside the desired

[Search Conditions (only for PES files)] by

file format.

separating the words with a space.

c Stitch Count

In the boxes, type the lower and upper

4 Click [Search].

limits of the range for the number of

stitches.

 A list of files matching the specified search

conditions appears.

d Color Changes

In the boxes, type the lower and upper

limits of the range for the number of color

changes.

e Total Colors
In the boxes, type the lower and upper

limits of the range for the total number of

thread colors.

f Width

In the boxes, type the lower and upper

limits of the width range.

g Height

In the boxes, type the lower and upper

limits of the height range.

251

Converting Embroidery Design Files to Different Formats

Converting Embroidery Design Files to

Different Formats

Embroidery design files can easily be converted to a file of one of the other
formats (.pes, .dst, .exp, .pcs, .hus,
.vip, .shv, .jef, .sew, .csd, or .xxx).

1 In the folder pane, select the folder containing

6 Click [Convert].

the embroidery design that you want to

 The file is converted, and the new file is

convert.

added to the specified folder.

2 In the contents pane, select the embroidery

desired format.

• With [DST Settings] on the [Option] menu, the

Click [File], then [Convert Format].

number of jumps for thread trimming can be

specified for .dst files.

From the [Format Type] selector, select the

desired format.

cc

"Specifying the number of jumps in

embroidery design of the DST format" on

page 301

• If multiple files with different formats are

selected to be converted while [Same folder] is

selected, any file with the same format as the

new one wil not be converted. However, if the

files are being added to a different folder than

the original one, any file with the same format as

the new one will be copied to the different folder,

instead of being converted.

• If the file is converted to a .pes file, the thread

colors are converted as if the file was imported

5 Under [Output To], select whether the new

into Layout & Editing.

file is added to the same folder as the original

Des

file (Same folder) or to a specified folder

(Following folder).

ign

Databas

b
Files cannot be converted to the .phc or .pen

formats.

To change the folder where the new file will be

added, click

252
Checking Embroidery Designs

Checking Embroidery Designs

Previewing files

Checking file information

Sewing information such as the file name, size,

Toolbar button:

stitch count, sewing time, color count and

modification date can be checked in the Property

dialog box. With .pes file, additional information

Select a folder in a, select an embroidery file

about the embroidery design can be viewed.

from the contents pane b.

• The displayed sewing time is an estimate. The

actual sewing time depends on the machine

model used and the specified settings.

The sewing time is not displayed with .pen files.

Toolbar button:

1 In the contents pane, select the embroidery

design corresponding to the information that

you want to view.

2 Click ,

or

click

[Display] menu, then

2 Click

, or click [Display] menu, then

[Preview].
[Property].

PES files (version 4.0 or later)

Select [Color changes] beside [Color List] to

Files in the .pen format cannot be previewed.

display the thread color change information in the

color list. Select [Total colors] to display the

information for all thread colors in the color list.

cc

"Checking embroidery design information" on

page 88

253
Checking Embroidery Designs

• Non-PES files and PES files (version 3.0 or

earlier)

• If the Design Page size was set to [Custom

Size] or if [Hoop Size] was set to a multi-

position hoop (100 × 172 mm or 130 × 300 mm)

or a jumbo frame (360 × 360 mm), a [Property]

dialog box similar to the one shown below

appears.

Des

ign

Databas

• The red box in the dialog box shows the position

of the displayed pattern section.

• To display information for other hoop positions,

click

or .

254
Outputting a Catalog of Embroidery Designs

Outputting a Catalog of Embroidery

Designs

Images and sewing information for all embroidery designs can be outputted in a
number of formats. Select among the following modes according to your
preferences.

4 Select [Color List] c.

Printing

Color changes

Images of all embroidery designs in the selected

The thread color information for each color

folder can be printed as a catalog or as an

change is displayed.

instruction guide.

Total colors

The thread color information for the necessary

threads is displayed. This al ows you to check

the total number of thread colors.

cc

"Checking embroidery design

information" on page 88

5 Select [Print Layout] d.

Catalog style 1

Catalog style 4

1 In the folder pane, select the folder containing

the embroidery designs.

2 Click [File], then [Print Setup].

3 Under [Paper] a and [Orientation] b,

select the appropriate settings.

Catalog style 12

Instruction Guide style

6 Under [Color Description] e, select

whether the thread colors appear as the name

of the color or as the brand and thread

number.

7 Click [Print].

255
Outputting a Catalog of Embroidery Designs

Outputting as a CSV file

• If one or more embroidery designs were

A .csv file containing the sewing information (file

selected in the contents pane, only the selected

name, dimensions, number of stitches, number of

designs are printed.

colors, file path, file properties (.pes files only) and

• If the brand name, thread number or file

the names of thread colors and thread numbers) for

properties is too long, some of the text may not

selected embroidery designs can be outputted.

be printed.

• If [File], then [Print] is clicked, the embroidery

1 In the folder pane, select the folder containing

designs are printed according to the settings

the embroidery designs.

already selected in the [Print Setup] dialog box.

2 Click [File], then [Create CSV].

3 Select the drive and the folder, and then type

Outputting as an HTML file

in the name of the .csv file.

Instead of being printed, the catalog of embroidery

designs can be outputted as an HTML file.

1 In the folder pane, select the folder containing

the embroidery designs.

2 Click [File], then [Create HTML].

3 Select the drive and the folder, and then type

in the name of the HTML file.

4 Click [Save].

Des
ign

Databas

4 To add a title at the top of the file and in the title

bar, type the title in the [Page Title] box.

5 Under [Page Layout], select how the designs

appear on the page.

6 Click [Save].

256

Outputting a Catalog of Embroidery Designs

257

Programmable Stitch Creator

Programmable Stitch Creator allows you to create

and edit stitch patterns, which can then be used

as programmable fill stitches or motif stitches in

both Layout & Editing and Design Center.

Basic Programmable Stitch Creator Operations

Basic Programmable Stitch Creator

Operations

Programmable Stitch Creator is an application for creating, editing and saving

stitch patterns that can be used for programmable fill stitch or motif stitch
sewing. The following two types of patterns can be created in their
corresponding mode.
Fill/stamp stitch patterns

• These patterns can be used as stamp patterns and for sewing with the
programmable fill stitch in Layout & Editing or Design Center.

• These patterns can be created with a single line or with multiple lines. In
addition, these patterns can be used to create an embossing/engraving effect in
sewn regions.

• These patterns are created in Fill/Stamp mode.

engrave

emboss

Motif stitch patterns

• These patterns can be used for sewing lines with the motif stitch and for sewing
regions with the motif stitch, piping stitch and stippling stitch in Layout &
Editing or Design Center.

• These patterns are created with a single line, which gives the look of a single-
stroke drawing, and they are used for decorative machine sewing.

• These patterns are created in Motif mode.

259
Creating Fill/Stamp Stitch Pattern

Creating Fill/Stamp Stitch Pattern

Existing programmable stitch patterns can be edited to create new patterns.

Step 1

Opening a fill/stamp stitch pattern

Step 2

Drawing lines to edit the fill/stamp stitch pattern

Step 3

Applying embossing/engraving effects to the fill/stamp stitch pattern

Pr

Step 4

Saving the edited fil /stamp stitch pattern

o
Step 5

Using the edited fill/stamp stitch patterns in Layout & Editing

grammab

4 Select Fill/Stamp File(*.PAS) in the Files of

Step 1 Opening a fill/stamp stitch

type selector.

pattern

Select the pattern file wave1.pas.

le S

First, we will open a fill/stamp stitch pattern to be

edited. In this example, we will use pattern

itch

wave1.pas.

Cr

1 Click the down arrow in the bottom-left corner

ea

of the [Start] screen to show the [All Apps]

to

view.

r
2 Click [Programmable stitch Creator] under

the title [PE-DESIGN 10] in the screen.

The pattern file can be found at the following

location.

3 Click , and then select [Open] from the

For example, (Drive where PE-DESIGN was

command list.

installed)\Program Files (x86)\Brother\PE-

DESIGN 10\Pattern.

To view the data in the selected folder as

thumbnails in the [Browse] dialog box, click

[Browse].

260
Creating Fill/Stamp Stitch Pattern

5 Repeat the previous operations.

Step 2 Drawing lines to edit the

fill/stamp stitch pattern

1 Click the [Home] tab.

2 Click [Draw Line] in the [Tools] group.

3 Click points (1) through (4).

Step 3 Applying embossing/

2
engraving effects to the

fill/stamp stitch pattern

1 Click (1), and then double-click (2).

Next, click (3), and then double-click (4).

• To remove the last point that was entered, right-

click the mouse button.

cc

"Reshaping a fill/stamp stitch patterns" on

page 264

• The grid width can be changed.

cc

"Changing the grid settings" on page 273

 Lines are drawn along the top and bottom

edges of the Design Page.

4 Double-click (5) (end point).

In order to create an effect, the lines must form a

closed region.

261
Creating Fill/Stamp Stitch Pattern

2 Click [Region (engrave)] in the [Tools]

group, and then click the first and fourth wave

regions.

To remove the embossing/engraving effect, use

the [Region (reset)] tool. Click [Region (reset)] in

the [Tools] group, and then click a region with an

effect applied.

 These regions appear in red and wil be

sewn with short stitches to give the effect of

engraving.

Step 4 Saving the edited fill/

Pr

stamp stitch pattern

og

Fill/stamp stitch patterns are saved in the .pas

ra

format.

mmab

1 Click , and then select [Save As] from the le

command list.

Stitch
Crea

3 Click [Region (emboss)] in the [Tools]

group, and then click the second and fifth

or

wave regions.

2 Select the drive and the folder, and then type

in the file name.

 This region appears in blue and will be

sewn with no dropped stitches to give the

effect of embossing.

When saving a fill/stamp pattern, specify the

size beside [Default Size]. Click [mm] or

[inch] to select the measurement units.

3 Click [Save].

262
Creating Fill/Stamp Stitch Pattern

7 Click the edited fill/stamp stitch pattern, and

Step 5 Using the edited fill/stamp

then click [OK].

stitch patterns in Layout &

 The pattern is applied to the inside regions

Editing

of the embroidery pattern.

1 Start up Layout & Editing.

2 Select an embroidery pattern.

3 From the [Region sew type] selector (in the

[Shapes] tab), select [Prog. Fill Stitch].

4 Display the [Sewing Attributes] pane.

cc

"Specifying sewing attributes" on

page 54

5 Click

below

[Programmable fill] in the

[Region sew] section.

• A fill/stamp stitch pattern can also be applied as

a stamp by using the Stamp Tools.

cc

"Applying and editing stamps" on page 58

• For best results, refer to "Notes on

programmable fill stitches and stamps" on

page 335.

6 Select the drive and folder where the pattern

was saved in Step 4.

263
Editing a Pattern in Fill/Stamp Mode

Editing a Pattern in Fill/Stamp Mode

■ Selecting patterns

■ Scaling patterns

1 Click the [Home] tab.

Drag a handle of the selected pattern to adjust its

size. Drag the rotation handle to rotate the pattern.

2 Click [Select] in the [Tools] group to use the

[Select] tool.

• If the <Shift> key is held down while a handle is

dragged, the pattern is enlarged or reduced from

the center of the pattern.

• Click [Flip Vertically] in the [Flip] group to flip

the selected pattern(s) up/down. Click [Flip

Horizontally] in the [Flip] group to flip the

selected pattern(s) left/right.

Click the pattern.

Pr

1
ogr

ammab

• Using commands other than those mentioned

le S

above, selected patterns can be edited in other

1 Rotation handle

ways, for example, duplicated or deleted.

it

2 Handles

ch

cc

"Menus/Tools" of "Programmable Stitch

4 To select an additional pattern, hold down the

Creator" on page 317.

rea

<Ctrl> key and click the other pattern.

tor

b
■ Reshaping a fill/stamp stitch

• You can also select patterns by dragging the

patterns

pointer across the pattern.

• Hold down the <Ctrl> key and click a selected

1 Click [Select Point] in the [Tools] group.

pattern to deselect it.

■ Moving patterns

Selected patterns can be dragged to move them.

2 Click the broken line.

• To move the pattern horizontally or vertically,

hold down the <Shift> key while dragging it.

• Pressing the arrow keys moves the selected

pattern one grid mark in the direction of the

arrow on the key.

264
Editing a Pattern in Fill/Stamp Mode

3 To edit a point, click the point to select it.

: Selected point

: Unselected point

• To move the point, drag it to the new

location.

• To insert a point, click the line to add a new

point.

 A new point appears selected.

• To delete the point, click

or press
the <Delete> key.

• If a line is composed of two points and you

delete one of them, the entire line is deleted.

• To select multiple points, hold down the <Ctrl>

key while clicking the points, or dragging the

pointer over the points.

• Hold down the <Ctrl> key while pressing the

key or

key. The selection direction

changes to the end or start point.

• Hold down the <Shift> key while dragging the

points. The points are moved horizontally or

vertically.

• Press an arrow key. The points move in the

direction of the arrow on the key.

265
Creating Motif Stitch Pattern

Creating Motif Stitch Pattern

Now, we will create a new motif stitch pattern. Motif stitch patterns are created
in Motif mode.

Step 1

Enter motif mode

Step 2

Shaping a single line to create motif stitch pattern

Step 3

Saving the created motif stitch pattern

Pro

Step 4

Using the edited motif stitch pattern in Layout & Editing

grammab

2 Click [Select Point] in the [Tools] group.

Step 1 Enter motif mode

1 Start up Programmable Stitch Creator.

e Stit

2 Click , and then select [New Motif

ch

Pattern] from the command list.

Crea

tor

Step 2 Shaping a single line to

Blue square: Start point

create motif stitch pattern

Red square: End point

In Motif mode, you can create original patterns by

3 Select (1), then drag the point.

changing the shape of a single line.

The line that moves turns green when moving

1 Click the [Home] tab.

a point.

266
Creating Motif Stitch Pattern

4 Click the line to insert points.

7 Click (6) located between (4) and (5), then

Click (3) located between (1) and (2).

drag the point to (1).

Click (4) located between (3) and (2).

Select (3), then drag the point to (2).

1
1

34

5 Select (4), then drag the point.

6 Click between (2) and (4) to insert point (5),

and then drag point (5).

• To move the point horizontally or vertically, hold

down the <Shift> key while dragging it.

• Pressing the arrow keys moves the selected

point one grid mark in the direction of the arrow

on the key. If the grid is not displayed, the

pattern moves a distance smaller than the

smallest grid interval in the direction of the arrow

on the key.

• To delete a selected point, press the <Delete>

key.

• These patterns can be applied in line sewing

and region sewing in Layout & Editing, and

region sewing in Design Center.

267
Creating Motif Stitch Pattern

Step 3 Saving the created motif

5 Click

below

[Motif] in the [Line sew]

section.

stitch pattern

Motif stitch patterns are saved in the .pmf format.

1 Click , and then select [Save As] from the

command list.

Pr

6 Select the drive and folder where the pattern o

was saved in Step 3.

gr

2 Select the drive and the folder, and then type

ammab

in the file name.

le Stitch

Crea

tor

7 Click the created motif stitch pattern, and then

click [OK].

 When saving a motif pattern, specify the

 The pattern is applied to the outlines of the

size beside [Default Size]. Click [mm] or

embroidery pattern.

[inch] to select the measurement units.

3 Click [Save].

Step 4 Using the edited motif

stitch pattern in Layout &

Editing

1 Start up Layout & Editing.

2 Select an embroidery pattern.

3 From the [Line sew type] selector (in the

[Shapes] tab), select [Motif Stitch].

4 Display the [Sewing Attributes] pane.

A motif stitch pattern can be used when the motif

stitch, piping stitch or stippling stitch has been

cc

"Specifying sewing attributes" on

page 54

selected as the sew type of a region.

268
Editing a Pattern in Motif Mode

Editing a Pattern in Motif Mode

■ Moving and deleting several

■ Scaling patterns

points at a time

1 Click

in

the

[Tools] group.

1 Click the [Home] tab.

2 Click [Select Point] in the [Tools] group.

2 Drag the handle to adjust the selected

pattern(s) to the desired size.

Blue square: Start point

• I f the <Shift> key is held down while a handle is

Red square: End point

dragged, the pattern is enlarged or reduced from

the center of the pattern.

3 To select a single point, click an empty square.

• To flip the pattern along a vertical axis, click

To select multiple points, hold down the

[Flip Vertically] in the [Flip] group.

<Ctrl> key while clicking the points, or

• To flip the pattern along a horizontal axis, click

dragging the pointer over the points.

[Flip Horizontally] in the [Flip] group.

: Selected point

: Unselected point

Hold down the <Ctrl> key while pressing the

key or

key. The selection direction changes

to the end or start point.

4 Edit the points.

• To move the points, drag them to the

desired location.

• To delete the point, click

or press

the <Delete> key.

The start point (blue square) and end point (red

square) can not be deleted.

269

Programmable Stitch Creator Window

Programmable Stitch Creator Window

3
1

Programmab

le S

titch

Crea

or

1 Application button

2 Ribbon

3 Quick Access Toolbar

4 Help button

5 Preview window (cc p. 272 )

Shows how the pattern will be sewn.

6 Design Page

7 Work area
8 Status Bar

cc

"Understanding Windows" on page 11

270
Opening a Template

Opening a Template

Opening an image in the

Changing the density

background

background image

1 Click the [View] tab.

1 Drag the slider in the [Template] group, or

2 Click [Open Template] in the [Template]

click

or .

group.

3 Select the drive, the folder and the file, and

then click [Open] or double-click the file's

Hide (off)

50% 100%
icon.

25%

75%

• This function is not available if no template

image has been imported into the work area.

• Press the shortcut key <F6> to switch between

displaying the image (On (100%)) to displaying

it faded at each density (75%, 50% and 25%) to

hiding the image (Off).

• Only one image can be added to the work area.

If you try to display a different image, it wil

replace the previous one.

• There are many different types of files that can

be opened.

cc

"Image file formats" on page 150

271
Preview Window
Preview Window

Saving Patterns

1 Click the [View] tab.

Overwriting

2 To switch between displaying and hiding the

[Preview] window, select or unselect the

Click

, and then select [Save] from the

[Preview Window] check box in the [View]

command list.

group.

Prog

 If no file name has been specified or if the

ra

In Motif mode

file cannot be found, the [Save As] dialog

mmab

box appears.

le

Saving with a new name

Stit
In Fill/Stamp mode

The files are saved as.pas files in Fill/Stamp mode,

ch

and as .pmf files in Motif mode.

Crea

1 Click , and then select [Save As] from the to

command list.

2 Select the drive and the folder, and then type

in the file name.

 When saving a motif pattern, specify the

size beside [Default Size]. Click [mm] or

[inch] to select the measurement units.

272

Changing the Settings

3 Click [Save].
Changing the

Settings

Saved files can be used in Layout & Editing or

Design Center.

Changing the grid settings

cc

"Using the edited fill/stamp stitch patterns in

Layout & Editing" on page 263 and "Using the

1 Click the [View] tab.

edited motif stitch pattern in Layout & Editing"

on page 268

2 Select the desired spacing of the grid lines

from [Interval] in the [Grid] group.

None

No grid is displayed.

Narrow

The spacing of the grid lines is changed to 1/

32 of the Design Page width.

Medium

The spacing of the grid lines is changed to 1/

16 of the Design Page width.

Wide

The spacing of the grid lines is changed to 1/8

of the Design Page width.

273

Font Creator

User-defined fonts can be created using Font

Creator. These fonts can be recalled to be used in

Layout & Editing.

Basic Font Creator Operations

Basic Font Creator Operations

With Font Creator, user-defined font characters that can be used in Layout &
Editing can be created and edited. Using these custom characters, original
embroidery patterns can be created.

Step 1

Selecting a character to be created

Step 2

Opening a background image

Step 3

Creating a font character pattern

Step 4
Creating other font character patterns

Step 5

Save the font character pattern

Step 6

Creating an embroidery pattern using the created font characters

Step 1 Selecting a character to be

Step 2 Opening a background

created

image

1 Click the down arrow in the bottom-left corner

1 Click the [View] tab.

of the [Start] screen to show the [All Apps]

view.

2 Click [Open] in the [Template] group, and

then select [Select Image File] from the list.

2 Click [Font Creator] under the title [PE-

DESIGN 10] in the screen.

3 Click the [Home] tab.

4 Click the [Select Character] box in the

[Character] group, and then select "T" from

the list.
3 Import the Capital_T.bmp.

The image file can be found at the following

location.

Documents (My documents)\PE-DESIGN

10\Sample\Font Creator\Font Template

275
Basic Font Creator Operations

6 Click in the [Tools] group, and then drag

the red triangle icons to move the set lines so

b
that they are aligned with the left and right of

There are many different types of files that can be

the character.

opened.

cc

"Image file formats" on page 150

4 Move the character so that the top aligns with

the [Capital Line]. To adjust the height of the

character, drag a handle to adjust the height

between the [Capital Line] and the [Base

Line].

1 Set Line

7 Click the [View] tab.

8 In the [Template] group, drag the slider (or

click

or

) to change the density of the

template image to "25%".

1 Capital Line

2 Handles

3 Base Line

Fo

4 Set Line

nt Cre

• Red lines are added above, below and to the left

tor

and right of the sample image. Use these lines

as guides for adjusting the [Base Line], [Capital

Hide (off) 50%

100%

Line] and [Set Lines].

• If the handles have disappeared, right-click the

25% 75%

image, and then click [Modify Template] in the

menu that appeared.

b

• This function is not available if no template

Click the [Home] tab.

image has been imported into the work area.

• Press the shortcut key <F6> to switch between

displaying the image (On (100%)) to displaying

it faded at each density (75%, 50% and 25%) to

hiding the image (Off).

Step 3 Creating a font character

pattern

1 Click the [Home] tab.

276
Basic Font Creator Operations

2 Click the [Manual Punch] in the [Tools]

3 Click

, and then click in the Design Page

group, and then select the desired tool from

[Manual Punching Tools].

to specify points (1) (start point) through (4).

1
3

: Straight block-type punching patterns

(region sewing).

(Shortcut key: <Z> )

4 Click [Manual Punch], select

, and then

: Curved block-type punching patterns

click point (5) through (7).

(region sewing)

(Shortcut key: <X> )

: Semi-automatically created straight

block-type punching pattern

By semi-automatically tracing, points

can be specified along the lines of a

template.

(Shortcut key: <C> )

: Running-type punching pattern (line

sewing)

(Shortcut key: <V> )

5 Click [Manual Punch], select

, and then

click points (8) through (10).

: Feed-type punching pattern (jump

stitches)

(Shortcut key: <B> )

10

• When entering points, you can switch between

the various tools. This is very easy if the shortcut

keys are used.

• A template image is needed in order to use the

semi-automatic block-type punch tool. If there is

no image, this tool wil create a punching pattern

like the straight block-type punch tool. In

addition, this tool cannot be used if a TrueType

font is used as the template.

• Once the pattern is drawn, you can still

transform straight block-type patterns into

curved block-type patterns and vice versa.

cc

For details, refer to "To Straight/To Curve" on

page 288

277
Basic Font Creator Operations

6 Click [Manual Punch], select

, and then

Step 4 Creating other font

click point (11).

character patterns

1 Click the [Home] tab.

11

2 Click the [Select Character] box in the

[Character] group, and then select "g" from

the list.

7 Click [Manual Punch], select

, and then

3 Import file Small_g.bmp in the same way that

click points (12) through (13).

"T" was imported.

12

13

4 In the same way that "T" was adjusted,

change the character size and position, and

Fo

then drag the red triangle icons to move the

nt Cre

8 Double-click point (14) (the last point of the

set line so that they are aligned with the left

entire pattern), or click point (14) and press the

and right of the character.

a
<Enter> key.

tor

14

1 Set Line

If the red lines are not shown, change the

density of the template image.

To remove the last point that was entered, right-

click the mouse button, or press the

<BackSpace> key.

278
Basic Font Creator Operations

5 Click in the [Tools] group, and then drag

7 Click [Manual Punch], select

, and then

the blue triangle icons to move the mean line

click points (8) through (24).

and descender line so that they are aligned

with the top and bottom of the character.

1

16

15

13

11

14

10

12

1 Mean Line

2 Descender Line

20

18

22

Click [Manual Punch], select

, and then

19

click points (1) through (7).

17

24

21

23

8 Click [Manual Punch], select

, and then

click points (25) through (26).

26

25

279
Basic Font Creator Operations

9 Click [Manual Punch], select

, and then

Step 5 Save the font character

click points (27) through (33).

pattern

27

1 Click , and then select [Save] from the

29

command list.

28

31

30

33

32

2 Select the [MyFont] folder at the following

location.

10 Click [Manual Punch], select

, and then

click points (34) through (38).

For example, (Drive where PE-DESIGN was

38

Fo

installed)\Program Files (x86)\Brother\PE-

34
nt Cre

37

DESIGN 10\MyFont.

36

35

And then type in the file name. For this

example, type in the name "My font 1".

tor

11

Click [Save].

Click [Manual Punch] and select

Next,

click points (39) through (46), and then

double-click point (47) (end point), or click

point (47) and press the <Enter> key.

• The created font is saved in the [MyFont] folder

at the following location.

• The font will not be usable in the Layout &

Editing if it's stored in a different folder.

For example, (Drive where PE-DESIGN was

installed)\Program Files (x86)\Brother\PE-

DESIGN 10\MyFont.

• If any part of the character pattern extends off

the Design Page, a message appears. Edit the

character pattern so that no part extends off the

Design Page, and then save it again.

47

39

40

46

44

42

41

45

43

If the background image is displayed, the

information for the background image will be

saved with the font file. The next time that the font

file is opened, the background image is displayed.

280
Basic Font Creator Operations

5 Click in the Design Page.

Step 6 Creating an embroidery

Input the text, and then press <Enter> the key

pattern using the created

or click the Design Page.

font characters

1 Start up Layout & Editing.

If Layout & Editing is already started, exit it, and

then start it again. The new font is detected when

the application starts up.

2 Click the [Home] tab.

3 Click [Text] in the [Tools] group, and then

select

from

[Text Tools].

4 Click in the Font selector, and then select

"My font 1".

cc

"Creating Embroidery Patterns

Containing Text" on page 100

Fonts created in Font Creator appear with the

icon in front of the font name.

Since fonts for only "T" and "g" were created in the

previous examples ("A", "B", "C", etc. were not

created), only these characters appear in the

sample when [Font] selector is clicked.

281
Font Creator Window

Font Creator Window

Fo

nt Cre

10

ator

1 Application button

2 Ribbon

3 Quick Access Toolbar

4 Help button

5 Preview Window (cc p. 289)

Shows how the stitch pattern will be sewn.

6 Design Page

7 Guidelines (fixed) (cc p. 283)

8 Guidelines (movable) (cc p. 283)

9 Work area

10 Status Bar

cc

"Understanding Windows" on page 11

282

Font Creator Window

About the Design Page

guidelines

• The heights and widths specified for the [Base

Line], [Capital Line] and [Set Lines] are the

The standard guidelines for creating fonts are

reference mask for creating the font character.

shown in the Design Pages. The contents of each of

• When characters created with Font Creator are

the guidelines are as shown below.

imported into Layout & Editing, the width and

height of the characters will be in the following

area.

 Character height: from Base Line a to

Capital Line b

 Character width: from Set Line (Left) f to Set

Line (Right) g

• In order to align the height of the characters, the

c
[Ascender Line], [Mean Line] and [Descender

Line] appear the same with all characters.

Therefore, if the height of any of these lines is

changed, the setting is maintained, even when a

different character is selected to be edited.

• The widths of the [Set Lines] can be set

separately for each character.

1 Triangle icon

a Base Line

b Capital Line

The font's standard height will be from the

Base Line to the Capital Line line. These

line cannot be moved.

c Mean Line

When in lower case, the standard height

of the font will be from the Base Line to

this line. It can be moved by dragging the

triangle icon on the right edge.

d Descender Line

This line is the standard for characters

with parts that hang down (descenders)

such as "g" and "y". It can be moved by

dragging the triangle icon on the right

edge.

e Ascender Line

This line is the standard for characters

with parts that extended above

(ascenders) such as the accent mark. It

can be moved by dragging the triangle

icon on the right edge.

f Set Line (Left)

g Set Line (Right)

This line will be the font width. The font

width can be adjusted by dragging the

triangle icon on the bottom edge.

283
Opening a File

Opening a File

Creating a new font

Opening a font file

Click

, and then select [New] from the command

1 Click , and then select [Open] from the

list.

command list.

2 The created font is saved in the [MyFont]

folder at the following location.

(Drive where PE-DESIGN was

installed)\Program Files (x86)\Brother\PE-

DESIGN 10\MyFont

Fo

nt Cre

at

3 To open a file, select it, and then click [Open], or

or double-click the file's icon.

284
Selecting a Character and Preparing the Template

Selecting a Character and Preparing the

Template

Selecting the character to

be created

• Characters where pattern has already been

created appear with a blue background.

■ Selecting from the selector

• The blank box in the upper-left corner is a space.

Click this box to select a space.

1 Click the [Home] tab.

2 Click the left or right arrow buttons of the

[Select Character] box in the [Character]

group to select a character before or after the

If any part of the character pattern extends off the

one that is currently displayed.

Design Page when a different character is

selected, a message appears. Before selecting a

different character, edit the character pattern so

that no part extends off the Design Page.

■ Adding/deleting registered

characters

■ Selecting from a character list

Click [Add/Remove Characters] in the

Click the [Select Character] box in the

[Character] group.

[Character] group.

2 From the keyboard, enter the character to be

registered.

2 Click the character to be created.

285
Selecting a Character and Preparing the Template

3 Click [Add].
3 From the [Font] selector, select the font. From

the [Style] selector, select the character style.

And then click [OK].

4 To delete a registered character, select the

character, and then click [Remove].

The box is selected in red. Each click of the

character switches between selecting and

deselecting it.

5 When the settings can be applied, click [OK].

If a character is registered even though a font has

not been created, the information for the registered

character is saved in a font file.

While working on a character in a font, the

same TrueType font appears until a different

Fo

template is selected for the background. Each

nt Cre

Opening a template

time a different character is selected in the

[Select Character] box, the template of the

(TrueType font)

character in the same TrueType font appears.

ator

1 Click the [View] tab.

2 Click [Open] in the [Template] group, and

• If the character selected in the [Select

then select [Select TrueType Font] from the

Character] box is not available in the TrueType

list.

font, " ? " appears as the template.

• If a TrueType font was selected as the template,

it cannot be moved or resized.

• In this case, it can automatically be converted to

a font character pattern.

cc

"Automatically converting TrueType fonts" on

page 287.

• In addition, the character cannot be drawn with

the semi-automatic block-type punch tool.

286
Creating a Font Character Pattern
Creating a Font Character Pattern

4 To select an additional pattern, hold down the

Automatically converting

<Ctrl> key and click the other pattern.

TrueType fonts

1 Open the TrueType font to be used as a

• You can also select patterns by dragging the

template.

pointer across the pattern.

cc

"Opening a template (TrueType font)" on

• Hold down the <Ctrl> key and click a selected

page 286.

pattern to deselect it.

2 Click the [Home] tab.

3 Click [Convert from TrueType] in the [Edit/

■ Moving patterns

Arrange] group.

Selected patterns can be dragged to move them.

b
• To move the pattern horizontally or vertically,

hold down the <Shift> key while dragging it.

• Pressing the arrow keys moves the selected

4 If a TrueType font has not been selected for

pattern one grid mark in the direction of the

the template, the [Select TrueType Font]

arrow on the key. If the grid is not displayed, the

pattern moves a distance smaller than the

dialog box appears.

smallest grid interval in the direction of the arrow

on the key.

Editing Font Character

Patterns

■ Scaling patterns

■ Selecting patterns

Drag a handle of the selected pattern to adjust its

1 Click the [Home] tab.

size. Drag the rotation handle to rotate the pattern.

2 Click in the [Tools] group to use the

[Select] tool.
• I f the <Shift> key is held down while a handle is

dragged, the pattern is enlarged or reduced from

the center of the pattern.

• Click [Flip] in the [Edit/Arrange] group, and

then select [Flip Vertically] to flip the selected

pattern(s) up/down.

Select [Flip Horizontally] to flip the selected

pattern(s) left/right.

3 Click the pattern.

• Using commands other than those mentioned

above, selected patterns can be edited in other

ways, for example, duplicated or deleted.

cc

"Menus/Tools" of "Font Creator" on page 318.

1 Rotation handle

2 Handles

287
Editing the Points of a Font Character Pattern

Editing the Points of a Font Character

Pattern

Editing points and

To Straight/To Curve

reshaping patterns

1 Select the point(s).

1 Click the [Home] tab.

2 Click [Point] in the [Edit/Arrange] group, and

then select the desired command from the list.

Click [Select Point] in the [Tools] group.

3 Click the pattern.

4 To edit a point, click the point to select it.

cc

For details on the commands To Straight,

To Curve, To Smooth, To Symmetry and

To Cusp, "Transforming straight lines

into curves or curves into straight lines"

on page 70 and "Changing the curve

type" on page 70.

These commands are not available with patterns

Fo
entered using the [Running] or [Feed] tools.

nt Cre

1 Unselected point

2 Selected point

tor

• To move the point, drag it to the new

location.

• To insert a point, click the line to add a new

point.

 A new point appears selected (as a

small black square or circle).

• To delete the point, click

or press

the <Delete> key.

288
Checking the Created Font Patterns

Checking the Created Font Patterns

: To move back one position in the

Checking and editing the

sewing order.

sewing order

: To move to the end of the sewing

1 Click the [Home] tab.

order.

2 Click [Sewing Order] in the [Edit/Arrange]

To change the sewing order, click [OK].

group.
Previewing the embroidery

pattern

1 Click the [View] tab.

2 To switch between displaying and hiding the

[Preview Window], select or unselect the

[Preview Window] check box in the [View]

group.

: Click to enlarge each pattern to fill its

frame.

3 Select a pattern in the [Sewing Order] dialog

box.

4 The sewing order can be changed by

selecting the frame containing the pattern that

you want to move, then dragging the frame to

the new location. A vertical red line appears,

indicating the position where the frame is

being moved.

An alternative method for moving the frames is by

clicking the buttons at the bottom of the dialog box.

: To move to the beginning of the

sewing order.
: To move ahead one position in the

sewing order.

289

Checking the Created Font Patterns

Checking and selecting

from the list of created

characters

A list of characters included in the font file currently

being edited can be viewed.

1 Click the [Home] tab.

2 Click [Browse Characters] in the

[Character] group.

Fo

nt Cre

To select a character, click the character, and then

at

click [Select].

or

290
Saving Font Character Patterns

Saving Font Character Patterns

2 Select the [MyFont] folder at the following

Overwriting
location.

Click

, and then select [Save] from the

command list.

For example, (Drive where PE-DESIGN was

installed)\Program Files (x86)\Brother\PE-

 If no file name has been specified or if the

DESIGN 10\MyFont

file cannot be found, the [Save As] dialog

And then type in the file name, then click [Save].

box appears.

If any part of the character pattern extends off the

• The font will not be usable in the Layout &

Design Page, a message appears. Edit the

Editing if it's stored in a different folder.

character pattern so that no part extends off the

• The created font is saved in the [MyFont] folder

Design Page, and then save it again.

at the following location.

• Saved files can be used in Layout & Editing.

Saving with a new name

cc

"Creating an embroidery pattern using the

created font characters" on page 281

The font character patterns are saved as .pef files.

• If Layout & Editing has already started up when

a new character is saved in Font Creator, that

character will not appear in the [Font] selector

Click

, and then select [Save As] from the

list in Layout & Editing. In this case, exit Layout

command list.

& Editing, and then start it up again.

291
Changing the Settings
Changing the Settings

Changing the drawing

Scaling/Moving the

mode

background image

There are two drawing modes in Font Creator.

Click [Modify Template] in the [Template] group.

• Fill mode

Blocks appear filled in. In this mode, the

overlapping positions of patterns can be

viewed better.

 The background image is selected.

The background image can be moved or

resized in the same way that font character

patterns are edited.

cc

"Editing Font Character Patterns" on

page 287.

The background image cannot be scaled or moved

• Outline mode (Fill mode Off)

if a TrueType font is used as the template.

Blocks do not appear filled in. In this mode,

points can be edited more easily.

Fo

nt Cre

ator

Perform the operation described below to switch

between these modes.

Click the [View] tab.

Click [Fill Mode] in the [View] group.

292

Changing the Settings

Changing the grid settings

1 Click the [View] tab.

2 Specify the grid settings in the [Grid] group.

a To display the grid, select the [Show

Grid] check box.

b To display the grid as solid lines, select

the [with Axes] check box.

c In the [Interval] box, select the grid

spacing.

d To input the font in a uniform thickness or

match vertical and horizontal positions,

select the [Snap to Grid] check box.

The pointer will move by the amount set in

[Interval] box.

The snap feature works whether or not the grid is

displayed.

293

Supplement
This section provides hints and detailed

techniques for creating even more attractive

embroidery.

For Basic Operations

For Basic Operations

Enlarging/Reducing Stitch

Sewing Direction

Patterns

In order to limit pulling or puckering, select a stitch

direction perpendicular to the larger edge of the

Imported stitch patterns can be enlarged or reduced

area.

in Layout & Editing in the following three ways.

1 Stitch patterns can be simply enlarged/reduced.

2 Stitch patterns can be enlarged/reduced while

the <Ctrl> key is held down.

Pulling or puckering more likely to occur

3 Using the [Convert to Blocks] tools, stitch

patterns can be enlarged/reduced after being

converted to a group of shape patterns with

multiple sewing direction lines.

With method 1, the stitching will become more

dense or light without the number of stitches sewn

Pulling or puckering less likely to occur

changing. In other words, greatly enlarging or

reducing the pattern changes the quality of the

Sewing Order

embroidery since the thread density is adjusted.

Use this method when only slightly enlarging/

After creating an embroidery pattern made of

reducing the stitch pattern.

several different parts (in Layout & Editing or Design

With method 2, the size of the pattern is changed

Center), be sure to check the sewing order and

while maintaining the thread density and needle

correct it if necessary.

drop point pattern. However, if the original thread

With Layout & Editing, the default sewing order is

density and needle drop point pattern in the stitch

the order in which the elements are drawn.

pattern are not uniform, the thread density and

With Design Center, the default sewing order is the

needle drop point pattern may not be maintained,

order in which the sewing attributes are applied.

even by using this method. Enlarge/reduce the

pattern while checking the preview. Do not use this

Be careful when changing the sewing order since

method when only slightly enlarging/reducing the

overlapping areas may be incorrectly positioned.

stitch pattern.

With method 3, the thread density is maintained

while the pattern is enlarged/reduced. However, the

needle drop point pattern is not entirely maintained.

Use this method when you wish to change the

stitching or shape. Do not use this method when

only slightly enlarging/reducing the stitch pattern.

This software allows you to create a wide variety of

embroidery patterns and supports wider ranges for

the setting of the sewing attributes (thread density,

sewing pitch, etc.). However, the final result also

depends on your particular embroidery machine

model. We recommend that you make a trial

sewing sample with your sewing data before

sewing on the final material. Remember to sew

your trial sample on the same type of fabric as your

final material and to use the same needle and the

same machine embroidery thread.

295

For Basic Operations

Sewing Wide Areas

• For best sewing results, set [Under sewing] to

[On] when sewing wide regions.

cc

For more details, refer to "Under sewing"

on page 331.

• Changing the [Sewing Direction] setting

prevents pulling-in or puckering of the stitching.

• When embroidering, use stabilizer material

specifically for embroidering. Always use

stabilizer material when embroidering lightweight

or stretch fabrics, otherwise the needle may bend

or break, the stitching may pull and pucker, or the

pattern may become misaligned.

• When satin stitching is sewn in a wide area, the

stitched area may shrink after sewing, depending

on the material and the type of thread used. If this

happens, switch to this alternate method: Select

the fill stitch and use stabilizer material on the

reverse side of the fabric.

Pattern

Supple

me

nt

After sewing

296
On Settings

On Settings

If necessary, change settings for the

Jump Stitch and Jump

following.

Stitch Trimming

• Automatically turning off trimming when the

jump stitch length is less than that

■ Machine thread trimming

specified.

according to settings specified in

cc

"Jump Stitch Trimming" on page 87 and

Layout & Editing

"About Minimum jump stitch length for

thread trimming" on page 87

If

is selected in the [Design Settings] dialog

• Default setting for turning on/off jump stitch

box of Layout & Editing, trimming can be turned on

trimming when a new embroidery pattern is

or off at each jump stitch location.

created.

These settings are saved in embroidery data files

(.pes).

cc

"Adding jump stitch trimming to new

If you are using our multi-needle embroidery

patterns" on page 302

machine with the Jump Stitch Trimming function

turned on to embroider this imported .pes file, the

Stitching

Jump stitch

Stitching

machine will trim the thread according to the PES

data settings.

For details on the jump stitch trimming function of

the machine, refer to the Operation Manual

provided with your embroidery machine.

These settings are applied only when

embroidering with our multi-needle embroidery

machines. These settings are not applied with any

■ Specifying trimming settings in

other embroidery machine.

Layout & Editing

1 Select

in

the

[Design Settings] dialog

box.

cc

"Specifying the Design Page Settings" on

page 14

2 Display the trimming locations in Layout &

Editing.

cc

Memo of "Changing the display of the

embroidery design" on page 78

3 Turn on/off jump stitch trimming for each

embroidery pattern.

cc

"Jump Stitch Trimming" on page 87

297
Changing Various Settings

Changing Various Settings

■ Quick Access Toolbar commands

Customizing the window

■ Quick Access Toolbar/Ribbon

A menu appears when

in the [Quick Access

Toolbar] is clicked.

The first time this application is started up, the

following commands appear in the Quick Access

Toolbar (A).

: New

: Undo

Click [More commands] to add or remove the

: Open

: Redo

commands appearing in the list of the [Quick

Access Toolbar].

: Save

: Wizard

Click [Show Below the Ribbon] to move the

[Quick Access Toolbar] below the Ribbon. To

: Zoom in

return it to its original position, display the menu as

described above, and then click [Show Above the

Ribbon].

Click
, then select or unselect the check boxes

beside the commands to switch between displaying

If a check mark appears beside [Minimize the

and hiding them. When the check mark is cleared,

Ribbon], the Ribbon is minimized. When a tab is

the command is hidden. Alternatively, changes to

clicked, the Ribbon appears. After a command is

the commands listed in the [Quick Access

selected, the Ribbon is minimized again. To restore

Toolbar] can be specified in the [Options] dialog

it to its original display, clear the check mark.

box and all applied at the same time.

Example: With [Show Below the Ribbon] selected

cc

"Customizing Quick Access Toolbar" on

and a check mark beside [Minimize the Ribbon]

page 300

Supple

■ Import/Color/Sewing Attributes/

me

Text Attributes pane, Sewing

Order pane and Stitch Simulator

nt

pane

Floating

Each tab or the entire pane can be undocked to

become a dialog box that can be moved around the

screen.

• Double-click the title bar of the pane, or tab.

• Right-click the pane or tab, and then click

[Floating].

• Drag a tab out of the pane.

298
Changing Various Settings

Docking

■ Using access keys

Each pane can be docked back to the window.

When the <Alt> key is pressed, a KeyTip (label

• Double-click the title bar.

showing the letter of the access key) appears on

• Right-click the pane, and then click [Docking].

each command. On the keyboard, press the key

corresponding to the command that you wish to use.

• Drag the title bar to the location where the pane

will be docked.

Hide

When a tab or a pane is no longer needed, it can be

hidden.

• Click

in the upper-right corner of the dialog

box.

• Right-click the tab or dialog box, and then click

[Hide].

To stop using the access keys and hide the

KeyTips, press the <Alt> key.

• To hide the tab, click [View] tab in the Ribbon,

and then click the name in the [View] tab. To

display the tab again, perform the same

operation.

Auto Hide

When a pane is temporarily not needed, it

can be moved to the side bar, then

displayed by clicking it or positioning the

pointer over it. The pane is automatically

hidden again when it is no longer being

used, for example, when you click

anywhere outside of the pane.

• Right-click the tab or the title bar of the pane, and

then click [Auto Hide].

• In the upper-right corner of the pane, click

.
To cancel Auto Hide, right-click the title bar, and

then click [Auto Hide], or simply click

in the title

bar.

• The Stitch Simulator pane cannot be temporarily

hidden (Auto Hide).

• These panes can be returned to their default

displays.

cc

"Customizing Shortcut keys" on page 301

299
Changing Various Settings

1 Click [Customize].

Changing options settings

From the [Options] dialog box, the commands

appearing in the [Quick Access Toolbar] and

settings for the application's appearance can be

selected, and also the settings on shortcut keys,

jump stitches, thread charts can be specified or

changed. Follow the procedure described below to

display the [Options] dialog box.

Click

, and then click [Options] on the bottom of

the window.

2 Repeat the following operations until the

desired commands are displayed.

a Choose commands from selector

Select a command category.

b Commands list

Select the command to be added.

c Add button

Selected command is added.

The command appears in A.

d Remove button

Selected command is removed.

The command is removed from A.

Select an icon in A, and then click the

buttons at to move it to the desired

The [Options] dialog box can also be displayed

position.

using either of the following methods.

f Reset button

• Click

at the right end of the Quick Access

Reverting to the default commands.

upple

Toolbar, and then click [More Commands].

Settings for the following can also be specified

• Click [Option] in the upper-right corner of the

from this dialog box.

me
window, and then click [Options].

g Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the

nt

Ribbon

Select where the Quick Access Toolbar is

■ Customizing Quick Access

displayed. Select the check box to display

the Quick Access Toolbar below the

Toolbar

Ribbon.

3 After the settings have been specified, click

[OK] to apply them.

1 Quick Access Toolbar

300
Changing Various Settings

■ Customizing Shortcut keys

5 Click [OK] in the [Options] dialog box.

1 Click [Customize] in the command list, then

■ Editing user thread charts

[Customize] beside [Keyboard shortcuts].

For detailed instructions, see "Editing user thread

color lists" on page 192.

■ Specifying the number of jumps in

embroidery design of the DST

format
With the DST format, you can specify whether or not

the jump stitches are trimmed according to the

number of jump codes. The number of codes differs

depending on the embroidery machine being used.

Click [DST Settings] in the command list, specify

2 In the [Categories] list, select a command

the number of jumps, and then click [OK].

category. Then, in the [Commands] list,

To specify a setting for importing, enter a value

select the command whose shortcut keys are

beside [DST Import Setting]. To specify a setting

to be specified.

for exporting, enter a value beside [DST Export

Setting].

DST Import Setting

If the number of consecutive jumps in the DST

f

file is less than the number of jumps specified

here, those consecutive jumps will be

 The default shortcut keys appear in the

replaced with a stitch.

[Current Keys] box a.

If the number of consecutive jumps in the DST

file is greater than or equal to the number of

Use the keyboard to record the new shortcut

jumps specified here, those jumps will be

keys in the [Press new shortcut key] b box,

replaced with a jump stitch where the thread is

and then click [Assign] d. The new shortcut

trimmed.

keys appear in the [Current Keys] box a.

DST Export Setting

 Usage information about the entered key

When .pes files are output, jump stitches with

combination appears. If the key

thread trimming are replaced with more

combination has already been assigned to

consecutive jump codes than the specified

another command, the name of that

number of jumps.

command appears at c.

To remove the default or specified shortcut

keys, select the shortcut keys in a, and then

click [Remove] e.

To revert to the default settings, click [Reset

All] f.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the desired shortcut

keys have been specified for the commands,

and then click [Close].

301
Changing Various Settings

■ Adding jump stitch trimming to

■ Changing the system unit

new patterns

For detailed instructions, see "System unit" on

When creating a new embroidery pattern for our

page 20.

multi-needle embroidery machines, you can specify

whether or not to add jump stitch trimming to the

pattern.

■ Adjusting the screen calibration

For detailed instructions, see "Adjusting on-screen

measurements (Screen Calibration)" on page 19

These settings are applied only when

embroidering with our multi-needle embroidery

■ Customizing User Interface

machines. Before these settings can be specified,

Settings

select

under

[Machine Type] in the

The color scheme of the applications can be

[Design Settings] dialog box.

selected.

Click [User Interface Settings] in the command list,

Click [Jump Stitch Trimming] in the command list,

select the desired color scheme from [Application

select the [Add jump stitch trimming to the

Color], and then click [OK].

entered patterns.] check box, and then click [OK].

With the [Show Status Bar] check box, select

whether to display or hide the status bar. To display

When the check box is selected, scissors

the status bar, select the check box.

icon appear beside the frames to indicate

jump stitch trimmings are applied.

If the [Reset Pane Position] button is clicked, the

docked panes ([Import]/[Color]/[Sewing

Attributes]/[Text Attributes] panes, [Sewing

Supple

Order] pane and [Stitch Simulator] pane) return to

their default displays after the application is

restarted.

me

nt

1 Scissors icon

302
For Making an Effective Use of This Application

For Making an Effective Use of This

Application

7 Paste the characters into the text field in the

Converting Characters

[Text Attributes] pane, and then press the

<Enter> key.

(Japanese, Chinese,

Korean, etc) to Embroidery

Patterns

Embroidery patterns can be created from various

characters, such as Japanese, Chinese, Korean

etc, using TrueType fonts.

For this example, we will create an embroidery

pattern from Japanese characters.

1 Start up Layout & Editing.

2 Select a Text tool, and then select a Japanese

TrueType font (for example, "MS Gothic").

3 Display a character code table different from

the one that appeared in step 2. ([Start] – [All

Programs] – [Accessories] – [System

Tools] – [Character Map])

4 Select [MS Gothic] from the [Font] list in

[Character Map], and then select the

If Japanese or Korean can be entered directly from

[Advanced view] check box. Next, select

the computer keyboard, those characters can be

[Windows]: [Japanese] from the [Character

entered directly into the [Edit Text Letters] dialog

set] list, select the desired character, and then

box.

click [Select].

(This example shows the Japanese hiragana

for the word meaning "Good Afternoon".)

Fonts Suitable for

Embroidering

■ When converting TrueType fonts

to embroidery patterns

For best results when converting TrueType fonts to

embroidery patterns, select a font where all lines are

as thick as possible, such as with a Block font.

5 After selecting all of the desired characters,

click [Copy] to copy the characters.

6 Click in the Design Page where you want to

enter the text.

303
For Making an Effective Use of This Application

Displaying the embroidery

designs in PES format as

thumbnails

Embroidery files in PES format can be viewed as

thumbnails with Explorer (Windows® Explorer in

Windows® 7 and File Explorer in Windows® 8.1). It

helps you to manage embroidery designs more

easily.

To display information on embroidery files, click

To display embroidery files by using thumbnails,

click .

Supple

me

nt

304

For Making an Effective Use of This Application

305

Menus/Tools and Reference

This section lists the various Ribbon commands

and tools in each application window. For details

on each command and tool, refer to the

corresponding page in this manual.

This section also contains font samples and

information on the various sewing attributes.

Layout & Editing

Layout & Editing

Application button menu

No.

Menu
Reference

New

p. 90

Open

p. 90

Save

p. 95

Save As

p. 95

Print

p. 96

5
6

Design Property

p. 88

Design Settings

p. 14

Fabric Selector

p. 17

Wizard

p. 10

10

Export

p. 95

Ribbon menu tabs

■ Home tab

0AB

13

46

FH

KL

No.

Menu

Reference
No.

Menu

Reference

Select Tools

p. 31

13

Pan

p. 77

Cut

14

Measure

p. 78

Copy

15

Import Patterns

p. 91
4

Paste

p. 55

16

Arrange

p. 32

Duplicate

17

Emboss/Engrave

p. 57

Arrange Copy Tools

p. 35

18

Modify Overlap

p. 40

Delete

—
19

Group

p. 39

Text Tools

p. 106

20

Applique Wizard

p. 161

Shapes Tools

p. 60

21

Embroidered Patch Wizard

p. 167

10

Zoom in

p. 77

22

Cutwork Wizard

p. 170
11

Zoon out

p. 77

23

Sew Embroidery

p. 201

12

Other Zoom Tools

p. 77

307

Layout & Editing

■ Image tab

13
4

No.

Menu

Reference

No.

Menu

Reference

Open Image

p. 150

Delete Image

p. 153

2
Save Image

p. 153

Auto Punch Wizard

p. 132

Modify Image

p. 152

Cross Stitch Wizard

p. 135

Background Image Density

p. 152

10

Photo Stitch 1 Wizard

p. 139

Rotate Right

p. 153

11
Photo Stitch 2 Wizard

p. 144

Rotate Left

p. 153

12

Import to Design Center

p. 149

■ View tab

35

79

B
C

No.

Menu

Reference

No.

Menu

Reference

Solid View

p. 78

Import Pane

p. 13

Me

Stitch View

p. 78

10

Reference Window

p. 81
nus

Realistic View

p. 79

11

Show Grid

p. 18

/Tools

View Thread Trimming

p. 79

12

Show Grid with Axes

p. 18

Realistic View Settings

p. 79

13

Snap to Grid

p. 18

a
6

Sewing Order

p. 82

14

Grid Spacing

p. 18

nd Re

Stitch Simulator

p. 80

15

Ruler

p. 18

Attributes Setting

p. 29

16

Guideline

p. 19

ferenc

e
308

Layout & Editing

■ Text tab (Text)

24

BD
E

No.

Menu

Reference

No.

Menu

Reference

Select Tools

p. 31

Text Outline Sew Type

p. 117

Text Tools

p. 106

10

Region color

p. 117

Font
p. 107

11

Text Body Sew Type

p. 117

Text Size

p. 109

12

Edit Text

p. 107

Font Filter

p. 108

13

Convert to Blocks

p. 115

Font Filter Settings

p. 108

14

Convert to Stitches
p. 71

TrueType Font Attribute Setting

p. 110

15

Convert to Outline

p. 116

Line color

p. 117

■ Outline tab (Shapes (Outline))

2348

5670

No.

Menu

Reference

No.

Menu
Reference

Select Tools

p. 31

Pencil (Open Curve)

p. 63

Closed Straight Line

p. 63

Line color

p. 65

Closed Curve

p. 63

Line sew type

p. 65

Pencil (Closed Curve)

p. 63

10

Region color

p. 65

Open Straight Line

p. 63

11

Region sew type

p. 65

Open Curve

p. 63

309

Layout & Editing

■ Outline tab (Shapes (Rectangle))

No.

Menu

Reference

No.

Menu

Reference

Select Tools

p. 31

Line sew type

p. 65

Edge radius
p. 61

Region color

p. 65

Line color

p. 65

Region sew type

p. 65

■ Manual Punch tab (Shapes (Manual Punch))

13

No.

Menu

Reference

No.
Menu

Reference

Select Tools

p. 31

Feed

p. 197

Straight Block

p. 197

Region color

p. 65

Curved Block

p. 197

Block sew type

p. 65

4
Running

p. 197

Menus

/Tools

and Re

ferenc

310

Layout & Editing

■ Shapes tab (Shapes (Shapes/Circle/Arc))

C
1

24

No.

Menu

Reference

No.

Menu

Reference

Select Tools

p. 31

Line color

p. 65
2

Split Outline

p. 42

10

Line sew type

p. 65

Add Direction Line

p. 52

11

Region color

p. 65

Delete Direction Line

p. 53

12

Region sew type

p. 65

Reverse Direction Line

p. 53
13

Convert to Stitches

p. 71

Edit Point

p. 70

14

Create Offset Lines

p. 44

Delete Point

p. 67

15

Create Floral Pattern

p. 42

Split at Point

p. 67

■ Stitches tab (Stitches)

2
3

No.

Menu

Reference

No.

Menu

Reference

Select Tools

p. 31

Split at Point

p. 73

Split Stitch Data

p. 74

6
Convert to Blocks

p. 75

Change Color

p. 71

Convert to Outline

p. 76

Divide by Color

p. 75

311
Design Center

Design Center

Application button menu

No.

Menu

Reference

Wizard

p. 222

New Line Image

p. 225

3
3

New Figure Data

p. 227

Open

p. 223

Save

p. 237

Save As

p. 237

Ribbon menu tabs

■ Original Image tab

No.

Menu
Reference

No.

Menu

Reference

Open Image

To Line image

p. 224

Menus

■ Line Image tab

/Tools

and Re

fe

6
renc

No.

Menu

Reference

No.

Menu

Reference

Pen Tools

p. 213

Pan Tool

p. 214

Eraser Tools

p. 213

To Original image

p. 222

3
Zoom Tools

p. 214

To Figure handle

p. 227

312

Design Center

■ Figure Handle tab

4
57

AC

No.

Menu

Reference

No.

Menu

Reference

Select Tools

p. 214

10

Delete

p. 216
2

Edit Point Tool

p. 215

11

Split at Point

p. 216

Line Tool

p. 215

12

Flip vertically

p. 228

Zoom Tools

13

Flip horizontally

p. 228

Pan Tool

—
14

Numerical Setting

p. 228

Cut

15

Import Figure

p. 227

Copy

16

Design Page Settings

p. 227

Paste

17

To Line image

p. 224
9

Duplicate

18

To Sew setting

p. 217

■ View tab

No.

Menu

Reference

No.

Menu

Reference

Reference Window
p. 228

Show Grid

p. 230

Modify Template

p. 230

Show Grid with Axes

p. 230

Background Image Density

p. 230

Grid Interval

p. 230

313
Design Center

■ Sew Setting tab

No.

Menu
Reference

No.

Menu

Reference

Region Tool

p. 231

Sew Type

p. 232

Line Tools

p. 232

Sewing Order

p. 236

Hole Sew Tool

p. 235

10

Preview
—

Stamp Tools

p. 236

11

Realistic Preview

Zoom Tools

12

Stitch Simulator

p. 237

Pan Tool

13

To Figure handle

p. 226

Color
p. 232

14

To Layout & Editing

p. 220

■ View tab

No.

Menu

Reference

No.

Menu

Reference

Reference Window

p. 228

Sewing Attributes

p. 233

Menus

/Tools
and Re

ferenc

314

Design Database

Design Database

List of menus

■ File menu

Menu

Toolbar

Reference

Menu
Toolbar

Reference

Open in Layout & Editing

p. 245

Print Setup

p. 255

Import Into Layout &

p. 245

Print Preview

Editing

Create New Folder

p. 243

Print

p. 255
Convert Format

p. 252

Create HTML

p. 256

Delete

p. 244

Create CSV

p. 256

Search

p. 251

Exit

■ Edit menu

Menu

Toolbar
Reference

Menu

Toolbar

Reference

Cut

Paste

p. 243

p. 243

Copy

Select All

■ Display menu

Menu

Toolbar

Reference

Menu

Toolbar

Reference

Large Thumbnails

Property
p. 253

Small Thumbnails

p. 244

Refresh

Details

Toolbar

p. 241

Preview

p. 253

Status Bar

315

Design Database

■ Option menu

Menu

Toolbar

Reference
Menu

Toolbar

Reference

Select

mm

Blue

p. 20

System Unit

inch

Application

Black

p. 302

Color

Link

p. 250

Silver

DST Settings

—
p. 301

Aqua

■ Help menu

Menu

Toolbar

Reference

Menu

Toolbar

Reference

Instruction Manual

p. 4

About Design Database

Customer Support

p. 5

Menus

/Tools

and Re
ferenc

316

Programmable Stitch Creator

Programmable Stitch Creator

Application button menu

No.

Menu
Reference

New Fill/Stamp Pattern

New Motif Pattern

p. 266

Open

p. 260

Save

p. 272

Save As

p. 272
Ribbon menu tabs

■ Home tab

68

No.

Menu

Reference

No.

Menu

Reference

1
Select Tool

p. 264

Copy

Edit Point Tool

p. 264

Paste

Draw Line Tool

p. 261

10

Duplicate

Region (Reset) Tool

p. 262

11
Delete

p. 269

Region (Engrave) Tool

p. 262

12

Flip vertically

p. 264

Region (Emboss) Tool

p. 262

13

Flip horizontally

p. 264

Cut

■ View tab

3
4

No.

Menu

Reference

No.

Menu

Reference

Open Template

p. 271

Show/Hide Status Bar

p. 270

Background Image Density

p. 271

Show Grid

p. 273

3
Show/Hide Preview window

p. 272

317

Font Creator

Font Creator

Application button menu

No.

Menu

Reference

New
p. 284

Open

p. 284

Save

p. 291

Save As

p. 291

Ribbon menu tabs

■ Home tab

BC

1
2

57

No.

Menu

Reference

No.

Menu

Reference

Select Object Tool

p. 287
11

Previous Character

p. 285

Edit Point Tool

p. 288

12

Select Character

p. 285

Manual Punch Tool

p. 277

13

Next Character

p. 285

enus

Zoom Tool

14
Browse Characters

p. 290

Pan Tool

15

Add/Remove Character

p. 285

Tools

Cut

16

Sewing Order

p. 289

Copy

17

Convert TrueType Font to Data

p. 287

and Re

Paste

18

Point Edit

p. 288

Duplicate

19

Flip

p. 287

fe

10

Delete

p. 288

20

Align

—
renc

318

Font Creator

■ View tab

No.

Menu

Reference
No.

Menu

Reference

Open Template

p. 275

Show/Hide Status Bar

p. 282

Modify Template

p. 292

Show Grid

p. 293

Background Image Density

p. 292

Show Grid with Axes

p. 293
4

Fill Mode

p. 292

Snap to Grid

p. 293

Preview Window

p. 289

10

Grid Spacing

p. 293

319
Sewing Attributes

Sewing Attributes

The sewing attributes for each sew type are first set to their default settings;
however, by changing the settings of the sewing attributes, you can create
custom stitching.

cc

For more details, refer to "Line sewing attributes" on page 325 and "Region
sewing attributes" on

page 331.

Line sew types

Zigzag Stitch (cc p. 325)

Running Stitch/Triple Stitch (cc p. 325)

Motif Stitch (cc p. 326)

Stem Stitch (cc p. 327)

Menus

Candlewicking Stitch (cc p. 327)

E/V Stitch (cc p. 328)

/Tools

and Re

ferenc

Chain Stitch (cc p. 329)

Cutting (cc p. 329)

320
Sewing Attributes

Region sew types

Satin Stitch (cc p. 331)

Fill Stitch (cc p. 333)

Programmable Fill Stitch (Prog. Fill Stitch)

Piping Stitch (cc p. 336)

(cc p. 333)

Motif Stitch (cc p. 337)

Cross Stitch (cc p. 338)

Concentric Circle Stitch (cc p. 338)

Radial Stitch (cc p. 338)

Spiral Stitch (cc p. 338)

Stippling Stitch (cc p. 338)

Net Fill Stitch (cc p. 339)

Zigzag Net Fill Stitch (cc p. 339)

321
Sewing Attributes

Motif Stitch Pattern

Motif

Motif

Pattern

Pattern

Name

Name

Motif

Motif

motif039

motif059

Pattern
Pattern

Name

Name

motif001

motif020

motif040

motif060

motif002

motif021

motif041

motif061

motif003

motif022

motif042

motif062

motif004

motif023

motif043

motif063

motif005

motif024
motif044

motif064

motif006

motif025

motif045

motif065

motif007

motif026

motif046

motif066

motif008

motif027

motif047

motif067

motif009

motif028

motif048

motif068

motif010

motif029

motif049
motif069

motif011

motif030

motif050

motif070

Me

motif051

motif071

nus

motif012

motif031

/T

motif052

motif072

ools

motif013

motif032

motif053

motif073

nd Re
motif014

motif033

motif054

motif074

motif015

motif034

renc

motif055

motif075

motif016

motif035

motif017

motif036

motif056

motif076

motif018

motif037

motif057
motif077

motif019

motif038

motif058

motif078

322
Sewing Attributes

Motif

Motif

Fill

Fill
Pattern

Pattern

Name

Name

Pattern

Pattern

Pattern

Pattern

Name

Name

motif079

motif085

stamp2_

stampJ

motif080

motif086

stamp3

stampK

motif081

motif087

stamp3_
stampL

motif082

motif088

stamp4

stampM

motif083

motif089

stamp4_

stampN

motif084

stamp5

stampO

Prog. Fill Stitch Pattern

stamp5_

stampP

Fill

Fill

stamp6

stampQ

Pattern

Pattern
Pattern

Pattern

Name

Name

stamp6_

stampR

net1

pat9

stamp7

stampS

net2

pat10

stamp7_

stampT

net3

pat11

stampA

stampU

net4

pat12

stampB
stampV

pat1

pat13

stampC

stampW

pat2

pat14

stampD

stampX

pat3

pat15

stampE

stampY

pat4

pat16

stampF

stampZ

pat5

pat17

stampG

tatami1
pat6

stamp1

stampH

tatami2

pat7

stamp1_

stampI

tatami3

pat8

stamp2

323
Sewing Attributes

Fill

Fill

Pattern

Pattern

Pattern

Pattern

Name

Name

tatami4

wave2

tatami5

wave3
wave1

wave4

Menus

/Tools

and Re

ferenc

324
Sewing Attributes
■ Line sewing attributes

The available attributes differ depending on the selected sew type.

cc

"Specifying sewing attributes" on page 54

Zigzag Stitch

Off

On

Under sewing

Narrow

Wide

Zigzag width

Coarse

Fine

Density

Off

On

Half Stitch

The inside stitching is dense.

The stitching is adjusted to a

more even density.

Sharp Corners
Connection

This sewing attribute is available only when a text pattern is selected.

Points

cc

"Selecting connection point positions in a text pattern" on page 116

Running Stitch

Short

Long

Run pitch

Specify the length of one stitch.

1 time

5 times

Run time(s)

Specify the number of times the outline is sewn.

Connection

This sewing attribute is available only when a text pattern is selected.

Points

cc

"Selecting connection point positions in a text pattern" on page 116

Triple Stitch

Short
Long

Run pitch

Specify the length of one stitch.

Connection

This sewing attribute is available only when a text pattern is selected.

Points

cc

"Selecting connection point positions in a text pattern" on page 116

325
Sewing Attributes

Motif Stitch

Select a pattern for the motif stitch.

Click

to display the [Browse] dialog box. Select a folder, and then select the desired
pattern (.pmf file) from the list of patterns that appears.

Specify the pattern size. The pattern can be

Smaller

Larger

enlarged or reduced while maintaining the width-to-

height proportion.

Short

Tall

1 Height

Specify the pattern height.

(vertical length)

2 Width

Short

Long

(horizontal

Specify the pattern width.

length)
Maintain aspect

When selected, the height-to-width proportions of the pattern are maintained.

ratio

Normal

Specify the arrangement of the patterns along a

H-Arrange

horizontal axis.

(horizontal

Mirror

Al patterns or each pattern can be flipped along the

arrangement)

horizontal axis.

Alternate

Normal

Specify the arrangement of the patterns along a

V-Arrange

vertical axis.

(vertical

Mirror

Al patterns or each pattern can be flipped along the

arrangement)
vertical axis.

Alternate

Offset

0.0 mm

Offset: 4.5mm

Menus

/T

Spacing

Narrow

Wide

ools

and Re

Short

Long

Run pitch

Specify the length of one stitch.

fere

Feed

Run

nc

e
Start/End Type

cc

"If the entry/exit points of sewing have been changed" on page 330

Connection

This sewing attribute is available only when a text pattern is selected.

Points

cc

"Selecting connection point positions in a text pattern" on page 116

326
Sewing Attributes

Stem Stitch

Narrow

Wide

Width

Narrow
Wide

Spacing

45°

135°

Angle

Triple

Single

Stitch Type

Feed

Run

Start/End Type

cc

"If the entry/exit points of sewing have been changed" on page 330

Connection

This sewing attribute is available only when a text pattern is selected.

Points

cc

"Selecting connection point positions in a text pattern" on page 116

Candlewicking Stitch

Dense
Medium

Light

Density

Smaller

Larger

Size

Narrow

Wide

Spacing

Feed

Run

Start/End Type

cc

"If the entry/exit points of sewing have been changed" on page 330

Connection

This sewing attribute is available only when a text pattern is selected.

Points

cc

"Selecting connection point positions in a text pattern" on page 116

327
Sewing Attributes

E/V Stitch

Select the E Stitch or the V Stitch.

E Stitch

Narrow
Wide

1 Interval

Short

Long

2 Stroke width

Narrow

Wide

3 Run pitch

1 time

5 times

Specify the number of times the line

Run time(s)

is sewn.

1 time

3 times

Specify the number of times each

Stroke time(s)

stroke is sewn.
Arrange

This sewing attribute is available only when a text pattern is selected.

Connection Points

cc

"Selecting connection point positions in a text pattern" on page 116

V Stitch

Narrow

Wide

nus

1 Interval

/Tools

Short

Long

2 Stroke width

and Re

Narrow
Wide

fe

3 Run pitch

renc

With the V stitch, the line and the

1 time

5 times

Run time(s)

strokes are sewn the same number

of times.

Arrange

This sewing attribute is available only when a text pattern is selected.

Connection Points

cc

"Selecting connection point positions in a text pattern" on page 116

328
Sewing Attributes

Chain Stitch

Triangular

Diamond-shaped

Stitch Type

Smaller

Larger

Size

1 time

6 time

Time

Arrange

Feed

Run

Start/End Type

cc

"If the entry/exit points of sewing have been changed" on page 330

Connection

This sewing attribute is available only when a text pattern is selected.

Points

cc

"Selecting connection point positions in a text pattern" on page 116

Cutting

Specify whether or not sections of the cutting

line are to be left uncut.

Off

On

Leave uncut

This prevents the fabric from moving out of

sections

place during cutting.

If it is set to [On], cut them with scissors after

the cutting step is finished.

For more cleanly cut edges, for example, on

Cutting only

Cutting for covering

patches, select [Cutting only]. If the cut edge

edge of fabric

Use

will be embroidered, for example, on appliqués,

select [Cutting for covering edge of fabric].

329

Sewing Attributes

■ If the entry/exit points of sewing have been changed

If the entry/exit points of line sewing with the motif stitch, stem stitch,
candlewicking stitch or chain stitch have been changed or optimized, select a
setting for [Start/End Type] in the line sewing attributes.

cc

"Start/End Type" on page 326 and "Moving entry/exit points, the center point
and stitch pattern

reference point" on page 50

If [Feed] was selected under [Start/End Type], jump stitches are entered at the
beginning or end of pattern stitching (with a motif stitch, stem stitch,
candlewicking stitch or chain stitch). If [Run] was selected under

[Start/End Type], running stitches following the path are entered at the
beginning of and between pattern stitching.

Before the entry/exit points are changed

Path of actual stitching

Entry point/Exit point

When the entry point is moved

Feed

Entry point

Jump stitch

Exit point

enus

Run
Tools

and Re

Entry point

Running stitch

erenc

Exit point

• After changing the Start/End Type, check the stitching with the stitch simulator.

cc

"Checking the stitching with the Stitch Simulator" on page 80

• Embroidery patterns where the Start/End Type of line sewing with the motif
stitch, have been changed or optimized in an application earlier than version 8
are opened or imported with this stitching specified as jump stitches.

330
Sewing Attributes

■ Region sewing attributes

The available attributes differ depending on the selected sew type.

cc

"Specifying sewing attributes" on page 54

Satin Stitch

To specify underlay stitching, select the check box, and then specify settings for
the following attributes.

Specify the type of underlay stitching to be sewn.

• For text patterns or for shape patterns with

• For shape patterns with a single sewing direction

multiple sewing direction lines

line

Edge only

Single

Region only (single layer of zigzag

Under

Double

shaped stitches)
sewing

Region only (single layer of piping

• For regions in Design Center

stitches)

Edge and region (single layer of

Single

zigzag shaped stitches)

Region only (double layer of zigzag

Double

shaped and piping stitches)

[Density]

Select [Dense], [Medium] or [Light] as the density for the underlay stitching.

Coarse

Fine

[Gradation]

Density

This cannot be specified under the following

conditions.

Off

On

• The sewing direction is set to [Variable]

• Text pattern

• When a feathered edge is specified

Click [Pattern] to set the gradation pattern.

cc

"Creating a gradation/blending" on page 47

This cannot be specified for text pattern.

[Manual]

[Manual]: Sews at a fixed angle.

Drag

or select a value to specify the angle. If

there are multiple sewing direction lines, a value

cannot be specified for the angle.

Direction

[Auto]

[Auto]: Automatically varies the sewing direction

according to the shape of the region.

Off

On

To specify half stitching, select the check box.

This cannot be specified if the sewing direction is

Half Stitch
set to [Manual] and there is only one sewing

direction line.

The inside stitching is

The stitching is

dense.

adjusted to a more

even density.

331
Sewing Attributes

Inside of region

The inside of region setting is not available if the

[Gradation] check box is selected.

This cannot be specified under the following

Running

conditions.

Stitch Path

• The sewing direction is set to [Auto].

Along outline

• Text patterns

• When a feathered edge is specified

On outline

No compensation

Longest compensation

Pull com-

Lengthen the sewing region in the sewing direction

pensation

to adjust for pattern shrinkage during sewing.

Connection

This sewing attribute is available only when a text pattern is selected.

Points

cc

"Selecting connection point positions in a text pattern" on page 116

Specify the edge

of the stitching

where the

feathered edge is

to be applied.

Top edge only

Top side of pattern

For <pattern11>

Bottom edge only

Bottom side of pattern

Click

to display the [Browse] dialog box.

For <pattern18>

nus

Feathered

edge
Select the desired pattern from the list of patterns

Top and bottom edges

/T

that appears.

ools

This sewing attribute is available only when a

shape pattern is selected. In addition, this attri-

bute cannot be selected under the following con-

nd Re

ditions.

• When a gradation is specified

• When the sewing direction is set to [Auto]

fe

• When hole sewing is specified

renc

Short

Long

Specify the width of the

feathered edge
Feathered edge settings not specified

Feathered edge settings specified

332

Sewing Attributes

Fill Stitch

Under
sewing

cc

"Satin Stitch" on page 331

Density

Direction

Specify the shape of the returning ends of the stitching.

Stitch Type

This cannot be specified if the sewing direction is set to

[Auto].

Half Stitch

cc

Running

"Half Stitch" on page 331 and "Running Stitch Path" on page 332

Stitch Path

Short

Long

Step pitch

Specify the length of one stitch.

0%

50%

Frequency
Pull com-

cc

"Pull compensation" on page 332

pensation

Connection

This sewing attribute is available only when a text pattern is selected.

Points

cc

"Selecting connection point positions in a text pattern" on page 116

Feathered

cc

"Feathered edge" on page 332

Edge

Programmable Fill Stitch (Prog. Fill Stitch)

Under sewing

Density

Direction

cc

"Region sewing attributes" on page 331 and 332

Half Stitch

Running Stitch Path

Pull compensation

This sewing attribute is available only when a text pattern is selected.

Connection Points

cc

"Selecting connection point positions in a text pattern" on page 116

Feathered Edge

cc

"Feathered edge" on page 332

cc

"Satin Stitch" in the "Region sewing attributes" on page 331

333
Sewing Attributes

Programmable fill

Click

to display the [Browse] dialog box. Select a folder, and then select the desired
pattern (.pas file) from the list of patterns that appears.

Smaller

Larger

Specify the pattern size. The pattern can

be enlarged or reduced while maintaining

the width-to-height proportion.

Short

Tal

1 Height

Specify the pattern

(vertical

height.

length)

Short

Long

2 Width

Specify the pattern

(horizontal

width.

length)

Maintain aspect ratio

When selected, the height-to-width proportions of the pattern are maintained.

90°
135°

45°

Direction

180°

0°

225°

315°

270°

row

0%

Offset

Row 50%

Column 50%

column

To specify base stitching, select the check box, and then specify settings for the
fol owing Base Sewing

attributes.

Specify the shape of the returning ends

enus

of the stitching.
Stitch Type

This cannot be specified if the sewing

/T

direction is set to [Auto].

ools

Short

Long

and Re

Step pitch

Specify the length of one stitch.

fe

0%

50%

renc

Frequency

Pattern

This area is sewn with the stitching settings

specified for the base sewing of the

programmable fill stitch.

Area where the embossing or

engraving effects are applied

This area is sewn with the stitching settings

specified by the pattern file.

334
Sewing Attributes

Notes on programmable fill stitches and stamps

In some case of the sew type and pattern directions setting of a programmable
fill stitch or a stamp, lines will not be sewn.

Use the Realistic View to view exactly how the stitch pattern will be sewn. To
get an even better view, make test samples of different settings.

Examples of programmable fill stitching:

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

Stitch direction: 45° (default)

Stitch direction: 90°

Stitch direction: 0°

cc

"Changing the display of the embroidery design" on page 78, and

"Programmable Stitch Creator"

on page 258

335
Sewing Attributes

Piping Stitch

Stitching is created to run through the length of blocks.

90°

135°

45°

This cannot be specified for patterns

Direction

with multiple sewing direction lines.

180°

0°

225°
315°

270°

Specify settings for the following if the motif stitch pattern is not used.

Coarse

Fine

Density

Short

Long

Run pitch

Specify the length of one stitch.

0%

50%

Frequency

Specify the shift in the stitches.

To use a motif stitch in the pattern, select the check box, and then specify
settings for Use Motif

the following attributes.

Motif

cc

"Motif Stitch" in the "Region sewing attributes" on page 337

Pattern1/Pattern2
Pattern and size of the

motif stitch patterns

cc

"Motif Stitch" in the "Line sewing attributes" on page 326

H-Arrange

V-Arrange

H-Offset

enus

V-Offset

H-Spacing

cc

"Motif Stitch" in the "Region sewing attributes" on page 337

ools

V-Spacing

Row offset

and Re

Run pitch

ferenc
e

336
Sewing Attributes

Motif Stitch

Motif

[Pattern1 only]

[Pattern2 only]

Select the pattern to be used for the motif stitch.

[Pattern1 and 2]
Pattern1/Pattern2

Specify settings for each pattern.

Pattern and size of

the motif stitch

patterns Maintain

aspect ratio

cc

"Motif Stitch" in the "Line sewing attributes" on page 326

H-Arrange

V-Arrange

0.0 mm

2.5 mm

H-Offset

(horizontal spacing)

0.0 mm

2.5 mm

V-Offset

(vertical spacing)

Narrow

Wide

H-Spacing
(horizontal spacing)

Narrow

Wide

V-Spacing

(vertical spacing)

90°

135°

45°

Direction

180°

0°

225°

315°

270°

Smaller

Larger

Row offset

Run pitch

cc

"Motif Stitch" in the "Line sewing attributes" on page 326

337
Sewing Attributes

Cross Stitch

Smaller

Larger

Size

Single

Triple

Times

Concentric Circle Stitch, Radial Stitch and Spiral Stitch

For details on moving the center point of the concentric circle stitch and the
radial stitch, refer to "Moving the

center point and stitch pattern reference point" on page 51.

Concentric Circle Stitch Coarse

Concentric Circle Stitch Fine

Radial Stitch Coarse

Radial Stitch Fine

Density

Spiral Stitch Coarse

Spiral Stitch Fine

Short

Long

Run pitch

Specify the length of one stitch.

Stippling Stitch

Short

Long

Specify the length of one stitch.

Run pitch

This cannot be specified if the motif stitch is

M
used.

The turns are

The turns are more

smoother.

angled.

nus

Narrow

Wide

/Tools

Spacing

The pattern is finer.

The pattern is coarser.

nd Re

To use a motif stitch in the pattern, select the check box, and then specify
settings for the Use Motif

following attributes.

fe

Pattern and size of the

re
motif stitch patterns

nc

H-Arrange

V-Arrange

cc

"Motif Stitch" in the "Line sewing attributes" on page 326

Offset

Spacing

Run pitch

338
Sewing Attributes

Net Fill Stitch

Specify the pattern to be used for the net fill

Pattern

stitch.

Fine

Coarse

Spacing

The pattern is finer.

The pattern is coarser.

Direction

cc

"Motif Stitch" in the "Region sewing attributes" on page 337

Zigzag Net Fill Stitch

Specify the pattern to be used for the

Pattern

zigzag net fill stitch.

Off
On

To specify underlay stitching, select the

Under sewing

check box.

Zigzag width

cc

"Zigzag Stitch" in the "Line sewing attributes" on page 325

Density

cc

"Zigzag Stitch" in the "Line sewing attributes" on page 325

Fine

Coarse

Spacing

The pattern is finer.

The pattern is coarser.

H-Offset

cc

"Motif Stitch" in the "Region sewing attributes" on page 337

V-Offset

cc

"Motif Stitch" in the "Region sewing attributes" on page 337

Direction

cc

"Motif Stitch" in the "Region sewing attributes" on page 337

339
Font List

Font List
Text

Min.

No.

Font Name

Text Outlines

size

10 mm

Min.

021

Gothic 04

No.

Font Name

Text Outlines

(0.39")

size

10 mm

10 mm

022 Decorative 04

001

Serif 01

(0.39")
(0.39")

8 mm

10 mm

023 Decorative 05

002

Script 01

(0.31")

(0.39")

10 mm

10 mm

024

Gothic 05

003

Gothic 01

(0.39")

(0.39")

10 mm

10 mm

025 Decorative 06

004

Serif 02
(0.39")

(0.39")

10 mm

10 mm

026

Gothic 06

005

Script 02

(0.39")

(0.39")

10 mm

8 mm

027

Block 07

006

Serif 03

(0.39")

(0.31")

10 mm

9 mm

028
Gothic 07

007

Block 01

(0.39")

(0.35")

Brussels Demi

10 mm

10 mm

029

008

Block 02

Outline

(0.39")

(0.39")

Calgary

10 mm

10 mm

030

009

Gothic 02

MediumItalic
(0.39")

(0.39")

10 mm

10 mm

031

Istanbul

010

Block 03

(0.39")

(0.39")

10 mm

10 mm

032

Los Angeles

011 Decorative 01

(0.39")

(0.39")

10 mm

10 mm

033
Saipan

012

Block 04

(0.39")

nus

(0.39")

10 mm

9 mm

034

San Diego

013

Block 05

(0.39")

ools

(0.35")

Sicilia Light

10 mm

10 mm
035

014

Script 03

Italic

(0.39")

nd Re

(0.39")

10 mm

20 mm

036

Alaska

015 Decorative 02

(0.39")

(0.79")

fer

10 mm

10 mm

037

Bayern Book
nc

016 Decorative 03

(0.39")

(0.39")

10 mm

10 mm

038

Belgium

017

Script 04

(0.39")

(0.39")

10 mm

10 mm

039

Bengal

018

Gothic 03

(0.39")

(0.39")
10 mm

10 mm

040

Bergen

019

Script 05

(0.39")

(0.39")

10 mm

9 mm

041 Berlin Regular

020

Block 06

(0.39")

(0.35")

340
Font List

Min.

Min.

No.

Font Name

Text Outlines

No.

Font Name

Text Outlines

size

size

Bermuda

10 mm
9 mm

042

065

Haiti

Script

(0.39")

(0.35")

10 mm

Helsinki

10 mm

043

Blackstone

066

(0.39")

Narrow Bold

(0.39")

10 mm

044

BR-OCRA

10 mm

(0.39")
067

Hungary

(0.39")

Brougham

9 mm

045

10 mm

Bold

(0.35")

068

Jakarta

(0.39")

Brougham

9 mm

10 mm

046

Condensed

069

Jawa

(0.35")

(0.39")
ExtraBold

10 mm

10 mm

047

Brunei

070

Kentucky

(0.39")

(0.39")

10 mm

Kingston

10 mm

048 Brussels Light

071

(0.39")

Regular

(0.39")

10 mm

Letter Gothic

10 mm

049
Cairo

072

(0.39")

Bold

(0.39")

Calgary

10 mm

10 mm

050

073

Lillehammer

BoldItalic

(0.39")

(0.39")

Calgary

10 mm

10 mm

051

074 Liverpool Italic

BoldItalic LS

(0.39")
(0.39")

10 mm

10 mm

052

Canberra

075

Maryland

(0.39")

(0.39")

10 mm

9 mm

053

Connecticut

076 Miami Roman

(0.39")

(0.35")

10 mm

10 mm

054

Cordoba

077
Montreal

(0.39")

(0.39")

10 mm

8 mm

055

Cyprus

078

Panama Bold

(0.39")

(0.31")

9 mm

10 mm

056

Equador

079 Princeton Italic

(0.35")

(0.39")

Epsom

9 mm

057
10 mm

Expanded

(0.35")

080

Riesa

(0.39")

10 mm

058

Epsom

10 mm

(0.39")

081

Salamanca

(0.39")

Firenze Bold

10 mm

059

Seattle

10 mm

Expanded

(0.39")
082

BoldItalic

(0.39")

Florida

8 mm

060

9 mm

Medium

(0.31")

083

Sofia Bold

(0.35")

9 mm

061 Frankfurt Bold

10 mm

(0.35")

084

Helsinki

(0.39")

Frankfurt

10 mm
062

Tennessee

10 mm

Medium

(0.39")

085

ExtraBold

(0.39")

10 mm

063

Germany

10 mm

(0.39")

086

Themes

(0.39")

10 mm

064

BR Symbol

10 mm

(0.39")
087

Tianjin

(0.39")

341
Font List

Min.

Min.

No.

Font Name
Text Outlines

No.

Font Name

Text Outlines

size

size

10 mm

Modula

19 mm

088

Tirol

110

(0.39")

Outlined

(0.75")

10 mm

Modula Round

17 mm

089

US Roman

111
(0.39")

Serif Ultra

(0.67")

10 mm

Modula Sans

10 mm

090

Venezia

112

(0.39")

Bold

(0.39")

10 mm

Not Caslon

30 mm

091

Vermont

113

(0.39")

Two

(1.18")
10 mm

Remedy

25 mm

092

Wellington

114

(0.39")

Double

(0.98")

Künstler-

10 mm

Sabbath Black

13 mm

093

115

schreibschrift

(0.39")

Regular

(0.51")

Toms

10 mm
13 mm

094

116

Senator Ultra

Handwritten

(0.39")

(0.51")

10 mm

Soda Script

10 mm

095

Luedickital

117

(0.39")

Bold

(0.39")

10 mm

Suburban

10 mm

096

Atranta Book
118

(0.39")

Light

(0.39")

10 mm

10 mm

097

Atranta Demi

119

Totally Gothic

(0.39")

(0.39")

10 mm

Vista Sans Alt

10 mm

098

Montana

120

(0.39")

Regular

(0.39")
Base 900

10 mm

099

Sans Heavy

(0.39")

Italic

Small Text

Base

10 mm

100

Monospace

(0.39")

No.

Font Name

Text Outlines

Size

Wide Bold

5-6 mm

Blockhead
nus

15 mm

101

Alphabet

01

Utah Bold S

(0.20-

(0.59")

0.24")

Darkside

Tools

5-6 mm

Dalliance

10 mm

102

02

Belgium S

(0.20-

Roman

(0.39")
0.24")

and Re

Dalliance

10 mm

103

5-6 mm

Calgary

Script

(0.39")

03

(0.20-

MediumItalic S

0.24")

Dogma Script

10 mm

104

Bold

(0.39")
3-4 mm

enc

04

Utah SR

(0.12-

Elliotts Apollo

10 mm

0.16")

105 Venus Dioxide

(0.39")

Calgary

3-4 mm

Exocet

13 mm

05

MediumItalic

(0.12-

106

Medium

(0.51")
SR

0.16")

4-6 mm

Los Feliz Bold

9 mm

107

06

Script 01 SR

(0.16-

Italic

(0.35")

0.24")

Mason Serif

12 mm

5-6 mm

108

Bold

(0.47")

07

Block 03 S

(0.20-
0.24")

Matrix Inline

17 mm

109

Extra Bold

(0.67")

342
Font List

No.

Font Name

Text Outlines

Size

4-6 mm

08

Block 07 SR

(0.16-

0.24")

5-6 mm

09

Germany S

(0.20-

0.24")

5-6 mm

10
Riesa S

(0.20-

0.24")

Monogram

Symbol

Font Name

Text Outlines

Diamond

Script

343

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

If a problem occurs, click

or [Help], then [Customer Support] in the menu to visit the following Web site,
where you can find causes and solutions to various problems and answers to
frequently asked questions.

If you have a problem, check the following solutions. If the solutions suggested
do not correct the problem, contact your authorized dealer or Brother Customer
Service.

Problem

Estimated Cause

Solution
Page

An operation not described

in the installation procedure

was performed. (For

The software is not installed

example, Cancel was

Fol ow the instructions as the software

correctly.

clicked or the "PE-DESIGN installs to correctly install the software.

Software Key" was

removed before the

procedure was completed.)

Check that the "PE-DESIGN Software

Key" appears in the computer's list of

The "PE-DESIGN Software

The message "No PE-DESIGN

removable storage devices. If it does

Key" is not connected.

Software Key is connected.

not appear, unplug the "PE-DESIGN

See "Reference
Please connect a PE-DESIGN

Software Key", and then plug it in again.

Guide".

Software Key." appeared.

The information on the

Leave it plugged in, and uninstall, then

"PE-DESIGN Software

re-install PE-DESIGN 10.

Key" is corrupted.

When trying to upgrade from

To upgrade "PE-DESIGN Software Key",

an older version, the message

the computer with "PE-DESIGN

"Cannot connect to the

The computer with "PE-

Software Key" connected to its USB

Internet." or "The server could DESIGN Software Key"

port must connect to the Internet. If

not be connected to. Wait a

connected to its USB port firewall software is being used, it must

while, and then try connecting could not establish a

be temporarily disabled during the

again." appeared and "PE-

connection to the Internet. upgrade. If a connection to the Internet

DESIGN Software Key" could

cannot be established, contact your

not be upgraded.

authorized dealer.

Menus

/Tools

and Re

ferenc

344

Troubleshooting

Possible Cause

Problem

Cause

File Format

Solution

.pes

The data may be corrupted.

The file cannot be opened,

but it can be imported.

.phc (machine embroidery

→ ([Home] tab > [Import

Patterns] > [from File])

format)

Otherwise, convert the file to

the PES format, and then

When opening an embroidery

open it.

pattern

(Application button > [Open])

The file cannot be opened,

Other manufacturers'

but it can be imported.

compatible formats

→ ([Home] tab > [Import

(.dst, .hus, .exp, .pcs, .vip,

Patterns] > [from File])

.sew, .jef, .csd,

Otherwise, convert the file to

.xxx, and .shv)

the PES format, and then

open it.

Incompatible formats

The file cannot be used.

.pes, .phc,

The error message

Other manufacturers'

"Unexpected file format"

compatible formats

When importing embroidery

The data may be corrupted.

appears.

(.dst, .hus, .exp, .pcs, .vip,

patterns

or

.sew, .jef, .csd,

([Home] tab > [Import

Your embroidery pattern or

.xxx, and .shv)

Patterns] > [from File])

image cannot be opened.

Convert the file to a

Incompatible formats

compatible format, such as

PES, and then use it.

When opening a background .bmp, .tif, .jpg, .wmf, .png,

The data may be corrupted.

image

.eps, and .gif

([Image] tab > [Open])

or When opening an image

The file cannot be opened.

for Stitch Wizard

Images in formats other than → Use an image in one of

(Auto Punch, Photo Stitch 1 those listed above

the formats listed above.

and 2, and Cross Stitch)

.wmf, .emf, and .svg

The data may be corrupted.

Vector images in a format

Convert the file to the .wmf,

When importing an image as other than .wmf, .emf, or

.emf, or .svg format, and

an embroidery pattern

.svg

then import it.

([Home] tab > [Import

Patterns] > [from Vector

Currently, these files cannot

Image])

Raster images (.bmp, .jpg,

be imported. Open them in

etc.)

the background and use

them for tracing.

345

New Features of PE-DESIGN 10

New Features of PE-DESIGN 10

• The Optimize Sewing Order command has been

New PE-DESIGN Security

added. This command adjusts the sewing order

and entry/exit points to reduce the number of

Device

thread color changes and jump stitches.

• The PE-DESIGN Software Key replaces the card

(cc p. 83)

writer as the security device for PE-DESIGN 10.

• Convert to Outline commands for stitch patterns

(cc p. 7)

have been added. These commands convert

stitch patterns to shape patterns. (cc p. 76)

Displaying Thumbnails of

• The functions for editing points in stitch patterns

have been improved.

Embroidery Files

- The Split at Point command splits one stitch

• Embroidery (PES) files can be displayed as

pattern into two. (cc p. 73)

thumbnails in Windows® Explorer. (cc p. 304)

- The Connect Points command connects two

stitch patterns to create a single one. (cc p. 73)

Improved Functions for

• The functions for editing points in shape patterns

Editing Patterns as

have been improved.

- The Split at Point command splits one open

Outlines

shape pattern into two and splits one closed

• Multiple lines indicating the sewing directions of

shape pattern into an open one. (cc p. 68)

an outline pattern can be specified. Sewing

- The Connect Points command connects two

direction lines can be added, moved, deleted and

shape patterns to create a single one and

reversed without changing the shape of the

connects the two end points of an open pattern

outline pattern. (cc p. 51)

to create a closed one. (cc p. 69)

• Blocks entered with Manual Punch tools can be

• The Split Outline tool has been added. This tool

edited as outline patterns. (cc p. 197)

splits off the part of the shape pattern enclosed by

- In this way, gradations, entry/exit points, under

the specified points. (cc p. 42)

sewing and line sewing can be specified for

• The Fabric Selector command has been added.

blocks.

This command allows you to change the current

sewing attribute settings to the recommended

- In addition, blocks can be edited using shape-

nus

editing functions, such as the Remove Overlap/

settings for the selected fabric type. (cc p. 17)

Merge, Set Hole Sewing and Create Offset

/T

• The Matrix Copy command has been added.

ools

Lines commands as well as the Applique

This command creates copies of the selected

Wizard.

pattern at an equal distance apart. (cc p. 37)

and Re

• The Paste Attributes command has been added.

Enhanced Functions for

This command allows the colors, sew types and

sewing attributes from the copied pattern to be

Creating Stitching

pasted to the selected pattern. (cc p. 55)

renc

Variations

• EMF and SVG files can also be converted to

• The stitching variations available for line sewing

embroidery data. (cc p. 93)

(Line sew type) has been increased. (cc p. 329)

• The Gradation Pattern Setting dialog box has

- Chain Stitch

been improved. The gradation of patterns can

more easily be adjusted. (cc p. 47)

- Cutting

• Patterns can be imported from Design Center into

• The stitching variations available for region

Layout & Editing as shape patterns. (cc p. 94)

sewing (Region sew type) has been increased.

(cc p. 339)

- Net Fill Stitch

- Zigzag Net Fill Stitch

346

New Features of PE-DESIGN 10

• The Import pane has been enhanced. From this

Additional and Enhanced

pane, embroidery patterns can be easily added to

the Design Page. (cc p. 13)

Wizards

• The Measure tool has been improved. (cc p. 78)

• The Embroidered Patch Wizard has been

added. This wizard creates satin stitches and

Enhanced Lettering

cutting lines around the original selected pattern.

(cc p. 166)

Functions

• The Cutwork Wizard has been added. With this

wizard, a cutwork pattern can easily be created.

• Font/character variations have been increased

and improved. (cc p. 340)

cc p. 169)

• The Applique Wizard has been enhanced.

- The number of regular built-in text fonts has

been increased to 120 types.

cc p. 161)

- This wizard can be used with combination

- The number of built-in Small Text fonts has

patterns that include both stitch patterns and

been increased to 10 types.

text patterns.

- The number of symbols and accented

- This wizard can also create appliqué patterns

characters has been increased for some regular

around the original selected pattern.

built-in fonts.

• The Startup Wizard has been enhanced. This

- The characters for some regular built-in fonts

wizard enables access to the desired functions

have been improved. In addition, the character

and files with a single click. (

spacing and the size of characters have been

cc p. 10)

adjusted.

• Functions in the Photo Stitch 1 have been

improved. (

• The user interface for selecting the font has been

cc p. 142)

improved.

- The names of built-in fonts appear in the Font

Improved User Interface Is

selector. (cc p. 107)

Easier To Use

- The recommended minimum size of regular

• RichFaces Context menus from right-clicking

built-in fonts appears in the Font selector.

have been incorporated into the advanced user

(cc p. 107)

interface. These menus allow users to easily find

- The Font Filter command has been added.

the desired commands.

This command filters the fonts in the Font

• The Guideline function has been added. This

selector to list the selected font types.

function helps you align the embroidery patterns.

(cc p. 108)

(cc p. 19)

Others

• The Show Stitched Objects command has been

added. This command allows embroidery

• Embroidery sample variations have been

patterns to be displayed or hidden in the Design

increased.

Page. (cc p. 82)

• A new embroidery frame setting (240 × 360 mm

• The Hide Objects Not Stitched command has

frame) is available in the Design Settings dialog

been added. This command allows frames

box. (*Availability depends on the embroidery

containing patterns that will not be sewn to be

machine model.) (cc p. 15)

displayed or hidden in the Sewing Order pane.

(cc p. 85)

• The function for displaying entry/exit points has

been improved. This function also displays the

entry/exit points of next (or previous) patterns in

the sewing order. (cc p. 50)

• The color list can be set to display Color changes

or Total colors. (cc p. 88, 97, 255)

347

Index

Connection Points ......................................... 69, 73, 116

Converting

Access key ................................................................ 299

Embroidery pattern formats .............................. 252

Advanced stitch wizard ............................................. 147

Shape pattern to stitch ........................................ 71

Aligning

Stitch to blocks .................................................... 75

Embroidery patterns ............................................ 32

Stitch to shapes .................................................. 75

Application appearance ............................................ 300

Text pattern to stitch ........................................... 71

Application button ....................................................... 11

Text to blocks .................................................... 115

Appliqué .............................................................. 48, 161

Text to outline pattern ....................................... 115

Applique Wizard ........................................................ 161

Text to stitches .................................................. 115

Arc ............................................................................... 61

Copy

Arcs ............................................................................. 61

Arrange Copies ................................................... 35

Attaching stabilizer .................................................... 179

Sewing attributes ................................................ 55

Attributes

Creating

Line sewing attributes ....................................... 325

New folders .......................................................243

Name Drop Text ................................................ 127

New thread color chart ...................................... 193

Region sewing attributes ................................... 331

Cross stitch ....................................................... 321, 338

Sewing attributes ................................................ 54

Cross Stitch function ................................................. 135

Text attributes ................................................... 107

Cross Stitch parameters ................................... 137

Auto Hide .................................................................. 299

CSV ................................................................... 128, 194

Auto Punch function .................................................. 132

Customer Support ......................................................... 5

Auto Punch Parameters .................................... 134

Cutting line .................................................................. 49

Auto Scroll ................................................................... 80

Cutwork

Cutting ................................................................ 49

Function ............................................................ 173

Net Stitching ..................................................... 169

Cutwork wizard ......................................................... 169

Back Stitch ................................................................ 137

Beginner mode ....................................................54, 233

Blending ...................................................................... 47

Block data ................................................................. 115

Block pattern ..................................................... 197, 277

Decorative pattern ....................................................... 38

Blocks

Deleting

Convert to Blocks ................................................ 75

Point .................................................................... 67

Converted from text .......................................... 115

Sewing direction lines ......................................... 53

Thread color charts ........................................... 193

Thread colors from charts ................................. 195

Design Center ................................................... 211, 312

Design Database .............................................. 240, 315

Candlewicking Stitch ......................................... 320, 327

Design Page Property ........................... 14, 18, 183, 227

Card writer ........................................................ 202, 246

Design Page size .......................................... 14, 18, 227

Center point ................................................................ 51

Multi-position hoops .......................................... 183

Centering .................................................................... 32

Design Property .................................................... 12, 88

Chain Stitch ....................................................... 320, 329

Design Settings ................................................... 14, 227

Change Color .................................................... 142, 146

Displaying

Changing

Background images .......................................... 271

Thread color order ............................................ 195

Color pane .......................................................... 46

Changing the character spacing ............................... 114

Details ............................................................... 244

Character spacing ..................................................... 110

Embroidery patterns ......................................... 244

Check for Updates ........................................................ 6

Images ...................................................... 152, 230

Checking

Import pane .........................................................13

Sewing order ....................................................... 82

Large Thumbnails ............................................. 244

Stitching .............................................................. 80

Small Thumbnails ............................................. 244

Circle ........................................................................... 61

Distributor dialog box ................................................ 206

Circle copy .................................................................. 35

Divide Stitches by Color .............................................. 75

Circles ......................................................................... 61

Docking ..................................................................... 299

Closed paths ............................................................... 64

Drawing ....................................................................... 60

Color button ........................................................ 46, 232

DST ................................................................... 252, 301

Color changes ............................................................. 88

Duplicate ..................................................................... 25

Color Option ...................................................... 142, 146

Color pane .................................................................. 12

Combining

Pattern colors ...................................................... 83

E/V stitch ........................................................... 320, 328

Concentric circle stitch ...................................... 321, 338

Editing

Center point ........................................................ 51

Grouped objects ................................................. 39

348

Index

Name Drop ....................................................... 127

H-Offset .................................................................... 337

Points .......................................................... 66, 264

Hole sewing ........................................................ 39, 235

Sewing order ...................................................... 84

Appliqué ............................................................ 162

Template ........................................................... 102

Cancel ................................................................ 40

Thread color charts ........................................... 194

Hoop changes ........................................................... 185

Thread colors .................................................... 195

Hooping .................................................................... 180

Emboss ............................................................... 57, 259

Horizontal Alignment ................................................. 112

Embroidered patch wizard ........................................ 166

H-Spacing ................................................................. 337

Embroidering .................................................... 181, 190

Patch ................................................................ 166

Embroidering area ............................................ 184, 189

Embroidery attributes for text ............................ 117, 118

Image to Stitch Wizard ...................................... 131, 147

Embroidery patterns

Image Tune ............................................................... 148

Adding comments ............................................... 88

Image Type ............................................................... 143

Aligning ............................................................... 32

Images

Centering ............................................................ 32

Converting formats ........................................... 252

Converting to embroidery patterns ... 131, 132, 147

Displaying ......................................................... 244

Moving .............................................................. 152

Exporting ............................................................ 95

Outputting ......................................................... 153

From images ............................................. 132, 147

Resizing ............................................................ 152

Grouping ............................................................. 39

Saving ............................................................... 153

Importing ........................................................... 245

Scaling .............................................................. 152

Information ........................................................ 253

Importing

Multi-position hoops .......................................... 184

.pem files .......................................................... 222

Printing ..................................................... 187

Background images .......................................... 271

Opening ............................................................ 245

Clipboard images ...................................... 151, 222

Organizing ........................................................ 243

Embroidery patterns ............................. 13, 91, 245

EMF ............................................................................ 93

From Design Center ........................................... 94

Engrave .............................................................. 57, 259

From original cards ..................................... 92, 250

Images ...................................................... 150, 222

Entry/exit points

Import pane ........................................................ 13

Moving ................................................................ 50

Name Drop list .................................................. 128

Eraser ....................................................................... 213

TWAIN images ................................................. 151

Expert mode ....................................................... 54, 233

Input

Exporting embroidery patterns .................................... 95

From Clipboard ................................................. 151

From file ............................................................ 150

From TWAIN device ......................................... 151

Inserting

Fan .............................................................................. 61

Stitch points ........................................................ 72

Figure Handle stage ................................................. 313

File

New line image ................................................. 225

Open in Layout & Editing .................................. 245

Jumbo frame ............................................................. 188

Search .............................................................. 251

Jump Stitch ............................................................... 297

File property .............................................................. 253

Jump Stitch Trimming ........................... 16, 87, 297, 302

Fill stitch ............................................................ 321, 333

Fill/Stamp mode ........................................................ 260

Flip ........................................................ 26, 34, 156, 228

Floating ..................................................................... 298

Kerning ............................................................. 109, 114

Floral pattern ............................................................... 42

Folders ...................................................................... 243

Font Creator ...................................................... 274, 318

Font filter ................................................................... 108

Font List .................................................................... 340

Large Thumbnails ..................................................... 244

Font selector ............................................................. 107

Layout & Editing .............................................. 9, 90, 307

Layout copy ................................................................ 35

Line color button ......................................................... 47

Line Image stage ...................................................... 312

Line Interval .............................................................. 146

Gradation ............................................................ 47, 234

Line sewing ......................................................... 49, 232

Grid ............................................................. 18, 230, 273

Line sewing attributes ............................................... 325

Grouping embroidery patterns .................................... 39

Line spacing .............................................................. 110

Guideline ..................................................................... 19

Link Function .................................................... 204, 250

Lock ............................................................................ 86

H-Arrange ................................................................. 326

Help button ................................................................. 12

Machine Type ............................................. 14, 227, 241

Hide .......................................................................... 299

Manual punch ........................................... 197, 277, 310

Hint View ............................................................. 54, 233

349

Index
Matrix copy .................................................................. 37

Oval ............................................................................. 60

Max. Density ............................................................. 146

Max. Number of Colors ..................................... 134, 137

Measure ................................................................ 20, 78

Measurement units ............................................. 20, 230

Pan ......................................................................77, 214

Merge .......................................................................... 41

Pattern .......................................................................... 8

Mirror copy .................................................................. 35

Pattern information .............................................. 88, 253

Modify ............................................................... 152, 230

Adding comments ............................................... 88

Monograms ....................................................... 120, 123

Multi-position hoops .......................................... 186

Motif mode ................................................................ 266

PE-DESIGN Software Key ............................................ 7

Motif stitch ................................................. 321, 326, 337

Pencil .......................................................................... 64

Moving
Photo Stitch 1 ............................................................ 139

Center points ....................................................... 51

Candidates ........................................................ 143

Embroidery patterns to center ............................. 32

Color ................................................................. 139

Entry/exit points .................................................. 50

Parameters .......................................................142

Images .............................................................. 152

Photo Stitch 2 ............................................................ 144

Stitch points ........................................................ 72

Color ................................................................. 146

Multi-position hoops .................................................. 183

Parameters .......................................................146

Piping stitch ....................................................... 321, 336

Points

Editing ......................................................... 66, 264

Name Drop Feature .......................................... 124, 127

Positioning Sheet ...................................................... 179

Name Drop List ................................................. 125, 128

Preview window ........................................................ 272

Net fill stitch ....................................................... 171, 339

Previewing .......................................................... 78, 253

New ............................................................................. 90

Stitch patterns ................................................... 272

New Line Image ........................................................ 225

Print and Stitch .......................................................... 154

NOT DEFINED ............................................................ 48

Printing

Not sewn

Catalogs ............................................................ 255

Line ..................................................................... 49

Embroidery patterns ........................................... 98

Region ................................................................. 49

Instruction guide ............................................... 255

Number of jumps ....................................................... 301

Multi-position hoops .......................................... 187

Preview ............................................................... 98

Settings ............................................................... 96

Programmable fill stitch ............................................. 333

Programmable Stitch Creator ........................... 258, 317

Offset ................................................ 109, 114, 326, 334

Pul Compensation .................................................... 332

Offset line .................................................................... 44

Online Registration ....................................................... 5

Open paths ................................................................. 64

Opening

.pem files ........................................................... 222

Quick Access Toolbar ................................. 11, 298, 300

.pes file ................................................................ 90

Background images .......................................... 271

Clipboard images ...................................... 151, 222

Embroidery patterns .................................... 94, 245

Radial stitch ...................................................... 321, 338

Images ...................................................... 150, 222

Center point ........................................................ 51

Layout & Editing file ............................................ 90

Realistic View .............................................................. 79

New Design Page ............................................... 90

Settings ............................................................... 79
New figure handle images ................................ 222

Rectangle .................................................................... 60

New line images ................................................ 222

Redo ......................................................................... 298

New stitch pattern ............................................. 266

Reference Window .............................................. 81, 228

Stitch patterns ................................................... 260

Region color button ................................................... 232

TWAIN images .................................................. 151

Region sewing .................................................... 49, 232

Optimizing

Remove Overlaps ....................................................... 40

Hoop changes ........................................... 185, 188

Resizing

Option

Images .............................................................. 152

Design Property ................................................ 186

Ribbon ......................................................................... 11

Edit User Thread Chart ..................................... 192

Rotate ........................................................... 33, 34, 228

Option button .............................................................. 11

Rotate angle .............................................................. 109

Options ...................................................................... 300

Rotating ....................................................................... 34

Organizing embroidery patterns ................................ 243

Ruler ........................................................................... 18

Outline ................................................................... 8, 116

Run Pitch .................................................................. 143

Convert to Outline ............................................... 76

Running stitch ................................................... 320, 325

Converted from text .......................................... 116

Text ................................................................... 118

Output

Template ........................................................... 103

To Clipboard ..................................................... 153

Satin stitch ........................................................ 321, 331

To File ............................................................... 153

350

Index

Saving

T
Different formats ................................................. 95

Embroidery patterns ................................... 95, 237

Template (background) ..................................... 271, 285

Images .............................................................. 153

Template Wizard ....................................................... 101

Name Drop list .................................................. 128

Text

Stitch patterns ................................................... 272

Convert to blocks .............................................. 115

Template ........................................................... 104

Convert to Outline Object ................................. 116

Scaling

Edit Letters ....................................................... 106

Images .............................................................. 152

Entering text ..................................................... 105

Scaling patterns .................................. 32, 264, 269, 287

Fit Text to Outline Setting ................................. 112

Screen Calibration ...................................................... 19

Release Text from Outline ................................ 113

Searching .................................................................. 251

Text Attribute Setting ........................................ 107

Select from Candidates ............................................ 143

TrueType Font Attribute Setting ....................... 110

Selecting

Text Attribute pane ..................................................... 12

All embroidery patterns ....................................... 31

Text menu ................................................................. 308

Colors ................................................. 71, 143, 146

Text Orientation ........................................................ 112

Patterns ........................................................ 31, 84

Text patterns ................................................................. 8

Sewing area ........................................................ 16

Text Size selector ..................................................... 109

Sew Page Color ........................................................ 143

Thread Chart ..................................................... 142, 146

Sew Setting stage ..................................................... 314

Thread colors

Sew type selector ............................................... 49, 232

Adding to charts ................................................ 194

Sewing Attribute pane ................................................. 14

Creating new colors .......................................... 194

Sewing attributes ........................................................ 65

Deleting charts .................................................. 193

Copy ................................................................... 55

Deleting from charts ......................................... 195

Setting ........................................................ 54, 217

Editing ............................................................... 195

Sewing Attributes bar ................................................ 232

Editing charts .................................................... 194

Sewing direction

New charts ........................................................ 192

Programmable fill stitch .................................... 335

Order ................................................................ 195

Specifying ........................................................... 51

Total colors ......................................................... 88

Sewing Option .................................................. 143, 146

User list ............................................................. 195

Sewing order ....................................................... 82, 236

Thread Colors Used .................................................. 146

Editing ................................................................. 84

Thumbnail ......................................................... 244, 304

Optimaze ............................................................ 38

Transferring .............................................. 201, 204, 246

Sewing Order pane ..................................................... 12

Triple stitch ............................................................... 325

Shape patterns ............................................................. 8

TrueType Font .......................................................... 108

Shortcut keys ............................................................ 301

Show grid .............................................................. 12, 18

Small Text ................................................................. 118

Snap to grid ................................................................ 18

Under sewing .................................................... 325, 331

Solid View ................................................................... 78

Undo ................................................................. 214, 298

Special colors ............................................................. 48

Unit ..................................................................... 20, 230

Spiral stitch ....................................................... 321, 338

USB cable ......................................................... 201, 248

Split embroidery designs .......................................... 177

USB media ........................................................ 201, 247

Split Stitch data ....................................... 42, 73, 74, 216

User thread color list ................................................. 192

Stabilizer ................................................................... 179

Stage

To figure handle ................................................ 226

To line image .................................................... 224

V-Arrange ................................................................. 326

To Sew Setting ................................................. 231

Vector images ............................................................. 93

Stamp ................................................................. 58, 236

Vertical Alignment ..................................................... 112

Start/end point .......................................................... 330

Vertical Offset ........................................................... 109

Startup wizard ............................................................. 10

View mode buttons ..................................................... 12

Status bar ................................................................... 12

V-Offset ..................................................................... 337

Stem Stitch ....................................................... 320, 327

V-Spacing ................................................................. 337

Step Pitch ......................................................... 333, 334

Stippling stitch ................................................... 321, 338

Stitch patterns ............................................................... 8

W
Previewing ........................................................ 272

Window ....................................................................... 11

Saving ............................................................... 272

Stitch points

WMF ........................................................................... 93

Deleting .............................................................. 72

Inserting .............................................................. 72

Moving ................................................................ 72

Stitch Simulator ..................................................... 12, 80

Zigzag net fill stitch ................................................... 339

Stitch to Block ............................................................. 75

Zigzag stitch ...................................................... 321, 325

Stitch View .................................................................. 78

Zoom ........................................................................... 77

String .......................................................................... 61

Zoom ratio ................................................................... 12

SVG ............................................................................ 93

351
PED_10_BrotherE_IM_cover_1-4

CMYK

Personal Embroidery Design Software System

Instruction Manual

Instruction Manual

Please visit us at http://support.brother.com where you can get product support

and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs).

Before using this software, first read the Reference Guide for details on
installing or upgrading the software.
English

In addition, be sure to read this Instruction Manual before using the software.

We recommend that you keep this document nearby for future reference.
Document Outline
Table of Contents
How To Use Manuals
Support/Service
Technical Support
Online Registration
Checking for the Latest Version of the Program
PE-DESIGN Software Key
Comparison of Types of Data Created With PE-DESIGN 10
Starting Up/Exiting Applications
Starting Up the Application
Exiting the Application
About the Startup Wizard
Understanding Windows
Layout & Editing Window
Example of Importing Embroidery Data
Basic Software Settings
Specifying the Design Page Settings
Using Fabric Selector
Specifying Basic Display Settings
Basic Layout & Editing Operations
Tutorial 1: Drawing shapes to create an embroidery design
Editing Embroidery Designs
Specifying Thread Colors and Sew Types for Lines and Regions
Drawing Shapes
Reshaping Embroidery Patterns
Editing a Stitch Pattern
Checking Embroidery Patterns
Opening/Importing Embroidery Designs
Saving and Printing
Creating Embroidery Patterns Containing Text
Tutorial 2: Using Templates
Template Feature
Tutorial 3: Entering text
Advanced Operations for Entering Text
 Tutorial 4: Monograms
Advanced Operations for Entering Monograms
Tutorial 5: Creating Name Drop
Name Drop Feature (Replacing Text)
Creating Embroidery Patterns Using Images
Stitch Wizard: Automatically Converting an Image to an Embroidery
Design
Tutorial 6-1: Auto Punch
Auto Punch Features
Tutorial 6-2: Cross Stitch
Cross Stitch Features
Tutorial 6-3: Photo Stitch 1
Photo Stitch 1 Features
Tutorial 6-4: Photo Stitch 2
Photo Stitch 2 Features
Advanced Stitch Wizard Operations
Importing Image Data
Changing the Image Settings
Tutorial 7: Print and Stitch
Operations for Specific Applications
Tutorial 8-1: Creating Appliqués
Tutorial 8-2: Creating Embroidered Patches
Tutorial 8-3: Creating a Cutwork Pattern Filled with Net Stitching
On Using the Cutwork Functions
Tutorial 9-1: Creating Split Embroidery Designs
Tutorial 9-2: Creating Design for Multi- Position Hoops
Tutorial 9-3: Embroidering With the Jumbo Frame
Specifying/Saving Custom Sewing Attributes
Using Manual Punch Tool
Transferring Data
Transferring Embroidery Designs to Machines
Using the Link Function to Embroider From the Computer
Design Center
Basic Design Center Operations
Design Center Window
Original Image Stage
Line Image Stage
Figure Handle Stage
Sew Setting Stage
Design Database
Design Database Window
Starting Up Design Database
Organizing Embroidery Designs
Opening Embroidery Designs
Transferring Embroidery Designs to Machines
Searching for an Embroidery Design
Converting Embroidery Design Files to Different Formats
Checking Embroidery Designs
Outputting a Catalog of Embroidery Designs
Programmable Stitch Creator
Basic Programmable Stitch Creator Operations
Creating Fill/Stamp Stitch Pattern
Editing a Pattern in Fill/Stamp Mode
Creating Motif Stitch Pattern
Editing a Pattern in Motif Mode
Programmable Stitch Creator Window
Opening a Template
Preview Window
Saving Patterns
Changing the Settings
Font Creator
Basic Font Creator Operations
Font Creator Window
Opening a File
Selecting a Character and Preparing the Template
Creating a Font Character Pattern
Editing the Points of a Font Character Pattern
Checking the Created Font Patterns
Saving Font Character Patterns
Changing the Settings
Supplement
For Basic Operations
On Settings
Changing Various Settings
For Making an Effective Use of This Application
Menus/Tools and Reference
Layout & Editing
Design Center
 Design Database
Programmable Stitch Creator
Font Creator
Sewing Attributes
Font List
Troubleshooting
New Features of PE-DESIGN 10
Index